AC1615S Technical catalog Tmax T generation Molded case circuit breakers Power and productivity for a better world TM Table of contents Tmax Introduction Main characteristics 1 The ranges 2 Accessories information 3 Curves and technical information 4 Wiring diagrams 5 Overall dimensions 6 Part numbers 7 T Generation Tmax. Adaptability and versatility Tmax is freedom. Freedom now reaching up to 1200 A netic only, thermal magnetic and electronic trip units. Also with the new Tmax T7 circuit breaker. There's a boundless a wide range of accessories are available together with and highly diversified world of differing types of installa- the possibility of selecting dedicated families for all market tions, requirements, needs and problems from 15 to 1200 applications, even the most specific and advanced. A. With the T Generation everything becomes simple and rational - eight sizes to find the solutions you're looking for. BE FREE TO INSTALL ALL SIZES WITHOUT DIFFICULTY. T Generation is undeniably the family of molded case BE FREE TO SIZE ANY TYPE OF INSTALLATION IN circuit breakers with the best performance/size ratio AN IDEAL WAY AT ALL TIMES. available on the market. Thanks to the eight sizes and a complete series of mag- This means there is more space there is for cabling can offer you, such as the brand new UL 489 supplement and simpler installation. There is also a reduction in the SE electronic trip units designed for the new Tmax T7 or dimensions of the switchboard. the new rapid accessory fitting system. BE FREE TO RIDE THE MOST ADVANCED TECHNOLOGY. It is thanks to this technology that T Generation now offers performance levels that were previously out of the question in circuit breakers with these dimensions. There are also some exclusive technical solutions which only ABB FREEDOM FOR TOTALLY SAFE SELECTION. The safety of knowing that behind Tmax there is ABB's strong and constant commitment to the search for excellence at the base of each product and service. ABB quality. Tmax T1, T2, Ts3 and T3 All solutions perfectly coordinated, up to 225 A. Tmax T1, T2, Ts3 and T3 - the four "little ones" of the Tmax family - were thought up from the beginning to work together. You can select functions and performances which until now could not be found in circuit breakers with these dimensions. Perfect up to 225 A. There are many characteristics common to the T1, T2 and T3 frames. The single depth 2.76" (70 mm) of the three frames makes installation truly simpler. The new arcing chambers are produced with a gasifying material and an innovative construction system allows the arc extinction time to be reduced. All three sizes are fitted with standard adjustment of the thermal threshold and have new three-pole and four-poles designed and constructed to optimize space in the switch- board and simplify coupling with the circuit breaker. Tmax T1, T2 and T3 have a completely standardized range of accessories. TMAX T1. THE LITTLE ONE THAT'S REALLY BIG. Thanks to its extremely compact dimensions, Tmax T1 is a unique circuit breaker in its category. Compared to any other circuit breaker with the same performance (100 A - up to 50 kA at 240 VAC), the overall dimensions of the apparatus are notably smaller. TMAX T2. INTELLIGENCE AND HIGH PERFORMANCE IN THE PALM OF YOUR HAND. Tmax T2 is the only 100 A circuit breaker available with such high performances in such compact overall dimensions. A breaking capacity of 150 kA at 240 VAC can be achieved. Tmax T2 can also be fitted with a latest generation electronic trip unit. TMAX T3. 225 A IN A DEPTH OF 2.76" (70 MM) FOR THE FIRST TIME. Tmax T3 is the first circuit breaker which carries 225 A in considerably smaller overall dimensions compared to any other similar device - a large step forward for this type of breaker. TMAX Ts3 ABB Tmax Ts3 circuit breaker, in the 150 A frame, can be used at 600 VAC providing excellent interrupting rating performance. The possibility of having circuit breakers certified for use at this voltage allows perfect standardization of the apparatus both on the US and the Canadian market, where 600 V is most widely used. Tmax T4, T5 and T6 Be free to choose up to 800 A. Tmax T4, T5 and T6 are the molded case circuit breakers The top quality materials and innovative construction with the best performance/size ratio on the market. techniques used by ABB mean Tmax circuit breakers can The possibilities are practically unlimited, thanks to their guarantee truly exceptional performance. For example, dedicated and specific ranges, advanced electronics, as T4 and T5 have an interrupting capacity up to 150 kA at well as a complete and standardized range of accesso- 480 VAC. ries. The series of electronic trip units, equipped with latest generation technology, offers solutions exclusive to ABB. T4, T5 and T6 have the same depth, simplifying their use in switchboards, and also have a complete, standardized and unified range of accessories, simplifying selection, making them more flexible and reducing stock item count. Tmax T7 Freedom to the Nth degree. The new Tmax T7, available up to 1200 A either with Additionally, cabling is facilitated by the reduced height. a manual operating mechanism or motor operator, The new rapid accessory wiring system is great news. was conceived with a revolutionary design for circuit There are no loose wires inside the circuit breaker. breakers of this type: advanced electronics, exceptional Connection to the external circuit is rapid, simple and safe performance and new installation and accessory solutions. and no screws for terminating the external power supply cables are needed. Tmax T7's flexibility is absolutely exceptional: it can be installed both vertically and horizontally (in both fixed and The new cable interlock provides notable benefits in terms draw out versions) with all types of terminals and a new, of flexible applications. By using this accessory it is possi- faster and safer racking-out system for moving parts. ble to interlock two circuit breakers in any position and to interlock a T7 with an Emax power circuit breaker as well. Special attention has been paid to the electronics and the The PR231 and PR232 trip units, with dip-switches for results are the PR231, PR232, PR331 and PR332 new setting the protection thresholds, offer LEDs to signal interchangeable electronic trip units, with modules and tripping for each protection function: so the reason for rating-plugs which can be replaced by the customer. circuit breaker tripping can always be easily found. The PR332 is decidedly ahead of its time fitted with a large graphic display, it allows all the information needed to be displayed simply and clearly. It also offers advanced protection functions. For example, the exclusive data logger function allows all the events and values before the fault to be recorded for later analysis. Table of contents Tmax main characteristics Overview of the Tmax family T1...Ts3 general overview T4...T6 general overview T7...T8 general overview 1/2 1/3 1/4 Construction characteristics Distinguishing features of the series 1/5 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 1/1 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overview of the Tmax family MCCB T1 1p T1 T2 T3 Ts3 Ts3 100 1 347 B 18(1) 14(1) * - 100 3-4 600Y/347 500 N 50(2) 22(2) 10 25 25 * - 100 3-4 480 - 225 3-4 600Y/347 500 N S 50 65 25 35 10 10 25 35 25 35 * * 150 2-3-4 600 600 H 100 50 14 50 35 * * 225 2-3-4 480 500 H 100 50 35 * * - - 5.12/130 1/25.4 2.76/70 25000 5.12/130 3/76 2.76/70 25000 Breaker type Frame size Number of poles Rated voltage Interrupting ratings Trip units Dimensions Mechanical life [A] [No.] AC (50-60 Hz) [V] DC [V] Frame type 240 V AC [kA rms] 277 V AC [kA rms] 347 V AC [kA rms] 480 V AC [kA rms] 600Y/347 V AC [kA rms] 600 V AC [kA rms] 250 V DC (2 poles in series) [kA rms] 500 V DC (3 poles in series) [kA rms] 500 V DC (2 poles in series) [kA rms] 600 V DC (3 poles in series) [kA rms] TMF TMD/TMA MA Electronic PR221DS Electronic PR222DS/P Electronic PR222DS/PD-A Electronic PR231/P Electronic PR232/P Electronic PR331/P Electronic PR332/P H [in/mm] W 3p [in/mm] D [in/mm] [No. operations] S 65 35 - H 150 65 * * * N 65 25 14 35 20 L 150 85(3) 25 65 50 - - - - 5.12/130 3.54/90 2.76/70 25000 5.9/150 4.13/105 2.76/70 25000 6.7/170 4.13/105 4.07/103.5 25000 6.7/170 4.13/105 4.07/103.5 25000 (1) In 15A = 10 kA at 277V AC - 10 kA at 347V AC (2) In 15A = 35 kA at 240V AC - 14 kA at 480Y/277V AC (3) In 15A up to 30A = 65kA at 480V AC MCP T2 T3 100 3 20...100 225 3 100...200 S 65 35 10 35 * - 3...25 L 50 25 10 65(1) 50 Breaker type Frame size Number of poles Ratings Interrupting ratings Trip units [A] [No.] [A] Frame type 240 V AC [kA rms] 480 V AC [kA rms] 600Y/347 V AC [kA rms] 600 V AC [kA rms] 500 V DC (3 poles in series) [kA rms] 600 V DC (3 poles in series) [kA rms] Magnetic only adjustable (6...12xIn) Magnetic only adjustable (4...12xIn) S 65 35 - H 150 65 * - Ts3 150 2-3-4 50...150 175...200 L L 150 150 85 65 25 65 50 50 * (1) Only for 25A rating MCS Breaker type Frame size Number of poles Magnetic override Rated voltage [A] [No.] [A] AC (50-60 Hz) [V] DC [V] 1/2 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL N 65 25 20 - T1N T3S T3S Ts3H Ts3H 100 3-4 1000 600Y/347 500 150 3-4 1500 600Y/347 500 225 3-4 2250 600Y/347 500 150 3-4 1500 600 600 225 3-4 2250 480 500 L 150 65 50 - Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overview of the Tmax family MCCB T4 T5 T6 250 2(2)-3-4 600 600 H 150 65 35 50 35 * * - 400-600(1) 2(2)-3-4 600 600 S H L 100 150 200 35 65 100 25 35 65 35 50 65 25 35 50 * - 800 3-4 600 600 Breaker type Frame size Number of poles [A] [No.] AC (50-60 Hz) [V] Rated voltage DC [V] Frame type 240 V AC [kA rms] 277 V AC [kA rms] 347 V AC [kA rms] 480 V AC [kA rms] Interrupting ratings 600Y/347 V AC [kA rms] 600 V AC [kA rms] 250 V DC (2 poles in series) [kA rms] 500 V DC (3 poles in series) [kA rms] 500 V DC (2 poles in series) [kA rms] 600 V DC (3 poles in series) [kA rms] TMF TMD/TMA MA Electronic PR221DS Electronic PR222DS/P Trip units Electronic PR222DS/PD-A Electronic PR231/P Electronic PR232/P Electronic PR331/P Electronic PR332/P H [in/mm] Dimensions W 3p [in/mm] D [in/mm] Mechanical life [No. operations] N 65 25 18 25 16 S 100 35 25 35 25 L 200 100 65 65 50 V 200 150 100 100 65 N 65 25 18 25 16 V 200 150 100 100 65 N 65 35 20 35 20 S 100 50 25 35 20 H 200 65 35 50 35 L 200 100 42 65 50 * - - - - * * * * * * * * * - - - 8.07/205 4.13/105 4.07/103.5 20000 8.07/205 5.51/140 4.07/103.5 20000 10.55/268 8.26/210 4.07/103.5 20000 (1) T5 600 with electronic trip units only and in 3 pole version (2) 2P only available in the N interrupting rating MCP Breaker type Frame size Number of poles Ratings Interrupting ratings Trip units [A] [No.] [A] Frame type 240 V AC [kA rms] 480 V AC [kA rms] 600Y/347 V AC [kA rms] 600 V AC [kA rms] 500 V DC (3 poles in series) [kA rms] 600 V DC (3 poles in series) [kA rms] Electronic PR221DS-I N 65 25 18 - T4 T5 T6 250 3 100-150-250 S H 100 150 35 65 25 35 * 400-600 3 300-400-600 S H 100 150 35 65 25 35 * 800 3 600-800 S H 100 200 50 65 25 35 * L 200 100 65 - N 65 25 18 - L 200 100 65 - N 65 35 20 - L 200 100 42 - MCS Breaker type Frame size Number of poles Magnetic override Rated voltage [A] [No.] [A] AC (50-60 Hz) [V] DC [V] T4N-S-H-L-V T5N-S-H-L-V T6H 250 3-4 3000 600 600 400-600 3-4 5000 600 600 800 3-4 10000 600 600 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 1/3 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overview of the Tmax family MCCB Breaker type Frame size Number of poles Rated voltage Interrupting ratings Trip units Dimensions Mechanical life [A] [No.] AC (50-60 Hz) [V] DC [V] Frame type 240 V AC [kA rms] 277 V AC [kA rms] 347 V AC [kA rms] 480 V AC [kA rms] 600Y/347 V AC [kA rms] 600 V AC [kA rms] 250 V DC (2 poles in series) [kA rms] 500 V DC (3 poles in series) [kA rms] 500 V DC (2 poles in series) [kA rms] 600 V DC (3 poles in series) [kA rms] TMF TMD/TMA MA Electronic PR221DS Electronic PR222DS/P Electronic PR222DS/PD-A Electronic PR231/P Electronic PR232/P Electronic PR331/P Electronic PR332/P H [in/mm] W 3p [in/mm] D [in/mm] [No. operations] S 65 50 25 - T7 T8 1000-1200 3-4 600 H 100 65 50 - 1600-2000-2500-3000 3-4 600 V 125 125 125 - L 150 100 65 - * * * * 10.55/268 8.26/210 6.06/154 (toggle) - 7/178 (motorized) 10000 * * 15/382 16.8/427 11.2/282 15000 MCS Breaker type Frame size Number of poles Magnetic override Rated voltage [A] [No.] [A] AC (50-60 Hz) [V] DC [V] 1/4 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL T7 T8 1200 3-4 20000 600 - 2000-2500-3000 3-4 40000 600 - Tmax molded case circuit breakers Distinguishing features of the series Double insulation Tmax has double insulation between the live power parts (excluding the terminals) and the front of the apparatus where the operator works during normal operation of the device. The placement of each electrical accessory is completely segregated from the power circuit, preventing any risk of contact with live parts and the operating mechanism is completely insulated from the powered circuits. Furthermore, the circuit breaker has oversized insulation, both between the live internal parts and in the area of the connection terminals. In fact, the distances exceed those required by the IEC Standards and comply with the UL 489 Standard. Positive operation The operating lever always indicates the precise position of the moving contacts of the circuit breaker, thereby providing safe and reliable signals, in compliance with IEC 60073 and IEC 60417-2 Standard (I = Closed; O = Open; yellow-green line = Open due to protection trip). The circuit breaker operating mechanism is trip free regardless of the pressure on the lever. Protection tripping automatically opens the moving contacts: to close them again the operating mechanism must be reset by pushing the operating lever from the tripped position into the reset position. Isolation behaviour In the open position, the circuit breaker complies with the IEC 60947-2 Standard. The oversized insulation distances guarantee there are no leakage currents and dielectric resistance to any overvoltages between input and output. Degrees of protection C B The table indicates the degrees of protection guaranteed by the Tmax circuit breakers according to the IEC 60529 Standard: A B (1) (2) Type With front Without front (2) Without terminal covers With high terminal covers With low terminal covers With IP40 protection kit on the front A B(4) C IP 40(3) IP 20 - IP 20 IP 20 - - IP 20 - - IP 40 IP 40(1) - IP 40 IP 30(1) - IP 40 - After correct installation During installation of the electrical accessories (3) (4) Also for front for lever operating mechanism and direct rotary handle Only for T1...T6 The cradles are always preset with IP20 degree of protection. IP54 degree of protection can be obtained with the circuit breaker installed in a switchboard fitted with a rotary handle operating mechanism transmitted on the compartment door and special kit (RHE - IP54). Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 1/5 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Distinguishing features of the series Operating temperature The Tmax circuit breakers can be used in ambient conditions where air temperature varies between -13 F and +158 F (-25 C and +70 C), and stored in environments with temperatures between -40 F and +158 F (-40 C and +70 C). The circuit breakers fitted with thermal magnetic trip units have their thermal element set for a reference temperature of 104 F (+40 C). For temperatures other than 104 F (+40 C), with the same setting, there is a devation table as shown beginning on page 4/50. The electronic trip units do not undergo any variations in performance as the temperature varies except in cases of temperatures exceeding 104 F (+40 C). Then maximum setting for protection against overloads L must be reduced, as indicated in the derating graph beginning on page 4/37, to take into account the heating phenomena which occur in the current carrying copper parts of the circuit breaker. For temperatures above 158 F (+70 C) the circuit breaker performances are not guaranteed. To ensure service continuity of the installations, the temperature must be kept within acceptable levels for operation of the various devices and the circuit breakers by using forced ventilation in the switchboards or in their installation room. Altitude Up to an altitude of 6600 ft the Tmax circuit breakers do not undergo any changes in their rated performance. Above this altitude, the atmospheric properties are altered in terms of composition, dielectric resistance, cooling capacity and pressure, requiring the circuit breaker performance to be derated per the table below. Altitude Rated service voltage, Ue Rated uninterrupted current, Iu [ft] 6600 9900 13200 16500 [V~] %Iu 600 100 522 98 435 93 348 90 Electromagnetic compatibility Protection operation is guaranteed by using the electronic trip units and the electronic residual current releases in the presence of interference caused by electronic devices, atmospheric disturbances or electrical discharges. No interference with other electronic devices near the place of installation is generated either. This is in compliance with the IEC 60947-2 Appendix B + Appendix F Standards and European Directive No. 89/336 regarding EMC - electromagnetic compatibility. Tropicalization Circuit breakers and accessories in the Tmax series are tested in compliance with the IEC 60068-2-30 Standard, carrying out 2 cycles at 131 F (55 C) with the "variant 1" method (clause 6.3.3). The suitability of the Tmax series for use under the most severe environmental conditions is therefore ensured with the hot-humid climate defined in the climatograph 8 of the IEC 60721-2-1 Standards thanks to: - moulded insulating cases made of synthetic resins reinforced with glass fibres; - anti-corrosion treatment of the main metallic parts; - Fe/Zn 12 zinc-plating (ISO 2081) protected by a conversion layer, free from hexavalent-chromium (ROHS-compliant), with the same corrosion resistance guaranteed by ISO 4520 class 2c; - application of anti-condensation protection for electronic overcurrent releases and relative accessories. 1/6 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Distinguishing features of the series Resistance to shock and vibration The circuit breakers are unaffected by vibrations generated mechanically or due to electromagnetic effects, in compliance with the IEC 60068-2-6 Standards and the regulations of the major classification organizations(1): - RINA - Det Norske Veritas - Bureau Veritas - Lloyd's register of shipping - Germanischer Lloyd - ABS - Russian Maritime Register of Shipping. The T1-T5 Tmax circuit breakers are also tested according to the IEC 60068-2-27 Standard to resist shock up to 12g for 11 ms. Please ask ABB for details about higher performance in terms of resistance to shock. (1) Ask to ABB for Tmax certificates of approval. Versions and types All the Tmax circuit breakers are available in fixed versions, T2, T3, Ts3, T4 and T5 in the plug-in version and Ts3, T4, T5, T6 and T7 also in the draw out one. All the circuit breakers can be manually operated by the operating lever or the rotary handle (direct or variable depth), and electrically operated. For electric operation different solutions are available: - The solenoid operator for T1, T2 and T3 - The direct action motor operator for Ts3 - The stored energy motor operator for T4, T5 and T6 - T7 with the stored energy operating mechanism, gear motor for the charging of the closing springs and shunt opening and closing releases. Installation Tmax circuit breakers can be installed in switchboards mounted in any horizontal, vertical or lying down position on the back plate or on rails, without undergoing any derating. Tmax circuit breakers can be easily installed in all types of switchboards, thanks to the possibility of being reversefed. Apart from fixing on the base plate, T1, T2 and T3 can also be installed on DIN 50022 rails and Ts3 can also be installed on DIN 50023 rails thanks to the special fixing brackets. Furthermore, the depth of 2.76 inches (70 mm) takes Tmax T3 to the same depth as the two smaller sizes, making assembly of circuit breakers up to 225 A in standard switchboards even simpler. In fact, it is possible to prepare standardized support structures, facilitating the design stage and construction of the switchboard interior. Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 1/7 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Distinguishing features of the series Racking-out with the door closed With Tmax Ts3, T4, T5, T6 and T7 circuit breakers in the draw out version the circuit breaker can be racked-in and out with the compartment door closed, increasing operator safety and allowing realization of low voltage arc proof switchboards. Racking out can only be carried out with the circuit breaker open (for safety reasons), using a special racking-out crank handle supplied with the conversion kit from fixed circuit breaker to moving part of draw out circuit breaker. Range of accessories The completeness and installation rationality of the Tmax series is also achieved thanks to innovative solutions in development of the accessories: - single range of accessories for T1, T2 and T3; one for T4, T5 and T6, and one for T7, characterised by completeness and simplicity for installation. The Ts3 due to its unique characteristics has its own group of accessories. Harmonization of the accessories allows reduction in stocks and greater service flexibility, offering increasing advantages for users of the Tmax series; - new system of rapid assembly for internal electrical accessories of Tmax T7 without cables for the connections to the terminal box; - same possibility of equipping with terminals, in terms of connection devices (terminals, terminal covers and phase separators), between fixed circuit breakers and cradles of plug-in circuit breakers for Tmax T2 and T3. - moreover, Tmax offers a wide choice of IEC rated residual current releases (IEC only): - three-pole and four-pole RC221 and RC222 up to 225 A with T1, T2 and T3; - RC211 and RC212 for Ts3; - RC222, four-pole up to 500 A for T4 and T5; - RC223 (type B) also sensitive to currents with continuous slowly variable components (IEC 60947-2 Annex M), four-pole for T3 and T4, up to 250 A. 1/8 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Distinguishing features of the series Compliance with Standards and company Quality System The Tmax circuit breakers and their electrical accessories conform to the UL 489 (Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated) and CSA C22.2 No. 5.1 (Canadian Standard Association) North American Standards, and to the international IEC 60947-2 Standards and comply with the EC directive: - "Low Voltage Directives" (LVD) no. 2006/95/CE (replaces 72/23/EEC and subsequent amendments) - "Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive" (EMC) no. 89/336 EEC. Certification of compliance with the above-mentioned product Standards is carried out, in respect of the European EN 45011 Standard, by the Italian certification body ACAE (Association for Certification of Electrical Apparatus), a member of the European LOVAG organization (Low Voltage Agreement Group). The ABB test laboratory is accredited by SINAL (certificate no. 062/2002). The ABB Quality System complies with the international ISO 9001 - 2000 Standard (model for quality assurance in design, development, construction, installation and service) and with the equivalent European EN ISO 9001 and Italian UNI EN ISO 9001 Standards. The independent certifying Body is RINA S.p.A. ABB obtained its first certification with three-year validity in 1990, and has now reached its fourth reconfirmation. The new Tmax series has a hologram on the front, obtained using special anti-imitation techniques, which guarantees the quality and that the circuit breaker is an original ABB product. Attention to protection of the environment and to health and safety in the work place is another priority commitment for ABB and, as confirmation of this, the company environmental management system has been certified by RINA in 1997, in conformity with the international ISO 14001 Standard. This certification has been integrated in 1999 with the Management System for Healt and Safety in the workplace, according to OHSAS 18001 (British Standards), obtaining one of the first certification of integrated management System, QES (Quality, Environment, Safety) issued by RINA. ABB - the first industry in the electromechanical section in Italy to obtain this recognition - thanks to a revision of the production process with an eye to ecology, has been able to reduce the consumption of raw materials and processing waste by 20%. ABB's commitment to safeguarding the environment is also shown by the Life Cycle Assessments of its products carried out directly by ABB Research and Development in collaboration with the ABB Research Center. Selection of materials, processes and packing materials is made optimizing the true environmental impact of the product, also foreseeing the possibility of its being recycled. Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 1/9 Table of contents Tmax main characteristics Power distribution circuit breakers Electrical characteristics General characteristics Thermal magnetic trip units Electronic trip units 2/2 2/4 2/6 2/8 Motor control protection circuit breakers : MCP Electrical characteristics General characteristics 2/30 2/31 Molded case switch : MCS Electrical characteristics 2/33 Current limiting circuit breakers Electrical characteristics 2/34 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 2/1 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Electrical characteristics T1 1p T1 T2 T3 Ts3 Ts3 100 1 347 B 18(1) 14(1) F * - 100 3-4 600Y/347 500 N 50(2) 22(2) 10 25 25 F * - 100 3-4 480 - 225 3-4 600Y/347 500 N S 50 65 25 35 10 10 25 35 25 35 F-P * * 150 2-3-4 600 600 H 100 50 14 50 35 F-P-W * * 225 2-3-4 480 500 H 100 50 35 F-P-W * * - - 5.12/130 1/25.4 2.76/70 25000 5.12/130 3/76 2.76/70 25000 Breaker type Frame size Number of poles Rated voltage Interrupting ratings [A] [No.] AC (50-60 Hz) [V] DC [V] Frame type 240 V AC [kA rms] 277 V AC [kA rms] 347 V AC [kA rms] 480 V AC [kA rms] 600Y/347 V AC [kA rms] 600 V AC [kA rms] 250 V DC (2 poles in series) [kA rms] 500 V DC (3 poles in series) [kA rms] 500 V DC (2 poles in series) [kA rms] 600 V DC (3 poles in series) [kA rms] Version Trip units Dimensions Mechanical life TMF TMD/TMA MA Electronic PR221DS Electronic PR222DS/P Electronic PR222DS/PD-A Electronic PR231/P Electronic PR232/P Electronic PR331/P Electronic PR332/P H [in/mm] W 3p [in/mm] D [in/mm] [No. operations] (1) In 15A = 10 kA at 277V AC - 10 kA at 347V AC (2) In 15A = 35 kA at 240V AC - 14 kA at 480Y/277V AC (3) In 15A up to 30A = 65kA at 480V AC F - FIXED P - PLUG-IN W - WITHDRAWABLE 2/2 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL S 65 35 - H 150 65 F-P * * * N 65 25 14 35 20 L 150 85(3) 25 65 50 N 65 25 20 - - - - - 5.12/130 3.54/90 2.76/70 25000 5.9/150 4.13/105 2.76/70 25000 6.7/170 4.13/105 4.07/103.5 25000 6.7/170 4.13/105 4.07/103.5 25000 L 150 65 50 - Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Electrical characteristics Breaker type Frame size Number of poles [A] [No.] AC (50-60 Hz) [V] Rated voltage DC [V] Frame type 240 V AC [kA rms] 277 V AC [kA rms] 347 V AC [kA rms] 480 V AC [kA rms] Interrupting ratings 600Y/347 V AC [kA rms] 600 V AC [kA rms] 250 V DC (2 poles in series) [kA rms] 500 V DC (3 poles in series) [kA rms] 500 V DC (2 poles in series) [kA rms] 600 V DC (3 poles in series) [kA rms] Version TMF TMD/TMA MA Electronic PR221DS Electronic PR222DS/P Trip units Electronic PR222DS/PD-A Electronic PR231/P Electronic PR232/P Electronic PR331/P Electronic PR332/P H [in/mm] Dimensions W 3p [in/mm] D [in/mm] Mechanical life [No. operations] N 65 25 18 25 16 S 100 35 25 35 25 T4 T5 T6 250 2(2)-3-4 600 600 H 150 65 35 50 35 F-P-W * * - 400-600(1) 2(2)-3-4 600 600 S H L 100 150 200 35 65 100 25 35 65 35 50 65 25 35 50 F-P-W * - 800 3-4 600 600 L 200 100 65 65 50 V 200 150 100 100 65 N 65 25 18 25 16 V 200 150 100 100 65 N 65 35 20 35 20 S 100 50 25 35 20 H 200 65 35 50 35 L 200 100 42 65 50 F-W * - - - - * * * * * * * * * - - - 8.07/205 4.13/105 4.07/103.5 20000 8.07/205 5.51/140 4.07/103.5 20000 10.55/268 8.26/210 4.07/103.5 20000 (1) T5 600 with electronic trip units only and in 3 pole version (2) 2P only available in the N interrupting rating Electrical characteristics Breaker type Frame size Number of poles Rated voltage [A] [No.] AC (50-60 Hz) [V] DC [V] Frame type 240 V AC [kA rms] 277 V AC [kA rms] 347 V AC [kA rms] 480 V AC [kA rms] Interrupting ratings 600Y/347 V AC [kA rms] 600 V AC [kA rms] 250 V DC (2 poles in series) [kA rms] 500 V DC (3 poles in series) [kA rms] 500 V DC (2 poles in series) [kA rms] 600 V DC (3 poles in series) [kA rms] Version TMF TMD/TMA MA Electronic PR221DS Electronic PR222DS/P Trip units Electronic PR222DS/PD-A Electronic PR231/P Electronic PR232/P Electronic PR331/P Electronic PR332/P H [in/mm] Dimensions W 3p [in/mm] D [in/mm] Mechanical life [No. operations] S 65 50 25 - T7 T8 1000-1200 3-4 600 H 100 65 50 F-W - 1600-2000-2500-3000 3-4 600 V 125 125 125 F - L 150 100 65 - * * * * 10.55/268 8.26/210 6.06/154 (toggle) - 7/178 (motorized) 10000 * * 15/382 16.8/427 11.2/282 15000 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 2/3 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers General characteristics The series of Tmax molded case circuit breakers - complying with the UL 489 and CSA C22.2 No. 5 Standards - is divided into different basic sizes, with an application range from 15 A to 3000 A and breaking capacities up to 150 kA at 480 VAC. For protection of alternating current networks, the following are available: - T1B 1p, T1, T2, T3, Ts3 and T4 circuit breakers equipped with TMF thermal magnetic trip units with fixed thermal and magnetic threshold (I3 = 10 x In); - T4 (up to 50 A) circuit breaker equipped with TMD thermal magnetic trip units with adjustable thermal threshold (I1 = 0.7...1 x In) and fixed magnetic threshold (I3 = 10 x In); - T4, T5 and T6 circuit breakers with TMA thermal magnetic trip units with adjustable thermal threshold (I1 = 0.7...1 x In) and adjustable magnetic threshold (I3 = 5...10 x In); - T2 with PR221DS electronic trip unit; - T4, T5 and T6 with PR221DS, PR222DS/P and PR222DS/PD-A electronic trip units; - The T7 circuit breaker, which completes the Tmax family up to 1200 A, fitted with PR231/P, PR232/P, PR331/P and PR332/P electronic trip units. The T7 circuit breaker is available in the two versions: with a manual operating mechanism or a motorized stored energy operating mechanism(*). - The T8 circuit breaker, considered an insulated case up to 3000 A, fitted with PR232/P, PR331/P and PR332/P electronic trip units. The T8 circuit breaker is only available in the motorized stored energy operating mechanism(*) The field of application in alternating current of the Tmax series varies from 1 A to 3000 A with voltages up to 600 V. The Tmax T1, T2, T3, Ts3, T4, T5 and T6 circuit breakers equipped with TMF, TMD and TMA thermal magnetic trip units can also be used in direct current plants, with a range of applications from 15 A to 800 A and a minimum operating voltage of 24 V DC, according to the appropriate connection diagrams. The three-pole T2, T3 and Ts3 circuit breakers can also be fitted with MA adjustable magnetic only trip units, both for applications in alternating current and in direct current, in particular for motor protection. For all the circuit breakers in the series, fitted with thermal magnetic and electronic trip units, the singlephase trip current is defined. (*) For motorization, the T7 and T8 circuit breaker with stored energy operating mechanism must be ordered, complete with geared motor for automatic spring charging, opening coil and closing coil. Interchangeability The Tmax T4, T5 and T6 circuit breakers can be equipped either with TMF, TMD or TMA thermal magnetic trip units, MA magnetic only trip units or PR221DS, PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD-A electronic trip units. Similarly, Tmax T7 and T8 can also mount the latest generation PR231/P(3), PR232/P, PR331/P(1) and PR332/P(1) electronic trip units. Thanks to their simply assembly, the end customer can change the type of trip unit extremely rapidly according to their own requirements and needs. In this case, correct assembly is the customer's responsibility. Above all, this means into increased flexibility of use of the circuit breakers with considerable savings in terms of costs thanks to better rationalization of stock management. Circuit breakers In [A] T4 250 T5 400 T5 600 T6 800 T7 1000 T7 1200 T8 1600 T8 2000 T8 2500 T8 3000 TMF TMD 15-20 30-50 * 80-250 300-400 600-800 100-250 300-400 * * = Complete circuit breaker already coded * * = Circuit breaker to be assembled PR221DS-PR222DS/P-PR222DS/PD-A(2) TMA * 600 PR231/P(3)-PR232/P(3)-PR331/P-PR332/P 800 400-800 1000 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 * * * * * * * ** * ** ** * * (1) If ordered loose PR331/P and PR332/P must be completed with the "trip unit adapters" 2/4 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL (2) PR223DS, minimum In = 160 A (3) Trip unit for T7 only ** * ** ** * ** ** ** * Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Range of application of the circuit breakers in alternating current and in direct current AC T1 1p 100 T1 100 T2 100 T3 225 Ts3 150 Ts3 225 T4 250 T5 400/600 T6 800 T7 1000/1200 T8 DC T1 100 T2 T3 225 Ts3 150 Ts3 225 T4 250 T5 400/600 T6 800 Trip unit Range [A] TMF TMF TMF MA PR221DS TMF MA TMF MA TMF MA TMF TMD TMA PR221DS PR222DS/P-PR222DS/PD-A TMA PR221DS PR222DS/P-PR222DS/PD-A TMA PR221DS PR222DS/P-PR222DS/PD-A PR231/P-PR232/P PR331/P-PR332/P PR331/P PR332/P 15...100 15...100 15...100 20...100 25...100 60...225 100...200 15...150 3...150 175...225 175...200 15...250 20 30...50 80...250 100...250 300...400 300-400-600 300-400-600 600...800 600...800 600...800 400...1200 400...1200 1000...3000 1000...3000 Trip unit Range [A] TMF MA TMF TMF MA TMF MA TMD TMA TMF TMA TMA 15...100 20...100 60...225 15...150 3...150 175...225 175...200 15...250 15...250 15...250 300-400 600...800 MA = magnetic only trip unit with adjustable magnetic thresholds TMF = thermal magnetic trip unit with fixe thermal and magnetic thresholds TMD = thermal magnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal and fixed magnetic thresholds TMA = thermal magnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal and magnetic thresholds PR22_, PR23_, PR33_ = electronic trip units Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 2/5 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Thermal magnetic trip units T h e T m a x T 1 _ 1 p , T 1 , T 2 , T 3 , Ts 3 , T 4 , T 5 a n d T 6 c i rc u i t b re a k e r s c a n b e f i t t e d w i t h t h e r m a l m a g netic trip units and are used in protection of alternating and direct current networks with a range of use from 15 A to 800 A. They allow the protection against overload with a thermal device (with fixed threshold for T1 1p, T1, T2, T3, Ts3, T4 and adjustable threshold for T4, T5 and T6) realized using the bimetal technique, and protection against short-circuit with a magnetic device (with fixed threshold for T1, T2, T3, Ts3 and T4 up to 50 A and adjustable threshold for T4, T5 and T6). The four-pole circuit breakers are always supplied with the neutral protected by the trip unit and with protection of the neutral at 100% of the phase settings up to 100 A. For higher settings, the protection of the neutral is at 50% of the phase setting unless the protection of the neutral at 100% of the phase setting is required. In [A] 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 300 400 600 800 Neutral [A] 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 300 400 600 800 T1 (I1=In) * * * * * * * * * * * T2 (I1=In) * * * * * * * * * * * T3 (I1=In) Ts3 (I1=In) * * T4 (I1=In) * * * T4 (I1=0.7...1xIn) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * T5 400 (I1=0.7...1xIn) T6 (I1=0.7...1xIn) * T1 I3 [A] 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 Neutral [A] 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 T2, T3 I3 [A] 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 Neutral [A] 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 I3 [A] 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 Neutral [A] 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250 I3 [A] 500 500 500 500 500 400 800 500 625 750 1000 1250 1500 1000 2000 1250 1500 2000 3000 4000 2500 3000 4000 6000 8000 Neutral [A] 500 500 500 500 500 400 800 500 625 750 1000 1250 1500 1000 2000 1250 1500 2000 3000 4000 2500 3000 4000 6000 8000 Ts3 T4, T5 T6 I3 = 5...10xIn [A] 3000 4000 6000 8000 Neutral [A] - 100% 3000 4000 6000 8000 Neutral [A] - 50% 1500 2000 3000 4000 2/6 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Thermomagnetic trip units TMD / TMA (for T4, T5 and T6) Thermal threshold Adjustable from 0.7 to 1 x In Thermal threshold Adjustable from 0.7 to 1 x In Magnetic threshold Adjustable from 5 to 10 x In TMD/TMA - T4 In [A] I1=0.7...1 x In 20 30 40 50 80 100 125 150 200 250 Min. adj. - 21 28 35 56 70 88 105 140 175 Max. adj. - 30 40 50 80 100 125 150 200 250 500 500 500 500 - - - - - - 1000 1250 1500 2000 2500 I3 = 10 x In [A] I3 = 10 x In I3 = 5...10 x In I3 = 5...10 x In [A] - - - - 800 Min. adj. - - - - 400 500 625 750 1000 1250 Max. adj. - - - - 800 1000 1250 1500 2000 2500 TMA - T5 I1=0.7...1 x In I3 = 5...10 x In In [A] 300 400 Min. adj. 210 280 Max. adj. 300 400 I3 [A] 3000 4000 Min. adj. 1500 2000 Max. adj. 3000 4000 In [A] 600 800 Min. adj. 420 560 Max. adj. 600 800 I3 [A] 6000 8000 Min. adj. 3000 4000 Max. adj. 6000 8000 TMA - T6 I1=0.7...1 x In I3 = 5...10 x In Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 2/7 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Electronic trip units For use in alternating current the Tmax T2, T4, T5, T6 and T7 circuit breakers can be equipped with trip units constructed using electronic technology. This allows protection functions to be obtained which provide high reliability, tripping precision and insensitivity to temperature and to the electromagnetic components. The power supply needed for correct operation is supplied directly by the current sensors of the trip unit, and tripping is always guaranteed, even under single-phase load conditions. Characteristics of the Tmax electronic trip units Operating temperature Relative humidity Self-supply Auxiliary power supply (where applicable) Operating frequency Electromagnetic compatibility (LF and HF) -13 F...+158 F (-25 C...+70 C) 98% 0.2 x In (single phase) 24 V DC 45...66 Hz IEC 60947-2 Annex F For Tmax T2, T4, T5 and T6 the protection trip unit consists of: - 3 or 4 current sensors (current transformers) - external current sensors (e.g. for the external neutral), when available - a trip unit - a trip coil (for T2 housed in the right slot, for T4, T5 and T6 integrated in the electronic trip unit). For Tmax T7 and T8 the protection trip unit consists of: - 3 or 4 current sensors (Rogowski coils and current transformers) - external current sensors (e.g. for the external neutral) - interchangeable rating plug - a trip unit - a trip coil housed in the body of the circuit breaker. Rating plugs Circuit breaker T7 T8 CS Rated current Iu 1000 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 In [A] 1200 - 400 600 800 1000 * * * * * * * * * 1600 - 2000 - - - - * * * * * * * 2500 - * * * * * * * * * * 3000 * The current sensors supply the electronic trip unit with the energy needed for correct operation of the trip unit and the signal needed to detect the current. The current sensors are available with rated primary current as shown in the table. 2/8 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Current sensors In [A] 25 60 T2 T4 T5 T6 T4 T5 T6 * * * * - - - - * * * * - - - - * * * - - * * * * * * - - - - - * * * - - - * PR231/P, PR232/P, PR331/P, PR332/P T7 - - - - - - * PR331/P, PR332/P T8 - - - - - - - PR221DS PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD-A 100 150 250 300 400 600 800 1000 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 - * - - - - - - * * * * - - - - - - * * * * * * When a protection function trips, the circuit breaker opens by means of the trip coil, which changes the contact AUX-SA (supplied on request, see chapter "Accessories" ) to tripping. Mechanical signalling reset takes place with resetting of the circuit breaker. Basic protection functions (L) Protection against overload This protection function trips when there is an overload with inverse long-time delay trip according to an inverse time curve (I2t=k). The protection cannot be excluded. (S) Protection against short-circuit with time delay This protection function trips when there is a short-circuit, with long inverse time-delay trip (I2t=k ON) or a constant trip time (I2t=k OFF). The protection can be excluded. (I) Instantaneous protection against short-circuit This protection function trips instantaneously in case of a short-circuit. The protection can be excluded. (G) Protection against ground fault The protection against ground fault trips when the vectorial sum of the currents passing through the current sensors exceeds the set threshold value, with long inverse time-delay trip (I2t=k ON) or a constant trip time (I2t=k OFF). The protection can be excluded. Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 2/9 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers The PR332/P trip unit makes it possible to carry out highly developed protection against the most varied types of fault. It adds the following advanced protection functions to the basic protection functions. Advanced protection functions (U) Protection against unbalanced phase The protection function against unbalanced phase U can be used in those cases where a particularly precise control is needed regarding missing and/or unbalance of the phase currents. The trip time is instantaneous. The protection can be excluded. (OT) Protection against overtemperature The protection against overtemperature trips instantaneously when the temperature inside the trip unit exceeds 85 C, in order to prevent any temporary or continual malfunction of the microprocessor. The protection cannot be excluded. OT (ZS) Zone selectivity ZS zone selectivity is an advanced method for carrying out coordination of the protections in order to reduce the trip times of the protection closest to the fault in relation to the time foreseen by time selectivity. Zone selectivity can be applied to the protection functions S and G, with constant time-delay trip. The protection can be excluded. ZS UV OV RV RP UF OF (UV, OV, RV) Protections against voltage The three protections trip with a constant time-delay in the case of undervoltage, overvoltage and residual voltage respectively. The latter allows to detect interruptions of the neutral (or of the ground conductor in systems with grounded neutral). The protections can be excluded. (RP) Protection against reversal of power The protection against reversal power causes tripping of the breaker, with constant time-delay trip, when the flow of power reverses sign and exceeds, as an absolute value, the set threshold. It is particularly suitable for protection of large machines such as generators. The protection can be excluded. (UF, OF) Protections of frequency The two protections detect the variation in network frequency above or below the adjustable thresholds, opening the circuit breaker, with constant time-delay trip. The protection can be excluded. SACE PR221DS PR221DS PR221DS Protection functions / SACE PR222DS/P PR222DS/P PR222DS/P PR222DS/PD-A PR222DS/PD-A Protection functions SACE PR222DS/PD-A Protection functions 2/10 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers SACE PR231/P PR231/P PR231/P Protection functions / SACE PR232/P PR232/P Protection functions SACE PR331/P PR331/P Protection functions SACE PR332/P PR232/P PR232/P PR232/P Protection functions Advanced protection functions(*) Options (**) OT UV OV RV RP OT UF OF UV OV RV RP OT UF OF UV OV RV RP UF OF Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 2/11 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers PR221DS - Tmax T2, T4, T5 and T6 The PR221DS trip unit, available for T2,T4, T5 and T6, provides protection functions against overload L and short-circuit S/I (version PR221DSLS/I): with this version you can choose whether to have inverse time-delay S or instantaneous I protection against short-circuit by moving the dedicated dip-switch. Alternatively, the version with only the protection function against instantaneous short-circuit I is available. There is a single adjustment for the phases and the neutral. The neutral is adjustable from 50 - 100% of the phases for Tmax T2 In = 160 A (T2 In<160 A, N = 100%), whereas for T4, T5 and T6 it is possible to select the protection threshold OFF, 50% or 100% directly from the front of the trip unit by means of the specific dip switch. The trip coil is always supplied with the PR221DS trip unit for Tmax T2 and is housed in the right-hand slot of the circuit breaker. Dedicated auxiliary contacts are available for T2 with electronic trip units For Tmax T4, T5 and T6, the opening solenoid is housed internally and therefore, by not using the right-hand slot of the circuit breaker, all the auxiliary contacts available can be used. PR221DS-LS/I Protection S Dip-switch for neutral setting (only for T4, T5 and T6) Against short-circuit with delayed trip Protection L Against overload Socket for TT1 test unit Protection I Against short-circuit with instantaneous trip 1SDC210B05F0001 PR221DS - Protection functions and settings Protection functions CANNOT BE EXCLUDED CAN BE EXCLUDED CAN BE EXCLUDED (1) Trip curves(1) Trip threshold Against overload with long inverse time delay trip and trip characteristic according to an inverse time curve (I2t=constant) I1 Release between 1.1...1.3 x I1 (IEC 60947-2 and UL 489) Tolerance: 10% up to 6 x In 20% above 6 x In Against short-circuit with inverse short time delay trip and trip characteristic with inverse time (I2t=constant) (selectable as an alternative to protection function I) I2 a 8 x In t2 = 0,1s Against short-circuit with instantaneous trip (selectable as an alternative to protection function S) = 0.40 - 0.44 - 0.48 - 0.52 - 0.56 - 0.60 0.64 - 0.68 - 0.72 - 0.76 - 0.80 - 0.84 0.88 - 0.92 - 0.96 - 1 x In = 1 - 1.5 - 2 - 2.5 - 3 - 3.5 - 4.5 - 5.5 6.5 - 7 - 7.5 - 8 - 8.5 - 9 - 10 x In(2) Tolerance: 10% (T4-T5) 10% up to 2 x In (T2) 20% above 2 x In (T2) I3 at 6 x I1 t1 = 3s a 8 x In t2 = 0,25s = 1 - 1,5 - 2 - 2,5 - 3 - 3,5 - 4,5 - 5,5 6,5 - 7 - 7,5 - 8 - 8,5 - 9 - 10 x In(3) In conditions other than those considered, the following tollerances hold: S I 2/12 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL at 6 x I1 t1 = 12s only for T4, T5 Tolerance: 10% up to 6 x In (T4-T5) 20% above 6 x In (T4-T5) 20% (T2) Tolerance: 10% (T4-T5) 20% (T2) These tolerances hold in the following conditions: - self-powered relay at full power and/or auxiliary supply; - two or three-phase power supply. at 6 x I1 t1 = 6s only for T2 Trip time 20% 40ms instantaneous (2) (3) For T5 In = 600 A I2 max = 9.5 x In For T5 In = 600 A I3 max = 9.5 x In Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers PR222DS/P - Tmax T4, T5 and T6 The PR222DS/P trip unit, available for T4, T5 and T6, has protection functions against overload L, delayed S and instantaneous I short-circuit (version PR222DS/P-LSI). Alternatively, in addition to the functions L, S, I, it also has protection against ground fault G (version PR222DS/P-LSIG). Setting of the PR222DS trip unit can be carried out either by means of dip switches on the front of the circuit breaker or electronically, using the PR010/T programming and control unit or the BT030 wireless communication unit. There is a single setting for the phases and neutral for which one can decide whether to set the threshold of the protection functions to OFF, to 50% or to 100% of the phases by means of two dedicated dip switches. Furthermore, on the front of the PR222DS/P (or PR222DS/PD-A) trip units, signalling of pre-alarm and alarm of protection L is available. The pre-alarm threshold value, signalled by the red LED fixed, is equal to 0.9 x I1. It is also possible to remotely transmit the alarm of protection L by simply connecting connector X3 to the dedicated contact. PR222DS/PD-A - Tmax T4, T5 and T6 Apart from the protection functions available for the PR222DS/P trip unit (for the settings see page 2/18), the PR222DS/PD-A trip unit, available for T4, T5 and T6 also has the communication unit integrated with Modbus(R) RTU protocol. The Modbus(R) RTU protocol has been known and used worldwide for many years and is now a market standard thanks to its simplicity of installation, configuration and to its integration in the various different supervision, control and automation systems, as well as good level performances. The PR222DS/PD-A trip units allow the Tmax T4, T5 and T6 circuit breakers to be integrated in a communication network based on the Modbus(R) RTU protocol. Modbus(R) RTU provides a Master-Slave system architecture where a Master (PLC, PC...) cyclically interrogates several Slaves (field devices). The devices use the EIA RS485 standard as the physical means for data transmission at a maximum transmission speed of 19.2 kbps. Again for this trip unit, the power supply needed for correct operation of the protection functions is supplied directly by the current transformers of the trip unit and tripping is always guaranteed, even under conditions of single-phase load down. Nevertheless, communication is only possible with an auxiliary power supply of 24 V DC. PR222DS/PD-A - Electrical characteristics Auxiliary power supply (galvanically insulated) Maximum ripple 24 V DC 20% 5% Inrush current @ 24 V 1 A for 30 ms Rated current @ 24 V 100 mA Rated power @ 24 V 2.5 W The PR222DS/PD-A trip unit, with integrated communication and control functions, allows a wide range of information to be acquired and transmitted remotely, opening and closing commands to be carried out by means of the electronic version motor operator, the configuration and programming parameters of the unit to be stored, such as the current thresholds of the protection functions and the protection curves. All the information can be consulted both locally, directly on the front of the circuit breaker with the front display unit FDU, or on the HMI030 switchgear multi-meter and remotely by means of supervision and control systems. Moreover, by connecting of the BT030 external module to the test connector of the PR222DS/PD-A trip unit, wireless communication to a PDA or Notebook is possible through a Bluetooth port. The PR222DS/PD-A trip units can be associated with the AUX-E auxiliary contacts to know the state of the circuit breaker (open/closed), and with MOE-E motor operator (the AUX-E are obligatory when MOE-E is to be used) to remotely control circuit- breaker opening and closing as well. If the circuit breaker fitted with the PR222DS/PD-A trip unit is inserted in a supervision system, during the test phases with the PR010/T unit, communication is automatically abandoned and starts again on completion of this operation. Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 2/13 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Communication functions PR222DS/P Protocol Physical medium Speed (maximum) Measurement functions Phase currents Neutral current Ground current Voltages (phase to phase, phase to ground) Powers (active, reactive, apparent) Power factors Energies Peak factor Frequency Signalling functions L pre-alarm and alarm LED L alarm output contact(2) Available data Circuit breaker status (open, closed)(3) Mode (local, remote) Protection parameters set Alarms Protections: L, S, I, G Failed tripping under fault conditions Maintenance Total number of operations Total number of trips Number of trip tests Number of manual operations Number of trips for each individual protection function Record of last trip data Commands Circuit breaker opening/closing (with motor operator) Alarm reset Circuit breaker reset (with motor operator) Setting the curves and protection thresholds Safety function Modbus RTU standard EIA RS485 19.2 kbps * (1) * * (1) * * (1) * * (5) * (5) * * * (1) * * (1) * * (1) * * * * * * * (1) (3) (4) (5) * * * (1) With PR010/T unit or BT030 unit Typical contact: MOS photo Vmax: 48 V DC/30 V AC Imax: 50 mA DC/35 mA AC Available with AUX-E electronic auxiliary contacts The motor operator must be in electronic version (MOE-E) and electronic auxiliary contacts (AUX-E) have to be used Signals: - Pre-alarm L - permanently lit - Alarm L - flashing (0.5 s ON / 0.5 s OFF) - Incongruent manual setting (L > S / S > I) - flashing (1 s ON / 2 s OFF) - WINK (remote control to identify the relay) - flashing (0.125 s ON / 0.125 s OFF) 2/14 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL * * * (1) Events Changes in circuit breaker state, in the protections and all the alarms (2) * * Automatic opening in the case of failed Trip command fail (with motor operator)(4) (1) PR222DS/PD-A * * * Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers PR222DS/P Protection S Against short-circuit with delayed trip Protection I Against short-circuit with instantaneous trip Protection L Against overload Socket for TT1 test unit Dip-switch for neutral setting Socket for connection of PR010/T test unit and BT030 wireless communication unit Selection for electronic or manual setting PR222DS/PD-A Protection S Against short-circuit with delayed trip Protection L Protection I Against short-circuit with instantaneous trip Against overload Socket for TT1 test unit Socket for connection of PR010/T test unit and BT030 wireless communication unit Dip-switch for neutral setting Selection for electronic or manual setting Selection for local or remote setting Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 2/15 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD-A - Protection functions and settings Protection functions CANNOT BE EXCLUDED CAN BE EXCLUDED Manual setting Manual setting I1 = 0.40 - 0.42 - 0.44 - 0.46 - 0.48 - 0.50 - at 6 x I1 at 6 x I1 0.52 - 0.54 - 0.56 - 0.58 - 0.60 - 0.62 - t1 = 3s t1 = 6s 0.64 - 0.66 - 0.68 - 0.70 - 0.72 - 0.74 0.76 - 0.78 - 0.80 - 0.82 - 0.84 - 0.86 0.88 - 0.90 - 0.92 - 0.94 - 0.96 - 0.98 1 x In Against overload with long inverse time delay trip and trip characteristic according to an inverse time curve (I2t=constant) Against short-circuit with inverse short time delay trip and trip characteristic with inverse time (I2t=constant) or definite time Trip curves(1) Trip threshold I2t=const ON I2t=const OFF Against short-circuit with instantaneous trip Electronic setting I1= 0.40...1 x In (step 0.01 x In) Electronic setting t1 = 3...18s (step 0.5s)(2) at 6 x I1 Release between 1.1...1.3 x I1 (IEC 60947-2 and UL 489) Tolerance: Manual setting I2 = 0.6 - 1.2 - 1.8 - 2.4 - 3.0 - 3.6 - 4.2 5.8 - 6.4 - 7.0 - 7.6 - 8.2 - 8.8 - 9.4 10 x In(3) Manual setting at 8 x In at 8 x In t2 = 0.05s t2 = 0.1s Electronic setting I2 = 0.60...10 x In (step 0.1 x In) (3) Electronic setting at 8 x In t2 = 0.05...0.5s (step 0.01s) Tolerance: Tolerance: 10% at 8 x In t2 = 0.25s at 8 x In t2 = 0.5s 10%(4) Manual setting t2 = 0.05s t2 = 0.1s Electronic setting I2 = 0.60...10 x In (step 0.1 x In)(3) Electronic setting t2 =0.05...0.5s (step 0.01s) Tolerance: Tolerance: 10%(4) 10% at 6 x I1 t1 = 18s(2) 10% Manual setting I2 = 0.6 - 1.2 - 1.8 - 2.4 - 3.0 - 3.6 - 4.2 5.8 - 6.4 - 7.0 - 7.6 - 8.2 - 8.8 - 9.4 10 x In(3) t2 = 0.25s t2 = 0.5s up to 1.6 x I4 t4 = 0.4s up to 1.10 x I4 t4 = 0.8s Manual setting I3 = 1 . 5 - 2 . 5 - 3 - 4 - 4 . 5 - 5 5.5 - 6.5 - 7 - 7.5 - 8 - 9 9.5 - 10.5 - 12 x In(3) Electronic setting I3 = 1.5...12 x In (step 0.1 x In) (3) CAN BE EXCLUDED at 6 x I1 t1 = 9s instantaneous Tolerance: 10% CAN BE EXCLUDED (1) Against ground fault with inverse short time delay trip and trip characteristic according to an inverse time curve (I2t= constant) These tolerances hold in the following conditions: - self-powered relay at full power and/or auxiliary supply; - two or three-phase power supply. In conditions other than those considered, the following tolerances hold: S G Trip time 20% 20% 2/16 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Manual setting I4 = 0.2 - 0.25 - 0.45 - 0.55 - 0.75 - 0.8 1 x In Manual setting up to up to 3.15 x I4 2.25 x I4 t4 = 0.1s t4 = 0.2s Electronic setting I4 = 0.2...1 x In (step 0.01 x In) Electronic setting t4 = 0.1...0.8 x In (step 0.01s) Tolerance: 10% Tolerance: 20% (2) t1 = 10.5s I3max = 9.5 x In I2max = 9.5 x In (4) Tolerance: 10 ms up to t2 = 0.1s (3) For T5 In = 600 A For T5 In = 600 A Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers PR231/P - Tmax T7 The PR231/P trip unit is the basic trip unit for Tmax T7. It provides protection functions against overload L and short-circuit S/I (version PR231/PLS/I). With this version you can choose whether to have protection S or protection I by moving the dedicated dip-switch. Alternatively the version with only the protection function against instantaneous short-circuit I is available (version PR231/P-I see also page 2/33 and following). Setting the trip parameters of the PR231/P trip unit is done directly on the front of the circuit breaker by means of dip switches. There is only one for the phases and the neutral, so it is possible to set the protection threshold at 50% or at 100% of the phase protection. To provide protection of the installation by means of the PR231/P protection trip unit, it is necessary to select the rated network frequency (50/60 Hz), using the special dip-switch. Interchangeability of PR231/P can be requested by means of a dedicated code. Protection S PR231/P Against short-circuit with delayed trip Protection L Against overload Dip-switch for neutral setting Socket for TT1 test unit Protection I Against short-circuit with instantaneous trip Rating Plug Dip-switch for network frequency PR231/P - Protection functions and settings Protection functions Trip threshold I1 = 0.40...1 x In step = 0.04 x In CANNOT BE EXCLUDED CAN BE EXCLUDED CAN BE EXCLUDED (1) Against overload with long inverse time delay trip and trip characteristic according to an inverse time curve (I2t=constant) Against short-circuit with long inverse time delay trip and trip characteristic with inverse time (I2t=constant) (selectable as an alternative to protection function I) Trip between 1.1...1.3 x I1 IEC 60947-2 UL 489 Trip curves(1) at 6 x I 1 t1 = 3 - 12s Excludability Relation t = f(I) - t = k/I2 * t = k/I2 - t=k at 6 x I 1 Tolerance: 10% at 10 x In I2 = 1-1.5-2-2.5-3-3.5-4.5-5.5-6.5-7- at 10 x In t2 = 0.1 - 0.25s 7.5-8-8.5-9-10 x In Tolerance: 10% I3 = 1-1.5-2-2.5-3-3.5-4.55.5-6.5-7-7.5-8-8.5-9Against short-circuit with istantaneous trip 10 x In (selectable as an alternative to protection function S) Tolerance: 10% Tolerance: 10% instantaneous These tolerances hold in the following conditions: - self-powered trip unit at full power - two or three-phase power supply In conditions other than those considered, the following tollerances hold: S I Trip threshold 10% 15% Trip time 20% 60ms Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 2/17 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers PR232/P - Tmax T7 The PR232/P trip unit, available for T7, provides protection functions against overload L, delayed short-circuit S and instantaneous short-circuit I (version PR232/P-LSI). Setting the trip parameters (see table) of the PR232/P trip unit can be carried out by means of the dip-switches it is unique for the phases and the neutral, for which it is possible to set the protection threshold to OFF, to 50%, 100% or 200% of the threshold of the phases directly from the front of the trip unit with a special dip-switch. In particular, adjustment of the neutral to 200% of the phase current requires setting protection L to respect the current-carrying capacity of the circuit breaker. To provide protection of the installation by means of the PR232/P protection trip unit, it is necessary to select the rated network frequency (50/60 Hz) with the special dip-switch. PR232/P LED signalling Alarm for protection function S Protection S Against short-circuit with delayed trip Protection I Against short-circuit with instantaneous trip LED signalling Alarm for protection function L Protection L LED signalling Alarm for protection function I Against overload Socket for TT1 test unit Dip-switch for neutral setting Dip-switch for network frequency Rating Plug Socket for connection of SACE PR010/T, BT030 and PR030/B PR232/P - Protection functions and settings Protection functions CANNOT BE EXCLUDED CAN BE EXCLUDED Against overload with long inverse time delay trip and trip characteristic according to an inverse time curve (I2t=constant) Against short-circuit with inverse short time delay trip and trip characteristic with inverse time (I2t=constant) or definite time I1 = 0.40...1 x In step = 0.04 x In Trip between 1.1...1.3 x I1 Thermal memory(2) Excludability Trip curves(1) Trip threshold at 6 x I1 t1 = 3s t1 = 6s IEC 60947-2 UL 489 Tolerance: 10% I2 = 0.6 - 0.8 - 1.2 - 1.8 - 2.4 - 3 3.6 - 4.2 - 5 - 5.8 - 6.6 - 7.4 8.2 - 9 - 10 x In at 10 x In t2=0.1s t2=0.25s Relation t = f(I) t1 = 12s t1 = 18s t2=0.5s t2=0.8s Tolerance: 10% * - t = k/I2 * * t = k/I2 - * t=k - * t=k Tolerance: 10% I2 = 0.6 - 0.8 - 1.2 - 1.8 - 2.4 - 3 3.6 - 4.2 - 5 - 5.8 - 6.6 - 7.4 8.2 - 9 - 10 x In I > I2 t2=0.1s t2=0.25s t2=0.5s t2=0.8s Tolerance: 10% Tolerance: 10% CAN BE EXCLUDED (1) Against short-circuit with istantaneous trip I3 = 1.5 - 2.5 - 3 - 4 - 4.5 - 5 - 5.5 6.5 - 7 - 7.5 - 8 - 9 - 9.5 - 10.5 12 x In Tolerance: 10% These tolerances hold in the following conditions: - self-powered trip unit at full power (without start-up) - two or three-phase power supply S I Trip threshold 10% 15% instantaneous In conditions other than those considered, the following tollerances hold: Trip time 20% 60ms 2/18 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL (2) Active up to 7 min. after tripping of the breaker (ON/OFF setting by means of PR010/T test unit). Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers There are three red LEDs available on the front of the PR232/P trip unit dedicated to the signalling alarm of protections L, S, and I. Furthermore, a yellow flashing LED allows the state of pre-alarm of function L to be signalled, which is activated when 90% of the set trip threshold is reached. The yellow flashing LED every 3s indicates the normal operation. PR232/P - Alarm and Pre-alarm LED Protection Colour Pre-alarm Alarm Last trip Yellow * - - Red - * * Red - * * Red - * * Following circuit breaker opening, it is possible to know which protection function made the trip unit trip by connecting the PR030/B battery unit onto the front of the trip unit. This is also possible thanks to the PR010/T test and configuration unit. By means of the BT030 wireless communication unit the PR232/P can be connected to a PDA or to a personal computer, extending the range of information available for the user. In fact, by means of the ABB SACE's SD-Pocket communication software, it is possible to read the values of the currents flowing through the circuit breaker, the value of the last 20 interrupted currents, and the protection settings. Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 2/19 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers PR331/P - Tmax T7 and T8 The PR331/P, available for Tmax T7 and T8 in the PR331/P-LSIG version, is suitable for protecting a wide range of alternating current installations with its complete range of protection functions together with the wide combination of thresholds and trip times offered. In addition the unit is provided with multifunction LED indicators. Furthermore, PR331/P allows connection to external devices enhancing its advanced characteristics like remote signalling and monitoring, or interface from front of HMI030 panel. PR331/P Protection S Protection I Against short-circuit with delayed trip Against short-circuit with instantaneous trip LED signalling Alarm for protection function I LED signalling Alarm and prealarm for protection function L Protection L LED signalling Alarm for protection function G Against overload Dip-switch for neutral setting Protection G Against ground fault Dip-switch for network frequency Info/test push button Rating Plug Socket for connection of SACE PR010/T, BT030 and PR030/B LED signalling Alarm for protection function S PR331/P - Protection functions and settings Protection functions Trip curves(1) Trip threshold Against overload with long inverse time-delay trip and trip characteristic according to an inverse time curva (I2t=k) I1 = 0.40....1 x In x In step = 0.025 at 3 x I1 t1 = 3 - 12 - 24 - 36 - 48 - 72 - 108 144s Trip between 1.05 ... 1.2 x I1 CANNOT BE EXCLUDED I2 = 0.6 - 0.8 - 1.2 - 1.8 - 2.4 - 3 Against short-circuit with short inverse time-delay trip and trip characteristic with 3.6 - 4.2 - 5 - 5.8 - 6.6 - 7.4 inverse time (I2t=k) or with definite time 8.2 - 9 - 10 x In - t = k/I2 * t = k/I2 Tolerance: 15% up to 6 x In 20% above 6 x In * t=k 30 ms * t=k * t = k/I2 (3) * t=k Tolerance: 10% up to 6 x In 20% above 6 x In at 10 x In t2 = 0.1....0.8s step = 0.1s Tolerance: min (10%. 40ms) Tolerance: 7% up to 6 x In 10% above 6 x In CAN BE EXCLUDED I > I2 t2 = 0.1....0.8s I2 = 0.6 - 0.8 - 1.2 - 1.8 - 2.4 - 3 3.6 - 4.2 - 5 - 5.8 - 6.6 - 7.4 8.2 - 9 - 10 x In Tolerance: 7% up to 6 x In 10% above 6 x In Against short-circuit with adjustable instantaneous trip I3 = 1.5 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6 - 7 - 8 9 - 10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 x In(2) CAN BE EXCLUDED CAN BE EXCLUDED Excludability Relation t = f(I) step = 0.1s Tolerance: 10% Against ground fault with short inverse time-delay trip and trip characteristic according to an inverse time curve (I2t=k) or with definite time I4 = 0.2 - 0.3 - 0.4 - 0.6 - 0.8 - 0.9 1 x In Tolerance: 7% I4 = 0.2 - 0.3 - 0.4 - 0.6 - 0.8 - 0.9 1 x In 4.47 x I4 3.16 x I4 2.24 x I4 1.58 x I4 t4=0.1s t4=0.2s t4=0.4s t4=0.80s Tolerance: 15% t4=0.1s t4=0.2s t4=0.4s t4=0.80s Tolerance: min (10%. 40ms) Tolerance: 7% (1) These tolerances hold in the following conditions: - self-powered trip unit at full power and/or auxiliary supply - two or three-phase power supply In conditions other than those considered, the following tollerances hold: L S I G Trip threshold Release between 1.05 and 1.25 x I1 10% 15% 15% 2/20 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Trip time 20% 20% 60ms 20% (2) (3) For T7 In = 1200 A I3max = 12 x In t = k/I2 up to the current value indicated, t = k equating to the chosen setting) beyond the current value indicated Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers User interface The user communicates directly with the trip unit by means of the dip switches. Up to four LEDs (according to the version) are also available for signalling. These LEDs (one for each protection) are active when: * a protection is timing. For protection L the pre-alarm status is also shown; * a protection has tripped (the corresponding LED is activated by pressing the "Info/Test" pushbutton); * a failure in connection of a current sensor or in the trip coil is detected. The indication is active when the unit is powered (through current sensors or an auxiliary power supply) * wrong rating plug for the circuit breaker. The protection tripped indication works even with the circuit breaker open, without the need for any internal or external auxiliary power supply. This information is available for 48 hours of inactivity after the trip and is still available after reclosing. If the query is made more than 48 hours later it is sufficient to connect a PR030/B battery unit, PR010/T, or a BT030 wireless communication unit. Setting the neutral Protection of the neutral can be set at 50%, 100% or 200% of the phase currents. In particular, adjustment of the neutral at 200% of the phase current is possible if the following inequality is respected: I1 x In x %N < Iu. The user can also switch the neutral protection OFF. Test function The Test function is carried out by means of the Info/Test pushbutton and the PR030/B battery unit (or BT030) fitted with a polarized connector housed on the bottom of the box, which allows the device to be connected to the test connector on the front of PR331/P trip units. The PR331/P electronic trip unit can be tested by using the SACE PR010/T test and configuration unit by connecting it to the TEST connector. Power supply The unit does not require an external power supply for protection functions or for alarm signalling functions. It is self-supplied by means of the current sensors installed on the circuit breaker. For operation, it is required for the three phases to be passed through by a current of 70 A. An external power supply can be connected in order to activate additional features, and in particular for connection to external devices: HMI030 and PR021/K. PR331/P - Electrical characteristics Auxiliary power supply (galvanically insulated) Maximum ripple 24 V DC 20% 5% Inrush current @ 24 V ~1 A for 5 ms Rated power @ 24 V ~2 W Communication By means of the BT030 wireless communication unit, PR331/P can be connected to a PDA or to a personal computer, extending the range of information available for the user. In fact, using ABB's SD-Pocket communication software, it is possible to read the values of the currents flowing through the circuit breaker, the value of the last 20 interrupted currents, and the protection settings. PR331/P can also be connected to the optional external PR021/K signalling unit, for the remote signalling of protections alarms and trips, and to HMI030, for the remote user interfacing. Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 2/21 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers PR332/P - Tmax T7 and T8 The SACE PR332/P trip unit for Tmax T7 and T8 (available in three versions: PR332/P-LI, PR332/P-LSI, PR332/P-LSIG) is a sophisticated and flexible protection system based on a state-of-the art microprocessor and DSP technology. Fitted with the optional internal PR330/D-M dialogue unit, PR332/P turns into an intelligent protection, measurement and communication device based on the Modbus(R) RTU protocol. By means of the PR330/D-M, PR332/P can also be connected to the ABB EP010 Fieldbus plug adapter, which makes it possible to choose among several different networks, such as Profibus and DeviceNet. The new PR332/P is the result of ABB SACE's experience in designing trip units. The exhaustive range of settings makes this protection unit ideal for general use in power distribution. Access to information and programming using a keyboard and graphic liquid crystal display is extremely simple and intuitive. An integrated ammeter and many other additional features are provided over and above the protection functions. These additional functions can be further increased with addition on board of the dialogue, signalling, measurement, and wireless communication units. All the thresholds and trip curve delays of the protection functions are stored in special memories which retain the information even when no power is supplied. PR332/P ENTER button to confirm data or change pages Alarm LED Cursor UP button Cursor DOWN button Warning indicator LED Button to exit submenus or cancel operations (ESC) Rating Plug Info/test push button PR332/P with PR330/V Cursor UP button ENTER button to confirm data or change pages Cursor DOWN button PR330/V measurement module Alarm LED Selector for setting the voltage source for PR330/V (EXT, TEST, INT) Warning indicator LED PR330/V power supply LED Info/test push button Rating Plug Button to exit submenus or cancel operations (ESC) 2/22 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers PR332/P - Protection functions and settings Protection functions at I = 3 x I1 t2 = 3...144s step = 3s Tolerance: 10% up to 6 x In 20% above 6 x In I1 = 0.4...1 x In step = 0.01 x In t2 = 3...144s Trip between 1.05...1.2 x I1 Tolerance: 10% up to 6 x In 20% above 6 x In I2 = 0.6...10 x In step = 0.1 x In at 10 x In t2 = 0.05...0.8s step = 0.01 x In Tolerance: 7% up to 6 x In Against short-circuit with short 10% above 6 x In inverse time-delay trip and trip characteristic with inverse time I2 = 0.6...10 x In step = 0.1 x In (I2t=k) or with definite time Tolerance: 7% up to 6 x In 10% above 6 x In Against short-circuit with adjustable instantaneous trip Excludability Trip between 1.05...1.2 x I1 I1 = 0.4...1 x In Against overload with inverse long-time delay trip Trip curves(1) Trip threshold I3 = 1.5...15 x In - t = k/I2 * - * t = f( )(3) = 0.021-2 * - * t = k/I2 * - * t=k - * * t=k - - * t = k/I2 (5) - - * t=k - * - temp =k - - * t=k - - step = 3s step = 0.01s Tolerance: 15% up to 6 x In 20% over 6 x In t2 = 0.05...0.8s t2 sel = 0.04...0.2s step = 0.01s step = 0.01s Zone Relation Thermal t = f(I) memory(2) selectivity(2) Tolerance: min (10%; 40ms) step = 0.1 x In Tolerance: 10% I = 0.2...1 x In step = 0.02 x In Against ground fault with short 4 inverse time-delay trip and trip Tolerance: 7% characteristic according to an I = 0.2...1 x In step = 0.02 x In inverse time curve (I2t=k) or with 4 Tolerance: 7% definite time 30 ms t4 = 0.1...1s step = 0.05s Tolerance: 15% t4 = 0.1...1s t4 sel = 0.04...0.2s step = 0.05s step = 0.05s Tolerance: min (10%; 40ms) OT Against overtemperature of the trip unit with instantaneous trip Trip unit temperature over 85 C instantaneous I = 2%...90% x I1 step = 1% x I1 Against unbalanced phase with 6 Tolerance: 10% definite time-delay trip t6 = 0.5...60 s step = 0.5s Tolerance: min (20%; 100ms) PR332/P with PR330/V - Advanced protection functions and settings Advanced protection functions Excludability UV Against undervoltage with adjustable constant time U8= 0.5...0.95 x Un step = 0.01 x Un t8 = 0.1...5s Tolerance: 5% Tolerance: min (20% 100ms) OV Against overvoltage with adjustable constant time U9= 1.05...1.2 x Un step = 0.01 x Un t9 = 0.1...5s RV RP (1) Trip curves(1) Trip threshold Zone Relation Thermal t = f(I) memory(2) selectivity step = 0.1s * t=k - - * t=k - - Tolerance: min (10% 100ms) * t=k - - Against reversal of power with P11= -0.3...-0.1 x Pn step = 0.02xPn t11 = 0.5...25s step = 0.1s adjustable constant time Tolerance: 10% Tolerance: min (10% 100ms) * t=k - - * t=k - - * t=k - - Against residual voltage with adjustable constant time step = 0.1s Tolerance: min (20% 100ms) Tolerance: 5% U10= 0.1...0.4 x Un step = 0.01 x Un t10 = 0.5...30s Tolerance: 5% step = 0.5s UF Against underfrequency with adjustable constant time f12= 0.90...0.99 x fn step = 0.01 x fn t12 = 0.5...3s step = 0.1s OF Against overfrequency with adjustable constant time f13= 1.01...1.10 x fn step = 0.01 x fn t13 = 0.5...3s step = 0.1s Tolerance:5% Tolerance:5% These tolerances are valid under the following conditions: - trip unit self-supplied at full power and/or auxiliary supply - two or three-phase power supply In conditions other than those considered, the following tollerances hold: Tolerance: min (10% 100ms) Tolerance: min (10% 100ms) Trip threshold L Release between 1.05 and 1.25 x I1 S 10% I 15% G 15% Other 10% Trip time 20% 20% 60ms 20% 20% (2) Active with 24V auxiliary power supply (3 - 1) t (3 x I1) I -1 1 I1 (4) For T7 In = 1000 A I3max = 12 x In (5) k = (2s) * (I4)2 (3) t= () Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 2/23 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Setting the neutral In PR332/P, the neutral protection is 50% of the value set for phase protection in the standard version. The neutral protection can be excluded or set to 100%. In installations where very high harmonics occur, the resulting current at the neutral can be higher than that of the phases. Therefore it is possible to set the neutral protection at 150% or 200% of the value set for the phases. In this case it is necessary to reduce the setting of L protection accordingly. The table below lists the neutral settings for the various possible combinations between type of circuit breaker and the threshold I1 setting. Adjustable neutral protection settings Threshold I1 settings (overload protection) Circuit breaker model T7-T8 (*) 0.4 < I1 < 0.5 0-50-100-150-200% 0.5 < I1 < 0.66 0-50-100-150% 0.66 < I1 < 1(*) 0-50-100% The setting I1 =1 indicates the maximum overload protection setting. The actual maximum setting allowable must take into account any derating based on temperature, the terminals used and the altitude (see the "Installations" chapter) Start-up function The start-up function allows protections S, I and G to operate with higher trip thresholds during the start-up phase. This avoids untimely tripping caused by the high inrush currents of certain loads (motors, transformers, lamps). The start-up phase lasts from 100 ms to 30 s, in steps of 0.01 s. It is automatically recognized by the PR332/P trip unit when the peak value of the maximum current exceeds the threshold that can be set by the user. A new start-up becomes possible after the current has fallen down to 0.1 x In, if the trip unit is supplied from an external source. Protection against overtemperature The user has the following signals or commands available for protection against overtemperature: - lighting up of the "Warning" LED when the temperature is higher than 70 C or lower than -20 C (temperature at which the microprocessor is still able to operate correctly); - lighting up of the "Alarm" LED when the temperature is higher than 85 C or lower than -25 C (temperature above which the microprocessor can no longer guarantee correct operation) and, when decided during the unit configuration stage, simultaneous opening of the circuit breaker with indication of the trip directly on the display, as for the other protections. Self-diagnosis The PR332/P range of trip units contains an electronic circuit which periodically checks the continuity of internal connections (trip coil and each current sensor, including the Source Ground Return when present). In the case of a malfunction an alarm message appears directly on the display. The Alarm is highlighted by the Alarm LED as well. Test Functions Once enabled from the menu, the "Info/Test" pushbutton on the front of the trip unit allows correct operation of the chain consisting of the microprocessor, trip coil and circuit breaker tripping mechanism to be checked. The control menu also includes the option of testing correct operation of the display, signalling LEDs. By means of the front multi-pin connector it is possible to apply a SACE PR010/T Test unit which allows the functions of the PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD-A, PR232/P, PR331/P and PR332/P ranges of trip units to be tested and checked. User interface The human-machine interface (HMI) of the device is made up of a wide graphic display, LEDs, and browsing pushbuttons. The interface is designed to provide maximum simplicity. The language can be selected from among five available options: Italian, English, German, French and Spanish. As in the previous generation of trip units, a password system is used to manage the "Read" or "Edit" modes. The default password, 0001, can be modified by the user. The protection parameters (curves and trip thresholds) can be set directly via the HMI of the device. The parameters can only be changed when the trip unit is operating in "Edit" mode, but the information available and the parameter settings can be checked at any time in "Read" mode. When a communication device (internal PR330/D-M module or external BT030 device) is connected, it is possible to set parameters simply by downloading them into the unit (over the network for PR330/D-M, by using the SD-Pocket software and a PDA or a notebook for BT030). Settings can then be carried out quickly and automatically in an error-free way by transferring data directly from DocWin. 2/24 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Indicator LEDs LEDs on the front panel of the trip unit are used to indicate all the warnings and alarms. A message on the display always explicitly indicates the type of event that has concerned. Example of events indicated by the "WARNING" LED: - unbalance between phases; - pre-alarm for overload (L1>90% x I1); - first temperature threshold exceeded (70 C); - contact wear beyond 80%; - phase rotation reversed (with optional PR330/V). Example of events indicated by the "ALARM" LED: - timing of function L; - timing of function S; - timing of function G; - second temperature threshold exceeded (85 C); - contact wear 100%; - timing of Reverse Power flow protection (with optional PR330/V). Data logger PR332/P is provided with the Data Logger function that automatically records the instantaneous values of all the currents and voltages in a wide memory buffer. Data can be easily downloaded from the unit by means of SD-Pocket or SD-TestBus2 applications and can be transferred to any personal computer for elaboration. The function freezes the recording whenever a trip occurs or in case of other events, so that a detailed analysis of faults can be easily performed. SD-Pocket and SD-TestBus2 also allow reading and downloading of all the other trip information. * Number of analog channels: 8 * Maximum sampling rate: 4800 Hz * Maximum sampling time: 27 s (@ sampling rate 600 Hz) * 64 events tracking. Trip information and opening data In case a trip occurs PR332/P store all the needed information: * Protection tripped * Opening data (current) * Time stamp (guaranteed with auxiliary supply or self-supply with power failure no longer than 48h). By pushing the "Info/Test" pushbutton the trip unit shows all these data directly on display. No auxiliary power supply is needed. The information is available to user for 48 hours with the circuit breaker open or without current flowing. The information of the latest 20 trips are stored in memory. If the information can be furthermore retrieved more than 48 hours later, it is sufficient to connect a PR030/B battery unit or a BT030 wireless communication unit. Load control Load control makes it possible to engage/disengage individual loads on the load side before the overload protection L is tripped, thereby avoiding unnecessary trips of the circuit breaker on the supply side. This is done by means of contactors or disconnect switches (externally wired to the trip unit), controlled by the PR332/P through PR021/K unit. Two different Load Control schemes can be implemented: - disconnection of two separate loads, with different current thresholds - connection and disconnection of a load, with hysteresis. Current thresholds and trip times are smaller than those available for selection with protection L, so that load control can be used to prevent overload tripping. External PR021/K accessory unit is required for Load Control. The function is only active when an auxiliary power supply is available. Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 2/25 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers PR330/V Measurement Module This optional internal module, installed in PR332/P, allows the trip unit to measure the phase and neutral voltages and to process them in order to achieve a series of features, in terms of protection and measurement. The PR330/V module when ordered mounted on the circuit breaker, does not require any external connection or voltage transformers since it is connected internally to the upper terminals of Tmax T7 (selector in "INT" position) through the internal voltage sockets. When necessary, the connection of voltage pick-ups can be moved to any other point (i.e. lower terminals), by using the alternative connection located in the terminal box and by switching the selector to the "EXT" position. For the dielectric test of the circuit breaker the selector must be switched to the "Insulating TEST" position. PR330/V is able to energize the PR332/P while line voltage input is above 85 V. The use of Voltage Transformers is mandatory for rated voltages higher than 690 V. Voltage transformers shall have burdens between 5 VA and 10 VA and accuracy class 0.5 or better. Additional Protections with PR330/V: - Undervoltage (UV) protection - Overvoltage (OV) protection - Residual voltage (RV) protection - Reversal of power (RP) protection - Underfrequency (UF) protection - Overfrequency (OF) protection. All the above indicated protections can be excluded, although it is possible to leave only the alarm active when required: in this case the trip unit will indicate the "ALARM" status. With the circuit breaker closed, these protections also operate when the trip unit is self-supplied. With the circuit breaker open, they operate when the auxiliary power supply (24 V DC or PR330/V) is present. Measurement function The current measurement function (ammeter) is present on all versions of the PR332/P trip unit. The display shows histograms showing the currents of the three phases and neutral on the main page. Furthermore, the most loaded phase current is indicated in numerical format. Ground fault current, where applicable, is shown on a dedicated page. The latter current value takes on two different meanings depending on whether the external toroidal transformer for the "Source Ground Return" function or the internal transformer (residual type) is connected. The ammeter can operate either with self-supply or with an auxiliary power supply voltage. The display is rear-lit and the ammeter is active even at current levels lower than 160 A. Accuracy of the ammeter measurement chain (current sensor plus ammeter) is no more than 1.5% in the 0.3-6 x In current interval of In. - Currents: three phases (L1, L2, L3), neutral (Ne) and ground fault; - Instantaneous values of currents during a period of time (data logger); - Maintenance: number of operations, percentage of contact wear, opening data storage (last 20 trips and 20 events). When the optional PR330/V is connected the following additional measurement functions are present: - Voltage: phase-phase, phase-neutral and residual voltage - Instantaneous values of voltages during a period of time (data logger) - Power: active, reactive and apparent - Power factor - Frequency and peak factor - Energy: active, reactive, apparent, counter. 2/26 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Communication PR332/P electronic trip unit can be fitted with communication modules, which make possible to exchange data and information with other industrial electronic devices by means of a network. The basic communication protocol implemented is Modbus RTU, a well-known standard of widespread use in industrial automation and power distribution equipment. A Modbus RTU communication interface can be connected immediately and exchange data with the wide range of industrial devices using the same protocol. ABB has developed a complete series of accessories for electronic trip unit PR332/P: - PR330/D-M is the communication module for PR332/P protection trip units. It is designed to allow easy integration of the Tmax circuit breakers in a Modbus network. The Modbus RTU protocol is used widely in the power and the automation industries. It is based on a master/ slave architecture, with a bandrate of up to 19.2 kbps. A standard Modbus network is easily wired up and configured by means of an RS485 physical layer. ABB SACE trip units work as slaves in the field bus network. All information required for simple integration of PR330/D-M in an industrial communication system is available on the ABB Web page. - BT030 is a device to be connected to the Test connector of PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD-A, PR232/P, PR331/P and PR332/P trip units. It allows Bluetooth communication between the trip unit and a PDA or a Notebook with a Bluetooth port. This device is dedicated to use with the SD-Pocket or SD-TestBus2 application. It can provide the auxiliary supply needed to energize the protection trip unit by means of rechargeable batteries. - EP010-FBP-PDP22 is the Fieldbus Plug interface allows connection of ABB SACE trip units with Modbus communication to a Profibus, DeviceNet, or AS-I field bus network. Furthermore, a new generation of software dedicated to installation, configuration, supervision and control of protection trip units and circuitbreakers is now available: - SD-View 2000 - SD-Pocket - SD-TestBus2. All information required for simple integration of PR330/D-M in an industrial communication system are available on the ABB Web page (http:// www.abb.com). Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 2/27 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Measurement, signalling and available data functions Details about functions available on PR332/P, trip units with PR330/D-M and EP010 - FBP - PDP22 are listed in the table below: Communication functions Protocol Physical means Speed (maximum) Measurement functions Phase currents Neutral current Ground current Voltage (phase-phase, phase-neutral, residual) Power (active, reactive, apparent) Power factor Frequency and peak factor Energy (active, reactive, apparent) Harmonic analysis Signalling functions LED: auxiliary power supply, pre-alarm, alarm, transmission, reception Temperature Indication for L, S, I, G and other protection Available data Circuit breaker status (open, closed) Circuit breaker position (racked-in, racked-out) Mode (local, remote) Protection parameters set Load control parameters Alarms Protections: L, S, I, G Undervoltage, overvoltage and residual voltage protection (timing and trip) Reverse power protection (timing and trip) Directional protection (timing and trip) Underfrequency/overfrequency protection (timing and trip) Phases rotation Failed tripping under fault conditions Maintenance Total number of operations Total number of trips Number of trip tests Number of manual operations Number of separate trips for each protection function Contact wear (%) Record data of last trip Commands Circuit breaker open/close Alarms reset Setting of curves and protection thresholds Synchronize system time Events Status changes in circuit breaker, protections and all alarms (1) With PR330/V (2) No residual voltage (3) No apparent power available (4) Please ask ABB for further details 2/28 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL PR332/P + PR330/D-M PR332/P + PR330/D-M and EP010 FBP-PDP22 Modbus RTU standard RS485 19.2 kbps Profibus-DP or DeviceNet cable 115 kbps * * * * * * opt.(1) opt.(1) opt.(1) opt.(1) opt.(1) - opt.(1) (2) opt.(1) (3) * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * (4) (4) (4) - * * opt.(1) opt.(1) - opt.(1) - opt.(1) opt.(1) - opt.(1) - * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Power supply The PR332/P trip unit does not normally require any external power supplies, being self-supplied from the current sensors (CS): to activate the protection and ammeter functions, it is sufficient for at least one phase to have a current load higher than 80 A. The unit ensures fully self-supplied operation. When an auxiliary power supply is present, it is also possible to use the unit with the circuit breaker either open or closed with very low current flowing through (<80 A). It is also possible to use an auxiliary power supply provided by the PR030/B portable battery unit, which allows the protection functions to be set when the trip unit is not self supplied. PR332/P stores and shows all the information needed after a trip (protection tripped, trip current, time, date). No auxiliary supply is required. Auxiliary power supply (galvanically insulated) Maximum ripple Inrush current @ 24 V Rated power @ 24 V (*) PR332/P PR330/D-M 24 V DC 20% 5% ~1 A for 5 ms ~3 W from PR332/P 5% ~0.5 A for 5 ms +1 W The setting I1 =1 indicates the maximum overload protection setting. The actual maximum setting allowable must take into account any derating based on temperature, the terminals used and the altitude (see the "Installations" chapter) Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 2/29 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Motor control protection circuit breakers : MCP Electrical characteristics Breaker type Frame size Number of poles Ratings [A] [No.] [A] Frame type 240 V AC [kA rms] 480 V AC [kA rms] 600Y/347 V AC [kA rms] 600 V AC [kA rms] 500 V DC (3 poles in series) [kA rms] 600 V DC (3 poles in series) [kA rms] Magnetic only adjustable (6...12xIn) Magnetic only adjustable (4...12xIn) Interrupting ratings Trip units T2 T3 Ts3 100 3 20...100 225 3 100...200 S 65 35 10 35 * - 150 2-3-4 50...150 L 150 85 25 65 50 * S 65 35 - H 150 65 * - 3...25 L 50 25 10 65(1) 50 175...200 L 150 65 50 - (1) Only for 25A rating Electrical characteristics (continued) Breaker type Frame size Number of poles Ratings [A] [No.] [A] Frame type 240 V AC [kA rms] 480 V AC [kA rms] Interrupting ratings 600Y/347 V AC [kA rms] 600 V AC [kA rms] 500 V DC (3 poles in series) [kA rms] 600 V DC (3 poles in series) [kA rms] Trip units Electronic PR221DS-I N 65 25 18 - 2/30 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL T4 T5 T6 250 3 100-150-250 S H 100 150 35 65 25 35 * 400-600 3 300-400-600 S H 100 150 35 65 25 35 * 800 3 600-800 S H 100 200 50 65 25 35 * L 200 100 65 - N 65 25 18 - L 200 100 65 - N 65 35 20 - L 200 100 42 - Tmax molded case circuit breakers Motor control protection circuit breakers : MCP General characteristics MCP circuit breakers are used to protect three phase asynchronous motors. The traditional system used for this purpose is based on three different devices: a circuit breaker for protection against short-circuit, a thermal relay for protection against overload and phase loss or unbalance of phase, and a contactor for motor switching. All this has to take into account the problems that arise at the moment of the motor starting. In particular, when selecting these devices, different factors must be taken into consideration, such as: - the motor power; - the diagram and type of starting; - the type of motor: with cage rotor or with wound rotor; - the fault current at the point of the network where the motor is installed. ABB offers two different protection types: - a magnetic only trip unit (MA) for Tmax T2 and T3 with adjustable threshold between 6...12 x In, for Ts3 with adjustable threshold between 4...12 x In; - an electronic trip unit with only an instantaneous short circuit protection I, PR221DS-I for Tmax T4, T5 and T6, and PR231/P-I for Tmax T7. Circuit-breaker with magnetic only release Contactor Thermal relay Motor Protection against short-circuit Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 2/31 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Motor control protection circuit breakers : MCP MA - Magnetic only trip unit (for T2 and T3) In [A] T2 20 50 100 * * * 125 150 200 * * * * 600...1200 750...1500 900...1800 1200...2400 T3 I3 = 6...12 x In I3 [A] 120...240 300...600 MA - Magnetic only trip unit (for Ts3) In [A] 3 5 10 25 50 100 125 150 175 200 Ts3 * * * * * * * * * * I3 [A] 12...36 20...60 40...120 100...300 200...600 400...1200 500...1500 600...1800 700...2100 800...2400 I3 = 4...12 x In Electronic trip units In [A] 100 150 250 300 400 600 800 1000 1200 T4 * * * - - - - - - T5 - - - * * * - - - T6 - - - - - * * - - T7 - - - - - - - * * Trip current function I I3 [A] 100...1000 150...1500 250...2500 300...3000 400...4000 600...6000 800...8000 1000...12000 1200...14400 PR221DS-I Protection function Trip threshold Excludability Relation t=f(I) Against short-circuit with I3 = 1 - 1.5 - 2 - 2.5 - 3 - 3.5 - 4.5 - 5.5 - 6.5 - 7 - 7.5 - 8 adjustable instantaneous trip 8.5 - 9 - 10 x In Tolerance: 20% (T2) 10% (T4-T5, T6) Note: The tolerances are valid under the following hypotheses: - relay self-supplied on running and/or auxiliary power supply (without start up) - two-phase or three-phase power supply. * t=k In all the cases not foreseen by the above-mentioned hypotheses, the following tolerance values are valid: I Trip threshold 20% Trip time 40ms PR231P-I Protection function Trip threshold Excludability Relation t=f(I) Against short-circuit with I3 = 1 - 1.5 - 2 - 2.5 - 3 - 3.5 - 4.5 - 5.5 - 6.5 - 7 - 7.5 - 8 adjustable instantaneous trip 8.5 - 9 - 10 x In - Tolerance: 10% Note: The tolerances are valid under the following hypotheses: - relay self-supplied on running and/or auxiliary power supply (without start up) - two-phase or three-phase power supply. In all the cases not foreseen by the above-mentioned hypotheses, the following tolerance values are valid: I 2/32 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Trip threshold 15% Trip time 60ms t=k Tmax molded case circuit breakers Molded case switch : MCS Electrical characteristics The MCS can be used as a general circuit breakers in sub-switch-boards, switching and isolation parts for lines, busbars or groups of apparatus, or as bus-ties. They can be part of a general isolation device of groups of machines or of complexes for motor operation and protection. The MCS are derived from the corresponding circuit breakers of which they keep the overall dimensions, versions, fixing systems and the possibility of mounting accessories. All the molded case switches in accordance with UL 489 and CSA C22.2 Standards are self protected. MCS Breaker type Frame size Number of poles Magnetic override Rated voltage [A] [No.] [A] AC (50-60 Hz) [V] DC [V] T1N T3S T3S Ts3H Ts3H 100 3-4 1000 600Y/347 500 150 3-4 1500 600Y/347 500 225 3-4 2250 600Y/347 500 150 3-4 1500 600 600 225 3-4 2250 480 500 MCS (continued) Breaker type Frame size Number of poles Magnetic override Rated voltage [A] [No.] [A] AC (50-60 Hz) [V] DC [V] T4N-S-H-L-V T5N-S-H-L-V T6H 250 3-4 3000 600 600 400-600 3-4 5000 600 600 800 3-4 10000 600 600 MCS (continued) Breaker type Frame size Number of poles Magnetic override Rated voltage [A] [No.] [A] AC (50-60 Hz) [V] DC [V] T7 T8 1200 3-4 20000 600 - 2000-2500-3000 3-4 40000 600 - Isolation MCS's main function is to isolate the circuit they are inserted in. Once the contacts are open they are at a distance which prevents an arc from striking, in accordance with the standards regarding isolation behaviour. The position of the operating lever corresponds with the position of the contacts (positive operation). Protection Each molded case switch must be protected on the supply side by a device which safeguards it against short-circuits. Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 2/33 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Molded case switch : MCS Electrical characteristics Present 3 poles UL circuit breakers Tmax T2 H, Tmax T4 H and T4 V and Tmax T5 H 400 A and T5 V 400 A have been undergone to specific tests according to UL 489 in order to be classified as UL Current Limiting circuit breakers. These breakers have peculiar characteristics in terms of limitation of peak current and limitation of specific let-through energy. According to UL 489 standard, Current Limiting circuit breakers will be signed "Current Limiting" on the front and will have a label on the right side specifying peak current and specific let-through energy values. Accessories and trip units are the same ones as those available for standard UL Tmax MCCBs. Tmax Current Limiting Breaker type Frame size Number of poles Rated voltage [A] [No.] AC (50-60 Hz) [V] Trip units Dimensions Mechanical life T4 T5 250 400 3 3 3 480 600 600 600 DC [V] Frame type Interrupting ratings T2 100 600 H H V H V 240 V AC [kA rms] 150 150 200 150 200 277 V AC [kA rms] - - - - - 347 V AC [kA rms] - - - - - 480 V AC [kA rms] 65 65 150 65 150 600Y/347 V AC [kA rms] - - - - - 600 V AC [kA rms] - 35 100 35 100 250 V DC (2 poles in series) [kA rms] - - - - - 500 V DC (3 poles in series) [kA rms] - - - - - 500 V DC (2 poles in series) [kA rms] - 50 100 50 100 600 V DC (3 poles in series) [kA rms] - 35 65 35 TMF * * - TMD/TMA - * * Electronic * * * H [in/mm] 5.12/130 8.07/205 8.07/205 65 W 3p [in/mm] 3.54/90 4.13/105 5.51/140 D [in/mm] 2.76/70 4.07/103.5 4.07/103.5 25000 20000 20000 [No.operations] 2/34 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Table of contents Tmax accessories information Electrical and mechanical accessories Versions and types Connection terminals Service releases Electrical signals Remote control Operating mechanisms and locks Accessories for electronic trip units Installation accessories and spare parts Compatibility of internal accessories 3/2 3/6 3/14 3/18 3/25 3/31 3/37 3/41 3/42 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 3/1 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Versions and types Starting from the fixed version with front terminals, the Tmax circuit breakers can be converted into the various versions (plug-in for T2, T3, Ts3, T4 and T5; draw out for Ts3, T4, T5, T6 and T7), using the conversion kits. This makes management of the product, its versions and stock very flexible. In any case, it is always possible to request the circuit breaker in the desired version completely preset in the factory, by ordering, on the same line, the fixed circuit breaker and the conversion kit, to which must be added the cradle. T7 is available in two different versions: the toggle version similar to the other sizes in the Tmax family, and the new motorizable version. Fixed The Tmax FIXED three-pole or four-pole version circuit breakers offer: - circuit breakers characterized by just two depths up to 1000 A: 70 mm for Tmax T1, T2 and T3 and 103.5 mm for Tmax Ts3, T4, T5 and T6. For T7 the depth varies according to the type of operating mechanism (with toggle or spring charging motor) - standard circuit breakers fronts: 45 mm for Tmax T1, T2 and T3 and 105 mm for Ts3, T4 and T5, 140 mm for T6 and 280 mm for T7 - flange for compartment door - possibility of assembly on back plate (or on DIN rail with T1, T2, T3 and Ts3, with the help of a special accessory,. - thermomagnetic (on Tmax T1, T2, T3, Ts3, T4, T5 and T6) or electronic (on Tmax T2, T4, T5, T6 and T7) trip units - standard FC Cu type terminals (front for copper cables) for T1 and F type (front) on all the Tmax family sizes. Plug-in The PLUG-IN version of the circuit breaker (Tmax T2, T3, Ts3, T4 and T5) consists of: - cradle to be installed directly on the back plate of the unit - moving part obtained from the fixed circuit breaker with addition of the isolating contacts (near the connection terminals), of the rear frame (for fixing to the cradle) and of the terminal covers. The circuit breaker is racked out by unscrewing the top and bottom fixing screws. A special lock prevents circuit breaker racking in and racking out with the contacts in the closed position. In case the circuit breaker has electrical accessories mounted (SOR, UVR, MOS, MOE, MOE-E, AUX , AUX-E, AUE, RC222), the socket-plug connectors or the adapters for isolation of the relative auxiliary circuits must also be ordered. Draw out The circuit breakers in the DRAW OUT version (Tmax Ts3, T4, T5, T6 and T7) are made up of: - cradle to be installed directly on the back plate of the unit fitted with lateral guides to allow the moving part racking-in and racking-out operation to be carried out easily, and a dedicated flange for the compartment door to replace the one provided with the circuit breaker in the fixed version; - moving part obtained from the fixed circuit breaker with addition of the relative conversion kit from fixed to draw out moving part; - mandatory accessory to be applied onto the front of the circuit breaker selected between front for lever operating mechanism (standard supply for circuit breakers fitted with accessories in the factory, excluding T7) motor operator and rotary handle operating mechanism. Application of one of these accessories allows the racking-in and racking-out of the moving part with the compartment door closed (on T7 no accessory is required to have racking-out with the door closed). 3/2 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Draw out (continued) Racking-in and racking-out of the moving part is carried out the special operating lever supplied with the cradle. This particular device allows the circuit breaker to be placed in the isolated position (with power and auxiliary circuits disconnected) with the compartment door closed, to the great advantage of operator safety. The handle can only be inserted with the circuit breaker open. Once removed or racked-out, the circuit breaker can be operated in open/closed and, by means of special connection extensions, blank tests can be carried out of the auxiliary control circuit functions. The T4, T5 and T6 circuit breakers in the draw out version can only be fitted with pre-wired electrical accessories, provided with the appropriate ADP adapters for isolation of the relative auxiliary circuits. Stored Energy The stored energy T7 and T8 circuit breaker can be equipped with the spring charging motor. To allow a complete remote control with T7 and T8 motorizable, the circuit breaker must be fitted with: - shunt trip; - closing coil; - spring charging motor. Versions available Breaker type F Fixed P Plug-in W Draw out T1 * - - T2 * * - T3 * * - Ts3 * * * T4 * * * T5 * * * T6 * - * T7 * - * T7M * - * T8 * - - Cradle - FP (UL FILE: E116596) The cradle, available for all the sizes of the Tmax family starting from T2, allows the circuit breaker to be made in the plug-in or draw out version. Different positions of the circuit breaker are possible: - plug-in: connected, removed; - draw out: connected, removed, racked-out for test (only for T7), racked-out. In the standard version, the cradles of T2 and T3 are available with front terminals (F). A distinctive characteristic is the possibility of fitting these cradles with the same terminal, terminal cover and phase separator kits used for the fixed circuit breakers. With Tmax Ts3, T4, T5, T6 and T7, cradles with dedicated front and rear terminals are available. Moreover, the cradles of Ts3, T4 and T5 with front terminals can also be fitted with the special ES, FC Cu and FC CuAl terminals. The rear flat terminals of the cradles of Tmax T7 are orientated (horizontally or vertically). Factory assembly is horizontal as standard. It is possible to ask for the cradle with vertical terminals. This extra code can be associated either with the top or bottom terminals (if asking for assembly of both the terminals vertically, the extra code must be repeated twice). The anti-racking-in locks, to be mounted on the left side of the cradle, and which prevent racking-in of incorrect moving parts are supplied as standard fitting of the cradles of Tmax T7. In detail, it is possible to define the different ways of combination between the cradle and the moving part according to: T7 with lever or which can be motorized, breaking capacity and rated uninterrupted current. Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 3/3 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Kit for conversion of plug-in cradle to draw out cradle (UL FILE: E116596) For Tmax Ts3, T4 and T5 a conversion kit is available which is made up of a guide to prepare the plugin cradle of the circuit breaker to the draw out cradle of the circuit breaker, a racking-out crank handle and by the flange for the compartment door to replace the one supplied with the fixed or plug-in circuit breaker version. Racking-out crank handle This allows racking-out and racking-in of the draw out circuit breaker into the cradle, with the door closed. The crank handle is the same for the whole range of circuit breakers and is automatically supplied with the cradle of draw out circuit breakers or with the conversion kit for plug-in cradles to draw out cradles. Sliding contacts blocks The sliding contact blocks are required for Tmax T7 in the draw out version equipped with electrical accessories or with an electronic trip unit. Their function is to realize the electrical connections of the secondary circuits between the mobile part and the cradle and these blocks work in pairs: one block is to be mounted on the mobile part and the other one on the cradle. The following table combines the types of sliding contact blocks and the electrical accessories. Left block Central block Right block Spring charging motor PR331 Auxiliary contacts (Q or SY) Sping charged contact (AUX-SC) PR332 Shunt trip Ready to close contact (AUX-RTC) - Closing coil Early auxiliary contacts (AUE) - Under voltage release Contact for signalling trip coil release trip (AUX-SA) - - Trip reset - - If at least one of the electrical accessories listed in the previous table is fitted on the circuit breaker the respective pair of blocks must be mounted on the mobile part and on the cradle. T2-T3 Kit for conversion into moving part of plug-in for T2 - T3 - Ts3 - T4 - T5 (UL FILE: E116596) Allows the fixed circuit breaker with front terminals to be converted into the moving part of a plug-in circuit breaker. The kit consists of: - isolating contacts - anti-racking out safety device - assembly screws and nuts - low terminal covers for the moving part. The cradle for plug-in version is necessary to complete the circuit breaker. T4-T5 3/4 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Kit for conversion into moving part of draw out for Ts3 - T4 - T5 - T6 - T7 (UL FILE: E116596) T4-T5-T6 Allows the fixed circuit breaker with front terminals to be converted into the moving part of a draw out circuit breaker. The kit consists of: - isolating contacts - frame - assembly screws and nuts - low terminal covers for the moving part. The circuit breakers in the draw out version must always be completed either with the front for lever operating mechanism (standard supply for circuit breakers fitted with accessories in the factory, excluding T7), rotary handle operating mechanism or motor operator. The cradle for draw out version is necessary to complete the circuit breaker. T7 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 3/5 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Connection terminals The basic version circuit breaker is supplied with: - front terminals for copper cables (FC Cu), for the Tmax T1 circuit breaker - front terminals (F), for all the other Tmax family sizes. Different types of terminals, which can be combined in different ways, are also available (top of one type, bottom of a different type), thereby allowing the circuit breaker to be connected to the plant in the most suitable way in relation to installation requirements. The following can be distinguished: - front terminals which allow connection of cables or busbars working directly from the front of the circuit breaker - oriented rear terminals which allow installation of the circuit breakers in switchboards with rear access to both the cable and busbar connections. Terminals are available for direct connection of bare copper or aluminium cables and terminals for connection of busbars or cables with cable lugs. On page 3/8 and following, the information needed to make the connections for each type of terminal is summarised. For connection with bare cables, the minimum and maximum cross-sections of the cables, which can be clamped in the terminals, the type of cables (rigid or flexible) and the diameter of the terminal are indicated. For connections with busbars, flat terminals of different sizes and composition are recommended. The torque values to be applied to the terminal tightening screws for cables and to the screws used to connect the busbars to the flat terminals are indicated. The circuit breakers can be ordered complete with the terminals required (mounted directly in the factory), by associating the terminal kit codes with the code of the standard version circuit breaker, or the terminals can be ordered individually in packs of 3 - 4 - 6 or 8 pieces. To receive the circuit breaker with mixed terminals, the two terminal half-kits must be specified, loading the one to be mounted on top as the first half-kit and then the one to be mounted below. If the top terminals are the same as the bottom ones, it is compulsory to order the complete kit (6 or 8 pieces) and not the two half-kits: the configuration would not be accepted by the system. Insulating terminal covers The terminal covers are applied to the circuit breaker to prevent accidental contact with live parts and thereby guarantee protection against direct contacts. The following are available: - low terminal covers (LTC): these guarantee IP40 degree of protection for fixed circuit breakers with rear terminals and for moving parts of plug-in and draw out circuit breakers - high terminal covers (HTC): these guarantee IP40 degree of protection, for fixed circuit breakers with front, front extended, front for cables terminals. With Tmax T2 and T3, the cradles of plug-in circuit breakers can use the same terminal covers as the corresponding fixed circuit breakers. For cradles of T4 and T5, the proper terminal covers (TC-FP) are available. The degrees of protection indicated at page 1/8 are valid for the circuit breaker installed in a switchboard. 3/6 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Phase separators These allow increased insulation characteristics between the phases at the connections. They are mounted from the front, even with the circuit breaker already installed, inserting them into the corresponding slots and they are available in two versions: - 3.94" (100 mm) high - 7.87" (200 mm) high. The H = 3.94" (100 mm) phase separators are supplied as obligatory with front extended type terminals (EF), whereas the ones with height 7.87" (200 mm) are obligatory with front extended spread type terminals (ES). The phase separating partitions are incompatible with both the high and low insulating terminal covers; while with Ts3 circuit breakers, phase separating partitions are always supplied with low terminal covers. The cradles can use the same phase separating partitions as the corresponding fixed circuit breakers. With the phase separating partitions mounted, on request, with Tmax T1, T2 and T3 a special kit is available to reach IP40 degree of protection from the front of the circuit breaker. It is possible to mount the phase separating partitions between two circuit breakers or cradles side by side. Screws for sealing the terminal covers These are applied to the terminal covers of fixed circuit breakers or to the moving parts of plug-in or draw out circuit breakers. They prevent removal of both the high and low terminal covers and can be locked with a wire and lead seal. Kit for taking up the auxiliary power supply Special kits are available with the fixed version of Tmax T2, T3, T4 and T5 circuit breakers for taking up the auxiliary power supply directly from the connection terminals. They can only be combined with the front terminals for copper cables (FC Cu) for T2, T3 and T4 or with the front terminals (F) for T4-T5. Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 3/7 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Connection terminals (fixed circuit breaker) Breaker type F EF ES FC Cu FC CuAl(1) Front terminals Front extended terminals Front extended spread terminals Front terminals for copper cables Front terminals for CuAl cables MC RC CuAl Multi-cable Rear terminals terminals for CuAl cables HR VR HR for RC221/222 Rear flat horizontal terminals Rear flat vertical terminals Rear flat horizontal terminals R Rear terminals T1 - F - F(2) F - - F - F - T2 F(2) F F F F - - - - - F T3 F(2) F F F F - - - - - F Ts3 F(2) F F F F - F - - - F T4 F(2) F F F F F - - - - F T5 F(2) F F F F - - - - - F T6 F(2) F F - F - F - - - F T7 F(2) F F - F - - F F - F T8 F(2) - F - F - - - - - F (1) UL listed (2) Standard supply F = Fixed Connection terminals (cradle or plug-in base) Breaker type F EF ES FC Cu FC CuAl(1) R RS HR VR HR/VR RC Front terminals Front extended terminals Front extended spread terminals Front terminals for copper cables Front terminals for CuAl cables Rear terminals Rear spreaded terminals Rear flat horizontal terminals Rear flat vertical terminals Rear flat terminals Rear terminals for CuAl cables - T2 P(2) P P P P P - - - - T3 P(2) P P P P P - - - - - Ts3 - P-W - P-W(1) - - - - - P-W - T4 - P-W - P-W P-W - - P-W P-W - - T5 - P-W P(3)-W(3) P-W P-W - - P-W P-W - - T6 - W - - - - - W W(1) - - T7 - W - - - - W - - W W(1) (1) UL listed Standard supply For T5 600 only P = Plug-in W = Draw out (2) (3) 3/8 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Front terminals - F Allow connection of busbars or cables with ring terminals Breaker type Version Pieces Busbars/cable terminal [in-mm] W H D Tightening [Ibin-Nm] O Terminal covers high low Phase separators cradle T2 F-P 1 0.79-20 0.30-7.5 0.20-5 0.26-6.5 54-6 R R - R T3 F-P 1 0.94-24 0.37-9.5 0.31-8 0.33-8.5 71-8 R R - R Ts3 150 F 1 0.79-20 0.39-10 0.16-4 0.35-9 80-9 R R - R* Ts3 225 F 1 0.79-20 0.39-10 0.24-6 0.35-9 80-9 R R - R* R T4 F 1 0.98-25 0.37-9.5 0.31-8 0.33-8.5 161-18 R R - T5 F 1 1.38-35 0.43-11 0.39-10(1) 0.41-10.5 252-28 R R - R T6 F 2 1.97-50 0.47-12 0.20-5 2x0.28-2x7 80-9 R R - R T7 F 2 1.97-50 0.79-20 0.31-8 2x0.43-2x11 161-18 - R - R T8 2000 F 3 3.94 - 100 - 0.2 - 5 4x 0.59 - 15 625 - 70 - R - R T8 2500 F 4 3.94 - 100 - 0.2 - 5 4x 0.59 - 15 625 - 70 - R - R (1) minimum 0.19"-5 mm Front extended terminals - EF Allow connection of busbars or cables with ring terminals Breaker type Version Busbars [in-mm] Pieces Cable terminal [in-mm] W D O W O Terminal covers Tightening [Ibin-Nm] A B(1) high low cradle Phase separators T1 F 1 0.59-15 0.20-5 0.33-8.5 0.59-15 0.33-8.5 63-7 80-9 R - - T2 F-P 1 0.79-20 0.16-4 0.33-8.5 0.79-20 0.33-8.5 54-6 80-9 R - - S S T3 F-P 1 0.79-20 0.24-6 0.39-10 0.79-20 0.39-10 71-8 161-18 R - - S 0.31-8 80-9 80-9 R R R R* 80-9 80-9 R R R R* Ts3 150 F 1 0.79-20 0.16-4 0.33-8.5 0.79-20 Ts3 225 F-P-W 1 0.79-20 0.24-6 0.33-8.5 0.79-20 0.33-8.5 F 1 0.79-20 0.39-10 0.39-10 0.79-20 0.39-10 161-18 161-18 R - - S P-W 1 0.79-20 0.39-10 0.31-8 0.79-20 0.31-8 - 80-9 - - R R T4 F 2 1.18-30 0.28-7 0.43-11 1.18-30 0.43-11 252-28 161-18 R - - S P-W 2 1.18-30 0.59-15 0.39-10 1.18-30 0.39-10 - 161-18 - - R R T6 F-W 2 1.97-50 0.20-5 0.55-14 1.97-50 0.55-14 80-9 268-30 - R R R T7 F-W 2 1.97-50 0.39-10 4x0.43-4x11(2) - - 161-18(3) 355-40(4) - R - S T5 (1) (2) class 4.8 screws (not supplied) only use two holes diagonally (3) (4) 12 Nm onto cradle of draw out circuit breaker class 8.8 screws (not supplied) A = Tightening the terminal onto the circuit breaker B = Tightening the cable/busbar onto the terminal R = On request R* = Are supplied with low terminal covers (which are, in turn, on request) S = Standard Pieces = Number of busbars, cables or cable terminals Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 3/9 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Front extended spread terminals - ES Allow connection of busbars or cables terminated with cable terminal Breaker type Version Busbars [in-mm] Pieces Cable terminal [in-mm] Terminal covers Tightening [Ibin-Nm] W D O W O A B(1) high low cradle Phase separators T2 F-P 1 1.18-30 0.16-4 0.41-10.5 1.18-30 0.41-10.5 54-6 161-18 - - - T3 F-P 1 1.18-30 0.16-4 0.41-10.5 1.18-30 0.41-10.5 71-8 161-18 - - - S S Ts3 F 1 1.18-30 0.16-4 0.33-8.5 1.18-30 0.33-8.5 80-9 80-9 - S - S* T4 F 1 1.18-30 0.24-6 0.41-10.5 1.18-30 0.41-10.5 161-18 161-18 - - - S T5 F-P(2)-W(2) 1 1.58-40 0.39-10 0.43-11 0.43-11 0.43-11 252-28 161-18 - - - S T6 F 1 3.15-80 0.20-5 T7 F 2 1.97-50 0.39-10 3x-0.51-3x13 4x1.77-4x45 0.51-13 T8 2000 F 6 - - - 1.73 - 44 T8 2500 F 6 - - - 1.73 - 44 (1) class 4.8 screws (not supplied) (2) 3x-0.51-3x13 3x1.77-3x45 0.51-13 80-9 268-30 - - - - 161-18 355-40 - - - S 0.67 - 17 365 - 40 365 - 40 - - - R 0.67 - 17 365 - 40 365 - 40 - - - R for T5 600 only Front terminals for copper cables - FC Cu Allow connection of bare copper cables directly to the circuit breaker Breaker type Assembly Version Pieces T1/T1 1p T2 T3 Ts3 T4 T5 (1) UL Listed Cable [AWG or Kcmil-mm2] (2) Flexible busbars (2) Tightening [Ibin - Nm] O [in-mm] Terminal covers cradle Phase separators rigid flexible WxSxN A B high low standard F 1 2.5...70 2.5...50 9 x 0.8 x 6 - 63-7 0.47-12 R R - R standard F 2 - 2.5...35 - - 63-7 0.47-12 R R - R standard F-P 1 1...95 1...70 13 x 0.5 x 10 - 63-7 0.55-14 R R R R standard F-P 2 - 1...50 - - 63-7 0.55-14 R R R R standard F-P 1 6...185 6...150 15.5 x 0.8 x 10 - 89-10 0.71-18 R R R R standard F-P 2 - 6...70 - - 89-10 0.71-18 R R R R R* standard F-P-W 1 10...350-6...185 - - - 142-16 0.71-18 R R S standard F-P-W 1 2.5...185 2.5...120 15.5 x 0.8 x 10 - 89-10 0.71-18 R R S R standard F-P-W 2 - 2.5...95 - - 89-10 0.71-18 R R S R standard F-P-W 1 16...300 16...240 24 x 1 x 10 - 222-25 1.10-28 R R S R standard F-P-W 2 - 16...150 - - 222-25 1.10-28 R R R - external F 2 120...240 - - 18 222-25 S - - - W = width; S = thickness; N = n. of bars A = Tightening the terminal onto the circuit breaker B = Tightening the cable/busbar onto the terminal R = On request S = Standard R* = Are supplied with low terminal covers (which are, in turn, on request) S* = Are supplied as standard with the low terminal covers Pieces = Number of busbars, cables or cable terminals 3/10 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL - Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Front terminals for copper/aluminium cables - FC CuAl (UL listed) Allow connection of bare copper or aluminium cables directly to the circuit breaker (solid aluminium cables cannot be used) T2-T5 Standard Type T1 1P/T1 T4-T5 External Assembly standard Version F Pieces 1 Cable [AWG or Kcmil-mm2] Tightening [Ibin-Nm] O [in-mm] Terminal covers high low cradle Phase separators rigid A B 14...10-2.5...6 20-2.5 - 0.37-9.5 R R - 8.0-10 40-4.5 - - - - - - 6...1/0-16...50 45-5 - - - - - - R R T2 100 standard F-P 1 14...1/0-2.5...50 80-9 50-5.6 - R R R T3 100 standard F-P 1 14...1/0-2.5...50 80-9 50-5.6 0.39-10 R R R R T3 225 standard F-P 1 4...300-25...150 80-9 200-22.6 0.67-17 R R R R Ts3-D 150 (In=100) standard F 1 14...1/0-2.5...50 80-9 50-5.6 - Ts3 150 standard F 1 2...4/0-35...95 80-9 Ts3 225 standard F 1 4...300-25...150 80-9 276-31 T4 250 standard F-P-W 1 6...350-6...185 274-31 80-9 T4 250 standard F 1 14...1/0-2.5...50 50-5.6 T5 400 external F 2 3/0...250-95...120 274-31 T5 400 standard F-P-W 1 250...500-120...240 380-43 T5 600 external F 2 3/0...500-95...240 T6 600 standard F 2 T6 800 standard F 2 T7 1200 external F 4 R - - - R - - - - R - - - 0.7-18 R R S R 80-9 0.39-9.9 R R - R 159-18 0.61-15.5 S - - R 159-18 0.84-21.5 R R S R 274-31 159-18 0.84-21.5 S - - R 250...500-120...240 44-5 276-31 0.87-22 S - - - 250...500-120...240 44-5 276-31 0.87-22 S - - - 2/0...500-70...240 160-18 380-43 0.84-21.5 S - - - 120-13.5 0.56-14.2 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 3/11 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Rear terminals - R Allow connection of busbars or cable terminal at the rear. They can be installed in 4 different positions to facilitate connection to cable/busbars Breaker type Version Pieces T2 F-P T3 F-P Ts3 150 Ts3 225 Busbars [in-mm] Tightening [Ibin-Nm] Terminal covers Phase separators W D O A B(1) high low 1 0.79-20 0.16-4 0.33-8.5 54-6 80-9 - S 1 0.79-20 0.24-6 0.33-8.5 54-6 80-9 - S - F 1 0.79-20 0.16-4 0.49-12.5 89-10 179-20 - S S* P-W 1 0.79-20 0.16-4 0.49-12.5 89-10 179-20 - - - F 1 0.79-20 0.24-6 0.49-12.5 89-10 179-20 - S S* - P-W 1 0.79-20 0.24-6 0.49-12.5 89-10 179-20 - - - T4 F 1 0.79-20 0.39-10 0.33-8.5 54-6 80-9 - S - T5 F 2 1.18-30 0.28-7 0.43-11 161-18 161-18 - S - T6 F 2 1.97-50 0.20-5 0.55-14 161-18 268-30 - S - T7 F 2 1.97-50 0.31-8 2x0.43-2x11 179-20 355-40 - S - (1) class 8.8 screws (not supplied) Rear vertical terminals - VR These allow connection of busbars or cable terminals at the rear. There are rear horizontal or vertical terminals. Breaker type Version Pieces Busbars / cable terminals [in-mm] W D O Tightening [Ibin-Nm] A B( Terminal covers high low cradle Phase separators T8 2000 F 3 3.94 - 100 0.2 - 5 4x 0.59 - 15 625 - 70 625 - 70 - - - R T8 2500 F 4 3.94 - 100 0.2 - 5 4x 0.59 - 15 625 - 70 625 - 70 - - - R T8 3000 F 4 3.94 - 100 0.2 - 5 4x 0.71 - 18 890 - 100 890 - 100 - - - R A = Tightening the terminal onto the circuit breaker B = Tightening the cable/busbar onto the terminal R = On request S = Standard S* = Are supplied as standard with the low terminal covers Pieces = Number of busbars, cables or cable terminals 3/12 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Rear flat horizontal and vertical terminals for cradles - HR/VR These allow connection of busbars or cable terminals at the rear. There are rear horizontal or vertical terminals. Breaker type Version Pieces Busbars [in-mm] Cable terminal [inmm] W O Tightening [Ibin-Nm] B Terminal covers Phase separators W D O T4 P-W 1 0.79-20 0.39-10 0.39-10 0.79-20 0.39-10 - 159-18 - - - - T5 400 P-W 1 0.98-25 0.39-10 0.47-12 0.98-25 0.47-12 - 159-18 - - - - T5 600 P-W 2 1.57-40 0.59-15 0.43-11 1.57-40 0.43-11 - 159-18 - - - - T6 W 2 1.97-50 0.20-5 0.55-14 1.97-50 0.55-14 - 268-30 - - - - T7 W 2 1.97-50 0.39-10 2x0.43-2x11 - - 106-12 355-40 - - - - (1) A (1) high low cradle class 4.8 screws (not supplied) A = Tightening the terminal onto the circuit breaker B = Tightening the cable/busbar onto the terminal R = On request S = Standard S* = Are supplied as standard with the low terminal covers Pieces = Number of busbars, cables or cable terminals Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 3/13 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Service releases The Tmax family of circuit breakers can be fitted with service releases (shunt trip, closing coil and undervoltage release). These are available in the pre-cabled version, depending on the size of the circuit breaker fitted with 39.4" (1 m) long free cables, with a connector with 39.4" (1 m) cables or with a simple pin connector and two terminals to be mounted in the terminal board. Assembly is carried out for all the releases by pressing into the special seat in the left part of the circuit breaker (right for T7 and T8) and fixing with the screw provided. The releases are interchangeable for T1, T2, T3, Ts3 (both for the three-pole and four-pole version), whereas for T4, T5 and T6 in the fourpole version the shunt trip (not possible with PS-SOR) and the undervoltage release can be housed at the same time, as long as they are in the wired version and the shunt trip is necessarily mounted in the slot of the third pole. T4, T5, T6 circuit breakers in the draw out version can only be equipped with pre-cabled accessories; the T4-T5-T6 circuit breakers complete with motorized controls can only be fitted with prewired undervoltage and shunt trips. The T7 and T8 circuit breakers allows simultaneous mounting of all three service releases. These two possibilities are available on the three-pole version as well. Moreover Tmax T7 and T8 can be equipped with two shunt trips instead of the undervoltage release to facilitate some specific applications where a very high safety level of the remote circuit breaker opening command is required. Shunt trip - SOR (UL FILE: E116596) Allows circuit breaker opening by means of an electric command. Operation of the trip is provided for a voltage between 70% and 110% of the rated power supply voltage value Un, both in alternating current and in direct current. For Tmax T1, T2, T3, T4, T5 and T6, the SOR shunt trip is fitted with a limit contact for cutting off the power supply in the open position and with the release tripped. T1-T2-T3 T4-T5-T6 T1-T2-T3 T7 3/14 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Ts3 T4-T5-T6 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Shunt trip - SOR - Electrical characteristics Inrush power consumption Control voltage Tmax T1, T2, T3 Tmax Ts3 AC [VA] DC [W] 12 V DC - 50 - 24 V AC/DC - - 100 50 50 - - - - 24...30 V AC/DC 30 V AC/DC 48 V AC/DC AC [VA] DC [W] Tmax T4, T5, T6 Tmax T7 Tmax T8 AC [VA] DC [W] AC [VA] DC [W] AC [VA] DC [W] 120 - 150 - - - - 100 or 4(1) - - 300 300 - 200 - 150 150 - - - - - - - 300 300 200 200 200 - - - 120 - - 300 300 200 60 60 - - 150 150 - - - - 60 V AC/DC - - - - - - 300 300 200 200 110...120 V AC/DC - - 100 or 4(1) - - - 300 300 200 200 120...127 V AC/DC - - - - - - 300 300 200 200 50 50 - 120 150 150 - - 200 200 200 48...60 V AC/DC 110...127 V AC-110...125 V DC 220...240 V AC/DC - - - - - - 300 300 200 50 50 100 120 150 150 - - - - - - - - - - 300 300 200 200 380...400 V AC - - - - - - 300 - 200 - 380...440 V AC 55 - - - 150 - - - - - 415...440 V AC - - - - - - 300 - 200 - 480 V AC - - 100 - - - - - - - 480...525 V AC 55 - - - 150 - - - - - Opening times [ms] 15 15 15 15 15 15 20 20 60 60 220...240 V AC-220...250 V DC 240...250 V AC/DC (1) Shunt trip of permanent supply Shunt trip with permanent service - PS-SOR Furthermore, for T4, T5 and T6, opening coils with permanent service (PS-SOR) are available, with much lower power consumption and which can be supplied continuously: in this case, in fact, they are not fitted with auxiliary limit contact. The pre-cabled or uncabled version can be chosen for these coils as well. Shunt trip - PS-SOR - Electrical characteristics Control voltage Tmax T4, T5, T6 AC [VA] DC [W] 24 V AC/DC 4 4 110...120 V AC 4 - Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 3/15 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Closing coil - SCR The closing coil - only available on the motorizable versions of Tmax T7 and T8 - allows remote closure of the circuit breaker when the circuit breaker closing springs are charged. The technical characteristics and the service voltages of the closing coil are identical to those of the shunt trip available on T7 and T8. The closing time of the circuit breaker by means of SCR is 80 ms. SCR - T7 Undervoltage release - UVR (UL FILE: E116596) The undervoltage release opens the circuit breaker due to lack of release power supply voltage or due to values under 0.7 x Un with a trip range from 0.7 to 0.35 x Un. After tripping, the circuit breaker can be closed again with a voltage higher than 0.85 x Un. With the undervoltage release de-energised, it is not possible to close the circuit breaker or the main contacts. UVR - Electrical characteristics Power consumption during permanent operation Control voltage Tmax T1, T2, T3 Tmax Ts3 Tmax T4, T5, T6 Tmax T7 Tmax T8 AC [VA] DC [W] AC [VA] DC [W] AC [VA] DC [W] AC [VA] DC [W] AC [VA] DC [W] 24 V AC/DC - - 6 3 - - 3.5 3.5 - 1.5 1.5 - - 6 3 - - - - 30 V AC/DC - - - - - - 3.5 3.5 5 5 48 V AC/DC 1 1 6 3 6 3 - - 5 5 60 V AC/DC 1 1 - - 6 3 - - 5 5 110...120 V AC/DC - - 6 - - - 3.5 3.5 5 5 5 24...30 V AC/DC UVR - T1-T2-T3 120...127 V AC/DC - - - - - - 3.5 3.5 5 110...127 V AC-110...125 V DC 2 2 - - 6 3 - - - - 220...240 V AC/DC - - - - - - 3.5 3.5 5 5 - 220...240 V AC-220...250 V DC UVR - T4-T5-T6 5 2.5 2.5 - 3 6 3 - - - 220...250 V AC - - 6 - - - - - - - 240...250 V AC/DC - - - - - - 3.5 3.5 5 5 380...400 V AC - - - - - - 3.5 - 5 - 380...440 V AC 3 - - - 6 - - - - - 415...440 V AC - - - - - - 3.5 - 5 - 480 V AC - - 6 - - - - - - - 480...525 V AC 4 - - - 6 - - - - - Opening times [ms] 15 15 18 18 25 25 25 25 30 30 UVR - T7 T1-T2-T3 3/16 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Ts3 T4-T5-T6 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Connectors for service releases (only for Ts3) These allow the shunt trip or undervoltage release to be connected to the power supply circuit. They are available in the following versions: - for fixed circuit breakers - for plug-in/draw out circuit breakers. Assembly is by means of pressure into special slots in the left side of the circuit breaker. Cables of different lengths (UL/CSA) are available. Socket-plugs with 3, 6 or 12 poles and cable kit (UL/CSA) with a length of 78.8" (2 m) are available for Tmax: the socket-plugs are necessary only for plug-in version. KTs3C-SU KTs3C-SUP Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 3/17 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Electrical signals These allow information on the operating state of the circuit breaker to be real outside. Installation of these accessories is carried out directly from the front of the circuit breaker in special slots placed on the right-hand side of the circuit breaker, completely segregated from the live parts - all to the benefit of user safety. The auxiliary contacts can be supplied (depending on the type) either with cabling directly on the circuit breaker terminal board or in the pre-cabled version, depending on the size of the circuit breaker fitted with free cables 39.4" (1 m) long, with a connector with 39.4" (1 m) long cables. The pre-cabled version is mandatory on the T4, T5 and T6 circuit breakers in the draw out version. The auxiliary contacts for T7 are always fitted with three terminals to be mounted in the terminal board to carry out the cabling. The auxiliary contacts are available for use both in direct and alternating current at various voltages. The signals are reset when the circuit breaker is reset. T1-T8 (AUX) AUX-C - 250 V AC/DC Available both in the pre-cabled and uncabled version, auxiliary contacts supply the following electrical signalling: - Form C (open/closed): indicates the position of the circuit breaker contacts (Q) - Bell alarm: signals circuit breaker opening due to overcurrent release trip (for overload or short circuit), trip of the residual current release, of the opening coil or of the undervoltage release, of the emergency opening pushbutton of the motor operator or two to operation of the test pushbutton (SY) - Contact for signalling electronic trip unit tripped: signals intervention of one of the protection functions of the electronic trip unit (S51) (except for Ts3). The auxiliary contacts for T7 and T8 are always fitted with terminals to be mounted in the terminal box to carry out wiring. T4, T5, T6, T7 and T8 with electronic trip units (AUX-SA) There is a contact for signalling electronic trip units tripped, only available in the pre-cabled version for use at 250 V AC. T7 T4, T5 and T6 (AUX-MO) This auxiliary contact, only in the uncabled version, must be combined with the motor operator and indicates the motor operation mode (manual or remote). T7 (AUX-RTC) T8 The "circuit breaker ready to close" auxiliary contact is available with wiring directly on the terminal box of the stored energy T7 circuit breaker and signals that the circuit breaker is ready to accept a closing command if there are the following five conditions: - circuit breaker open - closing springs charged - any opening coil de-energised - any undervoltage coil energised - opening solenoid armed. T7 (AUX-SC) Remotely indicates the state of the circuit breaker operating mechanism is closing springs (supplied only with the spring charging motor). 3/18 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories T4, T5 and T6 with PR222DS/PD-A and electronic trip unit (AUX-E) Only available in the pre-cabled version, the auxiliary contacts AUX-E (also called electronic version contacts) communicate the state of the circuit breaker to the electronic trip unit and make an open/closed signal available to the outside and another one for electronic trip unit tripped. They can only be combined with the PR222DS/PD-A electronic trip unit and only function when there is a 24 V DC auxiliary power supply to the trip unit for the communication functions. The AUX-E contacts can, moreover, be directly connected to the MOE-E motor operator. The "traditional" version of the auxiliary contacts can also be combined with the protection trip units with dialogue; in this case, only electrical signalling of the state of the circuit breaker will be provided and it will not be possible to communicate remotely or control the motor. AUX-C Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 3/19 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories AUX - Electrical characteristics AUX 250 V - T1...T6 Service current Category of utilisation (IEC 60947-5-1) AC 14 DC 13 6A 0.3 A 5A 0.15 A Power supply voltage 125 V 250 V Protection with gG 10x38 type fuse (Imax 6 A) AUX 400 V - Ts3 Power supply voltage AC (50-60) [V] Breaking capacity Ohmic Load [A] 0.3 0.15 6 3 DC [V] 125 250 250 400 AUX 400 V - T4...T7 Service current In [A] Power supply voltage AC - 12(1) 3 125 V 250 V 400 V (1) DC 0.5 0.3 - 5 A for Tmax T7 AUX 24 V - T1...T7 Service current In [A] Power supply voltage AC - - 24 V 5V DC 0.75 mA 1 mA AUX-E - T4...T6 Typical contact Vmax Imax Pmax (resistive load) System contact/ground insulation Contact/contact insulation Mosfet 350 V DC/230 V AC 50 mA AC/DC 17 W, 11 VA 2000 V AC (1 min. @ 50 Hz) 400 V DC Table of the possible combinations of the T7-T7M auxiliary contacts T7 BA BA C C KT7AS T7M C C C KT7XAS2 C C C C KT7AS + KT7XAS2 C C 3/20 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL C KT7XAS2 KT7XAS2 C C KT7XAS2 + KT7XAS2 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Types of auxiliary contacts Type and control voltage T1 T2 TMD T2 PR221 T3 Ts3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 * * * - - AUX 250 V AC/DC 1 open/closed changeover contact + 1 bell alarm changeover contact * * - * AUX 250 V AC/DC 3 open/closed changeover contacts + 1 bell alarm changeover contact * * - * - * * * - - AUX 250 V AC/DC 1 SA electronic release trip contact + 1 open/closed changeover contact + 1 bell alarm changeover contact - - * - - - - - - - AUX 250 V AC/DC 2 open/closed changeover contacts + 1 bell alarm changeover contact - - * - - - - - - - AUX 400 V AC 1 open/closed changeover contact + 1 bell alarm changeover contact - - - - - * * * * AUX 400 V AC 2 open/closed changeover contacts - - - - * * * * * - AUX 400 V AC 1 open/closed changeover contact + 1 bell alarm - - - - * - - - - - AUX 400 V AC 4 open/closed changeover contacts for PR232 and PR331 trip units - - - - - - - - - * AUX 400 V AC 4 open/closed changeover contacts for PR332 trip unit - - - - - - - - - *(1) AUX 24 V DC 1 open/closed changeover contact + 1 bell alarm changeover contact - - - - - - - - * - AUX 24 V DC 2 open/closed changeover contacts - - - - - - - - AUX 24 V DC 3 open/closed changeover contacts + 1 bell alarm changeover contact * * - * - * * * - - AUX 24 V DC 4 open/closed changeover contacts for PR232 and PR331 trip units low voltage - - - - - - - - - * AUX 24 V DC 4 open/closed changeover contacts for PR332 trip units low voltage - - - - - - - - - * AUX-SA 250 V AC 1 SA electronic release trip contact - - - * * * - - - * * * - * - - - - * AUX-RTC 250 V AC/DC 1 contact signalling ready to close - * 1 SA electronic release trip contact with remote reset - * AUX-SAR 250 V AC AUX-SC 24 V DC 1 contact signalling closing springs charged - - - - - - - - * - AUX-SC 250 V AC/DC 1 contact signalling closing springs charged - - - - - - - - * - AUX-E 1 open/closed contact + 1 bell alarm contact (only with PR222DS/PD-A) - - - - - * * * - - AUX-YU1 Normally close contact signalling undervoltage deenergized - - - - - - - - - * AUX-YU2 Normally open contact signalling undervoltage deenergized - - - - - - - - - * AUX-MO 1 contact signalling manual/remote AUX-RTC 24 V DC 1 contact signalling ready to close - - * (1) 4 contacts always supplied with T8 equipped with PR332 trip units Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 3/21 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Connectors for auxiliary contacts (only for Ts3) These allow the auxiliary contacts to be connected to the relative power supply circuit. For Ts3 circuit breakers, the auxiliary contacts (fitted with plug connector) can only be supplied by means of the specific connectors to be ordered specifying the size and version of the circuit breaker (fixed or plug-in/draw out). Assembly is carried out by mounting into special slots on the right side of the circuit breaker. Socket-plugs with 3, 6 or 12 poles and cable kit (UL/CSA) with a length of 78.8" (2 m) are available. KTs3C-AB KTs3C-ABP Early auxiliary contacts - AUE Early auxiliary contacts are normally open contacts, advanced in relation to closing (2 contacts for all the sizes, except for T7 where there are 3). They allow the undervoltage release to be supplied in advance, in relation to closing of the main contacts, in compliance with the IEC 60204-1 and VDE 0113 Standards. They are mounted inside the direct and transmitted rotary handle operating mechanism, whereas on T7 with the electric operating mechanism they are mounted directly on the circuit breaker. The early contacts are only supplied in the cabled version with 39.4" (1 m) long cables, complete with socket-plugs with 6 poles for T1, T2 and T3 or with socket-plug connectors with 39.4" (1 m) cables for T4, T5 and T6. It is necessary to bear in mind that once the connectors for T4, T5 and T6, are inserted in the special slot on the right-hand side of the circuit breaker they extend further out than the outline of the circuit breaker itself. For Ts3 the contact is supplied complete with double slide socket connectors for simultaneous connection of the undervoltage release and of the consent contact itself. The early auxiliary contacts for T7 are always fitted with 3 terminals to be mounted in the terminal board to carry out the cabling. 3/22 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Auxiliary position contacts - AUP Auxiliary position contacts which provide electrical signalling of the circuit breaker position in relation to the cradle are available. The following auxiliary position contacts are available: T2 - T3 - contacts signalling circuit breaker is racked-in. Ts3 - contacts signaling circuit breakers is racked-in - contacts signaling circuit breakers is drawn-out. T4 - T5 - T6 - circuit breaker racked-in signalling contacts for plug-in and draw out versions - circuit breaker racked-out signalling contacts only for draw out version - circuit breaker racked-in signalling contacts for plug-in and draw out versions 24 V DC - circuit breaker racked-out signalling contacts only for draw out version 24 V DC. T7 - contacts for signalling circuit breaker is racked-in - contacts for signalling circuit breaker is isolated-test - contacts for signalling circuit breaker is racked-out. T7 A maximum of three contacts can be installed on the cradle of T2, T3, T4 and T5, a maximum of two contacts for Ts3, whereas up to five auxiliary contacts can be mounted on the cradle of T6 in all the combinations (for T4 and T5, in the draw out version, only one contact for signalling circuit breaker racked-out can be housed in the compartment closest to the bottom terminals). The auxiliary contacts for T7 are inserted in a single block consisting of two contacts for signalling rackedin, two for isolated-test and two for racked-out. T2-T3 T4-T5 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 3/23 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Trip reset Available on the motorized T7 and T8, the trip reset is a coil which allows remote circuit breaker resetting following a trip of the overcurrent releases. It is available with two power supply voltages: 24...30 V AC/ DC, 110...130 V AC/DC and 200...240 V AC/DC. Mechanical operation counter Available on the motorized T7 and T8, it is connected to the operating mechanism by means of a simple lever mechanism. It indicates the number of circuit breaker mechanical operations. The indication is visible from the outside on the front of the circuit breaker. 3/24 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Remote control Remote opening and closing on Tmax circuit breaker is now possible. By means of electrical signal, the opening and closing is done either through a solenoid operator (T1, T2 and T3), a direct motor operator (Ts3) or a stored energy motor operator (T4, T5 and T6). On Tmax T7 motorized version and T8, the opening and closing command are done through coils (YO - YC) along with the spring charging motor. In order to get a complete electrically operated T7M or T8, all three of the above parts mentionned are required. Solenoid operator for T1, T2 and T3 - MOS (UL FILE: E116596) The solenoid operator allows remote circuit breaker opening and closing control and is particularly recommended for use in electric network supervision and control systems. A selector allows switching from automatic to manual operation and a block is also available (supplied as standard) for the operating mode of the motor. It is always provided with a padlock in the open position which prevents any additional commands, either locally or remotely. It operates both circuit breaker opening and closing, working directly on the circuit breaker lever. It is offered in two versions, the first is "side-by-side" with the circuit breaker for T1 and T2, for installation on a panel or DIN EN 50022 rail. The other on the "front" for T1, T2 and T3, suitable for installation directly on the front of the circuit breaker. The latter is complete with an operating handle. The front version can also be used with plug-in circuit breakers. Coupling with the residual current release is only allowed for a circuit breaker with a side-by-side solenoid operator, to allow access to the user interface of the residual current release from the front of the switchgear. In fact, using the solenoid operator superimposed would imply the circuit breaker position on the rear of the door and its residual current release and the interface would no longer be accessible. This combination can only be installed directly on the back plate of the switchgear. Both versions can be used either in the three-pole or four-pole version. The solenoid operator is supplied complete with 1m long cables and, just for the superimposed version, with a socket-plug connector with 5 poles. Both the opening and closing commands are operated by the solenoid which acts directly on the circuit breaker lever. The main parameters relative to the solenoid operator are indicated in the table. Electrical details AC [V] 110...250 DC [V] 48...60 / 110...250 Operating voltage limits [% Un] Inrush power consumption during operation 85...110% Un 1800 [VA] / 1000 [W] Power on stand-by < 100 [mW] Opening duration [s] Closing duration [s] < 0.1 [no. Operations] 25000 Mechanical life [no. Operations/h] Degree of protection, on the front Minimum control impulse time on opening and closing < 0.1 240 (T1 and T2); 120 (T3) IP30 [ms] >100 The unit is permanently supplied on stand-by, a control is applied by means of an external contact (relay, opto-insulator) in a low power circuit. Contact characteristics: V AC/DC = 24 V I AC/DC = 50 mA Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 3/25 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Direct action motor operator for Ts3 (UL file: E116596) Both the opening and closing command is controlled by the motor, which acts directly on the circuit breaker lever. The table shows the power supply voltage values Un [V]. Motor operator Ts3 Electrical details Rated voltage, Un AC DC [V] - 24 [V] - 48...60 [V] 120 125 [V] 240 250 [V] 440 - 85...110% Un 85...110% Un Inrush power absorption Ps 500 [VA] 500 [W] Service power absorption Pc 350 [VA] 350 [W] 50-60 Operating voltage limits [% Un] Operating frequency [Hz] 50-60 Time constant [ms] 18 18 [s] 0.1 0.1 [s] 0.1 0.1 Opening duration Closing duration Mechanical life [no. operations] 15000 (S3-S4) - 10000 (S5) 15000 (S3-S4) - 10000 (S5) Degree of protection, on the front Minimum duration of the opening and closing command impulse 3/26 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL [ms] IP30 IP30 150 150 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Connectors for motor operators (only for Ts3) The motor operators for Ts3 can only be supplied by means of the specific connectors. They are of the slide type and allow simultaneous connection of both the motor operator and the auxiliary contacts to the relative power supply circuit. They are an alternative to the corresponding connectors for the auxiliary contacts because they are housed in the same seat. They must be ordered specifying the size and version of the circuit breaker (fixed or plug-in/draw out). Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 3/27 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Stored energy motor operator for T4, T5 and T6 - MOE and MOE-E (UL FILE: E116596) With the stored energy motor operator, it is possible to control both opening and closing of the circuit breaker on which it is installed. During opening of the circuit breaker, the spring system is recharged automatically: the stored energy is exploited in this way to close the circuit breaker. The motor operator is always supplied with socket-plug connectors with 39.4" (1 m) long cables and is always fitted with a padlock in the open position, which prevents any command, either locally or remotely. The connectors, once inserted in the special slot on the left-hand side of the circuit breaker, extend out of the outline of the circuit breaker itself and are only compatible with pre-wired electrical accessories. A selector allows passage from automatic to manual operation and a block is also available (supplied as standard) for the operating mode of the motor. The motor operator can be fitted both with a key lock in the open position (with the same MOL-S keys for groups of circuit breakers or different MOL-D keys) and with an MOL-M key lock against manual operation: in the former case, the lock in the open position is both of electrical and mechanical type, in the latter case, only of mechanical type, i.e. only closing from the front of the circuit breaker (remote closing is allowed). In the case of interlocked circuit breakers, for safety reasons the key lock against manual operation is required. The motor operator is always fitted with a contact to signal "auto" or "manual" (not on changeover). On request, it can also be fitted with an AUX-MO auxiliary contact (on changeover), which provides a signal of its state of service: "auto" (remote control of the circuit breaker) or "manual". If the circuit breaker is fitted with the PR222DS/PD-A electronic trip unit, instead of the MOE motor operator, it is possible to use the MOE-E motor operator: for its use, the circuit breaker must also be fitted with the AUX-E auxiliary contacts (standard supply with MOE-E). The MOE-E allows use of the digital signals coming from the supervision and control system, by means of the PR222DS/PD-A and the AUX-E contacts, and to convert these into power signals to operate the motor operator. All the characteristics indicated above for the MOE motor operator are also valid for the MOE-E. The main parameters relative to the stored energy motor operator are indicated in the table. MOE and MOE-E Tmax T4-T5 Electrical details Rated voltage, Un Operating voltage Power consumption on inrush Ps Power consumption in service Pc Opening duration Closing duration Resetting duration Mechanical life Degree of protection, on the front Minimum control impulse time on opening and closing 3/28 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL [V] [V] [V] [V] [V] [% Un] [s] [s] [s] [no. Operations] [ms] Tmax T6 AC [V] - - 110...125 220...250 380 85...110 300 VA 150 VA 1.5 < 0.1 3 20000 IP30 DC [V] 24 48...60 110...125 220...250 - 85...110 300 W 150 W 1.5 < 0.1 3 20000 IP30 AC [V] - - 110...125 220...250 380 85...110 400 VA 150 VA 3 < 0.1 5 10000 IP30 DC [V] 24 48...60 110...125 220...250 - 85...110 400 W 150 W 3 < 0.1 5 10000 IP30 100 100 100 100 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Spring charging motor for T7 and T8 Only available on Tmax T7M and T8 in the stored energy version, the spring charging motor automatically charges the circuit breaker operating mechanism springs. This operation is carried out automatically immediately after closure of the circuit breaker. When there is no power supply or during maintenance work, the closing springs can, in any case, be charged manually by means of the special operating mechanism lever. It is always fitted with limit contact. The spring charging motor is always fitted with a terminal to be mounted in the terminal board to carry out the cabling. T7M Spring charging motor Tmax T7M Electrical details Rated voltage, Un Opering voltage AC [V] DC [V] AC [V] DC [V] [V] 24...30 24...30 24...30 24...30 [V] 48...60 48...60 48...60 48...60 [V] 100...130 100...130 100...130 100...130 [V] 220...250 220...250 220...250 220...250 [V] 380...415 - - - 85...110 85...110 85...110 85...110 100 VA 100 W 500 VA 500 W 8 - 10 8 - 10 4-5 4-5 [% Un] Power consumption Charging time T8 Tmax T8 [s] Note: To allow a complete remote control with T7M and T8, the circuit breaker must be fitted with: - shunt trip; - closing coil; - spring charging motor. Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 3/29 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Adapters - ADP For the SOR, PS-SOR, UVR, AUX, MOE or MOE-E and AUE pre-wired electrical accessories used with Tmax T4, T5 and T6 in the plug-in or draw out versions, it is necessary to use the adapters to be coupled with the plug, which will then be connected to the socket on the cradle. According to the electrical accessories required, one or two adapters must be mounted on the left and/or right side of the moving part. There are four adapter types available: - 5-way adapters - 6-way adapters - 10-way adapters - 12-way adapters. The table below indicates the adapters which have to be used for the various possible combinations of electrical accessories: Adapters ADP for T4, T5 and T6 wired accessories Device type 5- way 6- way 10- way 12- way SOR * UVR * MOE (MOE-E) AUE + SOR or UVR - - AUX 1Q + 1SY 1 open/closed changeover contact + 1 trip unit tripped changeover contact - AUX 2Q 2 open/closed changeover contacts AUX 3Q + 1SY 3 open/closed changeover contacts + 1 trip unit tripped changeover contact MOE (MOE-E) + SOR or UVR AUE - * - * - - - * - - - - - * * * * On the other hand, for Tmax T2 and T3 in the plug-in version it is necessary, to order the socket-plug connectors: with 12 poles for the AUX auxiliary contacts - 3 open/closed changeover + 1 release tripped changeover, with 6 poles for the AUX auxiliary contacts -1 open/ closed changeover + 1 release tripped changeover and with 3 poles for the service releases (SOR or UVR). For T2 in the plug-in version with PR221 electronic trip unit and suitable auxiliary contact, it is necessary to order a 6 and a 3 pole socketplug connector. Socket plug connectors In order to allow the racking-in and racking-out operations of the moving part of the plug-in circuit breaker, the wired and unwired electrical accessories of Tmax T2 and T3 and the unwired electrical accessories of Tmax T4, T5 and T6 must be fitted with one or more socket plug connectors, as per the table below. Socket plug connectors Device type / Breaker type 3 poles 6 poles 12 poles T2-T3-T4-T5-T6 - SOR * UVR * - - AUX 1Q +1SY 1 open/closed changeover contact + 1 trip unit tripped changeover contact - * - AUX 2Q 2 open/closed changeover contacts - * - AUX 3Q + 1SY 3 open/closed changeover contacts + 1 trip unit tripped changeover contact - - * - - MOS overload(1) * AUE * - - AUX 2Q + 1SY for PR221 2 open/closed contacts + 1 trip unit tripped changeover contact * * - AUX 1S51 + 1Q + 1SY for PR221 1 changeover contact + 1 SA electronic release trip contact + 1 trip unit tripped changeover contact * * - T2-T3 (1) Always provided with the overlaid solenoid operator 3/30 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Operating mechanism and locks Operating mechanism are often used to switch a breaker on or off using an external device such as a rotary handle or a flange handle. Locks are used to prevent any closing or opening of the circuit breaker by means of key locks or padlock provision. Operating mechanisms are available for Tmax T1 up to T7 and locks are available for T1 up to T8. Rotary handle operating mechanism - RHD/RHE (UL FILE: E116596) Thanks to its ergonomic grip, the rotary handle facilitates the circuit breaker closing and opening operations. It is always fitted with a padlock-lock in the open position which prevents circuit breaker closing. The opening in the padlock-lock can take up to 3 padlocks - O 0.27" (7 mm) stem (not supplied), 0.24" (6 mm) only for Ts3 (not supplied). It is always (except for Ts3) fitted with a compartment door lock and on request it can be supplied with a key lock in the open position. On request, the Ts3 can be supplied with a compartment door lock or key lock in the open position. Application of the rotary handle operating mechanism is an alternative to the motor operator and to the front interlocking plate (MIF) for T1, T2 and T3, or to the motor operator and to the front for lever operating mechanism for Ts3, T4, T5 and T6. The rotary handle operating mechanism is available in either the direct mount or variable depth version on the compartment door. The rotary handle operating mechanism in the emergency version, complete with a red on yellow background handle, suitable for controlling machine tools, is available in both the versions. The rotary handle operating mechanism is available on T7 with lever operating mechanism and, only for the direct mount version, is characterised by an articulated grip which allows the switchgear door to be opened in case of an emergency with the circuit breaker closed. The release settings and nameplate data remain accessible to the user. The variable depth rotary handle operating mechanisms can be ordered by building up the following three devices: - rotary handle on the compartment door - shaft (19.68"/500 mm) - base for circuit breaker or, alternatively, by using the code of the ready-configured version. Type of RH_ operating mechanism Device type T1 T2, T3 Ts3 T4, T5 T7(1) T6 F F P F P W F P W F W F W RHD Direct mounted * * * * * * * * * * * * * RHD_EM Emergency direct * * * * * * * * * * * * * RHE Transmitted with adjustable distance * * * * * * * * * * * * * - * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * RHE_EM Emergency transmitted with adjustable distance * * * * * RHE_B Base for circuit breaker * * * - - RHE_S Shaft for variable depth handle * * * * * RHE_H Handle for transmitted RH with variable depth * * * RHE_H_EM Emergency handle for transmitted RH with variable depth * * * - - (1) The rotary handle operating mechanism is only available for T7 with lever operating mechanism and it is as an alterative to the key lock mounted on the circuit breaker. Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 3/31 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Cable operated flange handle T1 -T5 Cable operated flange handles are now available for Tmax T1-T5. Available with 2 handle types and 7different cable lenghts for a maximum flexibility. A complete kit is necessary. The kit is composed as 1 handle, 1 cable and 1 operating mechanism. Located on the side of the enclosure, this flange handle will open or close the circuit breaker with the help of the cable and the mechanism. The handle is available as NEMA 1, 3R, 12 grey painted and also as NEMA 4, 4X nickel coated. The IP54 protection for rotary handle (UL FILE: E116596) Allows IP54 degree of protection to be obtained. It is available for the transmitted rotary handle operating mechanism on the compartment door (RHE) for all the Tmax circuit breakers. Front for lever operating mechanism - FLD (UL FILE: E116596) This can be installed on fixed, plug-in or draw out Tmax Ts3, T4, T5 and T6 circuit breakers. In the case of draw out circuit breakers, installed in a switchboard, it allows the IP40 degree of protection to be maintained for the whole isolation run of the circuit breaker. It is always fitted with a padlock in the open position O 0.24" (6 mm) stem up to three padlocks (not supplied) which prevents closing of the circuit breaker and of the compartment door, and with compartment door lock. On request, it can be fitted with a key lock in the open position. It is available in the following versions: - for fixed or plug-in circuit breaker - for draw out circuit breaker. The front for lever operating mechanism is always an alternative to the motor operator and to the rotary handle and to the display FDU. The same flange for the compartment door already supplied with the circuit breaker or the one supplied with the conversion kit for draw out (except for Ts3) version can be used. Padlock for operating lever - PLL T1-T3 This is applied to the T1 - T2 - T3 circuit breaker cover to prevent the lever closing or opening operation. It allows installation up to a maximum of three padlocks O 0.24" (7 mm) stem (not supplied). It is available in the following versions: - plug-in locking device only of the closing operation - locking plate on the closing and opening operation according to the assembly position. The lock on the opening operation does not prevent release of the mechanism following a fault or remote control command - locking plate just for the closing operation. It is incompatible with the front accessories: solenoid operator, rotary handle operating mechanism and mechanic interlock. The padlock is also available for T7 and it is directly mounted on the circuit breaker cover. T1-T3 3/32 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Key lock on the circuit breaker for T1, T2, T3 and T7, T8 - KLC This allows the mechanical closing operation of the circuit breaker to be locked and is installed directly on the front in the slot in correspondence with the left pole. This cannot be installed when the front operating mechanism, rotary handle operating mechanism or stored energy motor operator are present, or on the three-pole circuit breakers equipped with service releases (UVR, SOR). The key lock is the Ronis 622 type and is available in two versions: - standard type, with key only removable with the circuit breaker locked - special type, with key removable in both positions. On T7 and T8, the key lock in the open position is mounted directly on the circuit breaker cover both in the version with different keys and with the same keys. Presettings for Ronis and Profalux key locks are also available. Key lock for rotary handle operating mechanism for T1, T2 and T3 - RHL This allows the mechanical closing operation of the circuit breaker to be locked. The following versions are available: - lock with a different key for each circuit breaker - lock with the same key for groups of circuit breakers. The circuit breaker in the open position ensures isolation of the circuit in accordance to the IEC 60947-2 Standard. It is also available in the version which allows the lock both in the open and closed position. The lock in the closed position does not prevent release of the mechanism following a fault or remote control. Key lock for Ts3, T4, T5, T6 and T7, T8 - KLF-D and KLF-S This allows mechanical operation of the circuit breaker to be locked. This lock can be used with the direct or transmitted rotary handle operating mechanism mounted on the base for circuit breaker or with the front for lever operating mechanism. The lock of the circuit breaker in the open position ensures isolation of the circuit in accordance with the IEC 60947-2 Standard. For Ts3 different locks are supplied for the direct action motor operator, for stored energy motor operator, for rotary handle or front for lever operating mechanism. For T4, T5, T6 and T7 in the lever operating mechanism version key locks in the open position are available either with different keys (KLF-D) or with the same keys (KLF-S): in this case, up to four different key numbering codes are available (n. 2005-2006-2007-2008). Lock in the racked-out position for cradle (Ts3, T4, T5 and T6) For Ts3, T4, T5 and T6 draw out circuit breakers, key or padlocks locks are available to be applied onto the rail of the cradle, to prevent racking-in of the plug-in part. Selection can be made among the following: - key lock with different keys (KLF-D FP) - key lock with the same keys for groups of circuit breakers (KLF-S FP) - Ronis type key lock (KLF-D Ronis FP) - padlock, which can take up to three padlocks with O 0.24" (6 mm) stem, not supplied (PLL FP). Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 3/33 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Lock in racked-in - isolated - racked-out position for cradle of T7 This device allows the moving part of a draw out T7 circuit breaker to be locked in the racked-in, isolatedtest or racked-out position in the relative cradle. Thanks to mounting an additional accessory, the lock can be limited just to the racked-out position. The cradle can be equipped with 1 or 2 of these key locks. Mechanical lock of compartment door A mechanical lock of compartment door available on Ts3 and T7 for both the lever operating mechanism and for the motorizable version. It does not allow the compartment door to be opened with the circuit breaker closed (and circuit breaker racked-in for circuit breakers in the draw out version) and locks the circuit breaker closing with the compartment door open. For Ts3 circuit breakers, it consists of two elements: one applied to the rotary handle operating mechanism or to the front for the lever operating mechanism, the other consisting of a metal striker to be applied onto the compartment door. For T7 two versions are available: a door lock made by means of cables and a second type fixed directly on the side of the circuit breaker or of the relative cradle. The cable door lock must also be fitted with the interlock cable kit and the interlocking plate corresponding to the combined circuit breaker. Sealable thermal adjustment lock This is applied to the circuit breaker cover near the thermal element regulator of the TMD thermomagnetic trip unit for T1, T2, T3 and Ts3 and prevents it being tampered with. Overview of the available locks Lock type T1 T2 T3 Ts3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 FDL Front for lever operating mechanism - - - * * * * - PLL_ Padlock for operating lever * * * - - - - * - * * * - - KLC_ Key lock on the circuit breaker * * * RHL Keylock for rotary handle operating mechanism * * * KLF-D and KLF-S Key lock for front for lever and rotary handle - - * * * - * * * * * * * * * * * Mechanical lock on compartment door - * * * * * - - * Sealable lock of thermal adjustment - - MOL-D and MOL-S_ Key lock in open position for MOE and MOE_E MOL-M_ Key lock against manual operation for MOE and MOE_E KLF-FP and PLL FP_ Locks in open position for cradle 3/34 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL - Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Mechanical interlock (UL FILE: E116596) T1-T2-T3 The mechanical MIF interlock can be applied on the front of two T1, T2 or T3 circuit breakers mounted side by side, in either the three-pole or four-pole fixed version and prevents simultaneous closing of the two circuit breakers. Fixing is carried out directly on the back plate of the switchboard. The front interlocking plate allows installation of a padlock in order to fix the position (possibility of locking in the O-O position as well). It is also possible to interlock three circuit breakers side by side, using the proper plate, thereby making the following interlock combinations: IOO-OIOOOI-OOO. It is incompatible with the front accessories (solenoid operator, rotary handle operating mechanism) and with the residual current releases. T1-T2-T3 T3 For T3, in the three-pole or four-pole fixed or plug-in version, the MIR mechanical interlock is available. This rear interlock, available in the horizontal (MIR-H) and vertical (MIR-V) version, is compatible with all the front accessories and with the residual current release (only MIR-H). The following interlocking combinations can be made: IO-OI-OO. T3-T4-T5-T6 Ts3 For Ts3 circuit breakers the (rear) mechanical interlock allows installation of two circuit breakers in a single support and, by means of a walking beam mechanism, makes them mechanically interdependent. It prevents operation in parallel of two power supply sources (eg. normal-emergency). It consists of a kit with levers and assembly accessories and a metallic support. The mechanical interlock is available in the version for side-by-side circuit breakers and for superimposed circuit breakers. Only circuit breakers of the same size and in the same version can be interlocked. T4-T5-T6 The mechanical interlock for T4, T5 and T6 allows installation of two circuit breakers on a single support and, by means of special lever mechanisms, makes them mechanically interdependent. For Tmax T4 and T5 this is a rear interlock consisting of a vertical or horizontal frame group (MIR-HR or MIR-VR) and of a pair of metal plates for fixing the circuit breakers (MIR-P). The frame group is made up of metal frame and of the lever mechanism interlock. The metal plates are of different type according to the sizes of the circuit breakers to be interlocked. For Tmax T6 this is a rear interlock consisting of a vertical or horizontal support. Possible interlock combinations Type Breaker 1 + Breaker 2 A T4 (F-P-W) + T4 (F-P-W) B T4 (F-P-W) + T5 400 (F-P-W) o T5 630 (F) C T4 (F-P-W) + T5 630 (P-W) D T5 400 (F-P-W) o T5 630 (F) + T5 400 (F-P-W) o T5 630 (F) E T5 400 (F-P-W) o T5 630 (F) + T5 630 (P-W) F T5 630 (P-W) + T5 630 (P-W) There are no limitations on the versions to be interlocked, therefore, for example, a fixed circuit breaker can be interlocked with a draw out version switch-disconnector. Since this is a rear interlock, all the front accessories which are compatible with the circuit breakers can be used. In the vertical interlock the bottom terminals of the upper circuit breaker and the top terminals of the lower circuit breaker must be of rear type. Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 3/35 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories T7 This mechanism makes the mechanical interlock between two T7 circuit breakers by means of flexible cables, which are connected on a plate mounted on the side of the circuit breaker preventing simultaneous closing of the two circuit breakers. The plates to be mounted on the circuit breaker differ according to whether the circuit breaker is in the fixed or draw out version. The interlock is available both for the manual operating mechanism version and for the motor operator one. Transparent pushbutton protection - TCP A transparent protection for the circuit breaker opening and closing pushbuttons is available in two different versions on T7 and T8 with stored energy operating mechanism: one which protects both the pushbuttons and the other which alternatively protects either the opening or the closing pushbutton. There is the possibility of putting a padlock, which adds the lock function to the protection. In the closed position this lock does not prevent release of the mechanism following a fault or a remote command. IP54 door protection Available with T7 motorizable and T8, it is made by means of a transparent plastic cover which completely protects the front of the circuit breaker and allows IP54 degree of protection to be reached. Mounted on hinges, it is provided with a key lock. 3/36 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Front display unit - FDU The front display is a display unit of the setting currents, alarms and parameters of the PR222DS/P and PR222DS/PD-A electronic trip units of T4, T5 and T6. The display unit can operate correctly with selfsupply with I 0.35 x In on at least one phase. If the display is used in combination with the PR222DS/PD-A trip unit, and therefore with an auxiliary power supply, it is also possible to detect the protection which has caused the release trip and the fault current. It is not compatible with the front accessories: rotary handle operating mechanism, motor operator and front for lever operating mechanism. HMI030 interface on the front of switchgear This accessory, which can be used with all the protection trip units fitted with dialogue, is designed for installation on the front of the switchgear. It consists of a graphic display where all the trip unit measurements and alarms/events are displayed. The user can navigate in a simple and intuitive way among the measurements by using the navigation pushbuttons. The device can replace the traditional multimeters without the need for current/voltage transformers. The HMI030 is connected directly to the protection trip unit by means of a serial line and requires a 24 V DC power supply. Optional modules The PR332/P trip unit for T7 and T8 can be enriched with additional internal modules, thereby increasing the capacity of the trip units and making these units highly versatile. PR330/V voltage measuring module This optional internal module can be added to PR332/P. It measures and processes the phase and neutral voltages, transferring this data to the protection trip unit so that a series of protection and measurement functions can be implemented. It can be connected to the PR332/P at any time and the latter recognises it automatically without having to be configured. PR330/V module, when ordered mounted on the circuit breaker, does not require any external connection or voltage transformers since it is connected internally to the upper terminals of Tmax T7 and T8 (selector in "INT" position) though the internal voltage sockets. At the ordering stage, the code of the internal voltage socket can be specified in addition to the code of the T7 or T8 circuit breaker so as to guarantee the possibility to install even afterwards the PR332/P trip unit equipped with the PR330/V module connected internally to the upper terminals. If necessary, the connection of the voltage sockets can be moved externally with connection to the terminal board using voltage transformers connected to the top or bottom terminals. On the PR330/V module there is a selector which defines the method of wiring implemented to detect the voltage measurements (INT = connection of the internal module towards the top terminals - EXT = connection to the terminal box). The "Insulating Test" position guarantees carrying out the dielectric test. A "Power Line" LED indicates presence of the line voltage. PR330/D-M communication module (Modbus RTU) The PR330/D-M communication module is the solution for connecting Tmax to a Modbus network for remote supervision and control of the circuit breaker. It is suitable for the PR332/P trip unit for T7 or T8. As for the PR330/V, this module can be added to the protection trip unit and its presence is recognised automatically. The electronic trip unit is supplied with three LEDs on the front: - "Power" power supply LED, which indicates the presence of auxiliary power supply to the PR333/ D-M module - "Tx" data transmission LED - "Rx" data reception LED. Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 3/37 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories PR330/R - Actuator module The PR330/R actuator module is fitted in the right slot of T7 and it is used for opening (for T7 with lever operating mechanism it is allowed only the opening operation), and closing the circuit breaker by means of the shunt opening and closing releases by remote control. It is suitable for the PR332/P and must be compulsory ordered with the PR330/D-M communication module. BT030 wireless communication unit BT030 is a device to be connected to the Test connector of PR222DS, PR232/P, PR331/P and PR332/P. It allows Bluetooth communication between the protection trip unit and a hand-held or laptop PC with a Bluetooth port. BT030 can also be used with Emax circuit breakers fitted with PR121/P, PR122/P and PR123/P. This device is dedicated for use with the SD-Pocket und SD-TestBus2 application. BT030 can provide the power supply needed for self-supply and for the protection release by means of a rechargeable Li-ion battery. PR030/B power supply unit With this accessory, which is always supplied with the PR332/P range of trip units, it is possible to read and configure the parameters of the unit whatever the state of the circuit breaker is (open-closed, in the isolated for test position or racked-in, with/without auxiliary power supply). PR030/B is needed for the readout of the data relative to trips if the trip occurred more than 48 hours previously and the trip unit was no longer supplied. An electronic circuit inside allows power supply to the unit for about 3 hours continuously to carry out just the data reading and configuration operations. The life of the battery decreases if the SACE PR030/B is also used to carry out the Trip test and the Auto test. Trip unit adapter In order to allow all the connections between the electronic trip unit type PR33x and the terminal board on the circuit breaker, the circuit breaker it self must be fitted with a trip unit adapter. Two different trip unit adapters are available: one is suitable with T7 level operating mechanism, the other with T7 motorizable. Rating plug Available on the electronic trip units which can be mounted on T7, the rating plug must be applied on the front of the trip unit itself and provides information about the current sensor settings. It is therefore no longer necessary to change the circuit breaker current sensors, but is sufficient just to replace the rating plug to obtain modification of the rated current of the circuit breaker. Type of circuit breaker T7 T8 400 600 800 1000 1000 * * * * 1200 * * * * * 1600 - 1600 - - - * * * * * * * 2500 - * * * * * * * * * * 2000 2500 3000 3/38 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL In (A) 1200 - Rated current Iu 2000 - 3000 * Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Current sensor for external neutral This is applied to the external neutral conductor and allows protection G against earth faults to be carried out with external neutral three-pole circuit breakers. The current sensor must be connected to the trip unit by means of the specific connectors X4 for T4, T5 and T6 or with a direct connection in the terminal board for T7 and T8. The combination is not possible with electronic trip unit PR221, PR231 and PR232. T4 [A] T5 [A] T6 [A] T7 [A] 100 300 600 400 T8 [A] 1000 150 400 800 600 1200 250 600 - 800 1600 - - - 1000 2000 - - - 1200 2500 - - - - 3000 Connectors Connectors X3 and X4 allow connection of the electronic trip units with external plant units or components. In fact, they are used to make the L alarm signal available outside, connection of the external neutral and allows two-way communication from the circuit breaker fitted with dialogue towards the outside and vice versa. Both the connectors are available both for fixed version circuit breakers and for plug-in or draw out version circuit breakers. Connector X3 X4 Function Trip unit PR021/K PR222DS/PD-A L alarm signal PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD-A Auxiliary supply PR222DS/PD-A EP 010 PR222DS/PD-A External neutral PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD-A Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 3/39 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Accessories for trip units Circuit breakers equipped with electronic trip units T2-T4-T5-T6 (2) FDU - Front display unit HMI030(1) - Interface on the front of switchgear X3 - Connectors X4 - Connectors BT030 - Wireless communication unit MOE-E (AUX-E included)(2) - Motor operator AUX-E - Auxiliary contacts EP010(1) - Field Bus plug CT - Current transformers Rating plugs PR030/B - Power supply unit PR330/D-M - Communication module PR330/V - Voltage measuring module PR330/R - Actuator module CT Sensor - Current sensors 1) (2) (3) Accessories not compatible Accessories not compatible Compulsory 3/40 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL T4-T5-T6 PR221 PR222DS/P - T7 - T8 PR222DS/PD-A PR231/P PR232/P * * - * * * (3) * * - - * * - * * * - - * * PR331/P PR332/P - - * * - - * * * - - - * * * - * * * - - * * * * * * * Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Bracket for fixing on DIN rail This is applied to the fixed circuit breaker and allows installation: - on standardized DIN EN 50022 rails (for T1, T2, T3); - on standardized DIN EN 50023 rails (for Ts3). The bracket for fixing on DIN rail is also available for Tmax circuit breakers combined with RC221 and RC222 residual current releases or with the solenoid operator of the side-by side type. The fixing bracket kit for Ts3 circuit breakers also includes the front H = 1.77'' (45 mm). Flange for compartment door For Ts3 circuit breakers it is possible to use the same flange (to be ordered), which can be used with the circuit breaker (to be ordered separately), with the rotary handle operating mechanism, front for lever operating mechanism and motor operator. All the flanges for T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7 and T8 are of new design and do not require the use of screws for installation: fixing is greatly simplified by just a simple coupling operation. The flange for compartment door for T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7 and T8 is always supplied with the circuit breakers. When a rotary handle operating mechanism or residual current releases is used, a dedicated flange is supplied to be used instead of the one supplied with the circuit breaker. For T4, T5, T6 and T7 draw out circuit breakers, the flange supplied with fixed part must be used instead of the one supplied with the fixed circuit breaker. Spare parts A wide range of spare parts is available for the Tmax family of circuit breakers. For further details about the complete range of spare parts available, please ask for the "Spare Parts Catalogue". Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 3/41 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical and mechanical accessories Compatibility An overview of the assembly compatibility of (internal) accessories with the Tmax Series circuit breakers can be found in this section. Possible combination of internal accessories The drawing represents the internal slot of the circuit breakers. A, C and F are housed in the slots on the left of the operating lever, while B, D, E and G in the right one. E A/C(1) B T1, T2 TMD, T3, Ts3, T4, T5, T6 3 poles A A(2)/C B T1, T2 TMD, T3, Ts3, T4, T5, T6 4 poles B A/C D T2 PR221DS, 3 poles B G A(4) A(3) T7 3/4 poles F A(4) A(3) T7M 3/4 poles (1) only for T1-T2-T3 only SOR for T4-T5-T6. If use SOR-C order also the 3 way connector for second SOR-C 1SDA055273R1 position for assembly of the SOR (4) position for assembly of the UVR (2) (3) A B C D E F G = = = = = = = Shunt trip (SOR) or Undervoltage release (UVR) Auxiliary contacts Trip coil of the residual current Trip coil of the electronic trip unit PR221DS Auxiliary contacts for T2 with electronic trip unit PR221DS Spring charging motor Closing coil (SCR) 3/42 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL E A C T2 PR221DS, 4 poles D Table of contents Curves and technical information Characteristic curves Examples of curve readout 4/2 Trip curves for power distribution Circuit breakers with thermal-magnetic trip units Circuit breakers with electronic trip units 4/3 4/7 Trip curves for motor protection (MCP) Circuit breakers with magnetic only trip units Circuit breakers with electronic trip units 4/17 4/18 Specific let-through energy curves (current limiting) T2H 4/19 T4H - T4V 4/20 T5H - T5V 400 4/21 T8V 4/21 Limitation curves (current limiting) T2H T4H - T4V T5H - T5V 400 T8V 4/22 4/23 4/24 4/24 Temperature performances Circuit breakers with electronic trip units Circuit breakers with thermal-magnetic trip units 4/25 4/26 Power losses Power losses 4/28 Special application Wiring possibilities in DC application 4/30 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 4/1 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information Examples of curve readout Example 1 - T4N 250 A t [s] 104 Trip curves for power distribution (thermal magnetic trip unit) 103 ~357.8 Considering a T4N 250 In = 250 A circuit breaker. By means of the thermal adjustment trimmer, the current threshold I1 is selected, for example at 0.9 x In (225 A); the magnetic trip threshold I3, adjustable from 5 to 10 x In, we select at 10 x In, equal to 2500 A. It can be noted that, on the basis of the conditions in which the overload is presented, i.e. with the circuit breaker at thermal running or not, the thermal relay trip varies considerably. For example, for an overload current of 2 x I1, the trip time is between 21.4 and 105.3 s for hot trip, and between 105.3 and 357.8 s for cold trip. For fault current values higher than 2500 A, the circuit breaker trips instantaneously with the magnetic protection. ~105.3 102 ~21.4 10 2 x I1 1 10-1 10-2 10-1 Example 2 - T2H 100 A 10 1 102 x I1 Ip [kA] 02 Current-limiting curves The following figure shows the trend of Tmax T2 100 PR221 current-limiting curve at 480 V. The rms of the prospective symmetrical short circuit current is indicated on the abscissa of the diagram, whereas the peak value is on the ordinates. For example, T2 at a voltage of 480 V limits the peak to 20 kA for a rms fault current of 40 kA. 10 1 1 Example 3 - T2H 30 A 10 102 Irms [kA] 10 102 Irms [kA] I2t [106 A2s] 02 Specific let-through energy curve The following figure shows the trend of Tmax T2 TM 30 A let-through energy at 480 V. The rms of the prospective symmetrical short circuit current is indicated on the abscissa of the diagram, whereas the ordinates show the specific let-through energy. For example, T2 at a voltage of 480 V limits the I2t to 0,4x10^6 A^2s for a rms sc current of 40 kA. Abbreviations used In = Ampere rating of the thermal magnetic or electronic trip unit I1 = Long-time pick-up setting I3 = instantaneous pick up setting Irms = prospective symmetrical short-circuit current 4/2 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 10 1 1 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information Trip curves for power distribution Circuit breakers with thermal magnetic trip units T1 100 / T1 100 1P - TMF T1 100 / T1 100 1P - TMF In = 15 - 70 A In = 80 - 100 A t [s] t [s] 104 104 103 103 102 102 10 10 1 1 10-1 10-1 40A 60A 30A 70A 50A 90A 20A 25A 100A 15A 10-2 10-1 1 10 102 x I1 80A 10-2 10-1 T2 100 - TMF T2 100 - TMF In = 15 - 50 A In = 60 - 100 A 1 10 102 x I1 1 10 102 x I1 t [s] t [s] 104 104 103 103 102 102 10 10 1 1 10-1 10-1 40A 50A 30A 35A 25A 20A 15A 10-2 10-2 10-1 1 10 102 x I1 10-1 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 4/3 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information T3 225 - TMF T3 225 - TMF In = 60 - 100 A In = 125 - 225 A t [s] t [s] 104 104 103 103 102 102 10 10 1 1 125/225A 60/100A 10-1 10-1 10-2 10-2 10-1 1 10 10-1 102 x I1 Ts3 150 - TMF Ts3 150 - TMF In = 15 A In = 20 - 30 A t [s] 1 10 102 x I1 t [s] 104 104 103 103 102 102 10 10 1 1 10-1 10-1 15A 20A 30A 25A 10-2 10-1 10-2 1 10 4/4 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 102 x In 10-1 1 10 102 x In Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information Ts3 150 - TMF Ts3 150 - TMF In = 35 - 50 A In = 60 - 100 A t [s] t [s] 104 104 103 103 102 102 10 10 1 1 35A 60/100A 10-1 10-1 40A 50A 10-2 10-1 10-2 1 10 10-1 102 x In 10 1 Ts3 150 / Ts3 225 - TMF T4 250 - TMF/TMD In = 125 - 225 A In = 20 - 50 A In = 15 - 20 TMF t [s] 102 x In In = 30 - 50 TMD t [s] 104 104 103 103 102 102 10 10 1 1 125/225A 10-1 10-1 In=15A In=20A In=30A In=40A In=50A I3=500A I3=500A I3=500A I3=500A I3=500A 10-2 10-2 10-1 1 10 102 x In 10-1 1 10 102 x I1 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 4/5 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information T4 250 - TMA T5 400 - TMA In = 80 - 250 A In = 300 - 400 A t [s] t [s] 104 104 103 103 102 102 10 10 1 1 10-1 10-1 I3=5...10 x In I3=5...10 x In 10-2 10-2 10-1 10 1 102 x I1 T6 800 - TMA In = 800 A t [s] 104 103 102 10 1 10-1 I3 = 5...10 x In 10-2 10-1 1 1.05 10 4/6 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 102 x I1 10-1 1 10 102 x I1 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information Trip curves for power distribution Circuit breakers with thermal magnetic trip units T2 100 - PR221DS-LS T2 100 - PR221DS-LS L-I Functions L-S Functions Up to In = 10 A Up to In = 10 A T2 100 - PR221DS-I T4 250 / T5 400/600 - PR221DS I Function L-I Functions Note: For T5 In = 600 A I3max = 9.5 x In Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 4/7 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information T4 250 / T5 400/600 - PR221DS L-S Functions T4 250 / T5 400/600 PR222DS/P and PR222DS/PD-A Note: For T5 In = 600 A I2max = 9.5 x In L-S-I Functions (I2t const = ON) Note: For T5 In = 600 A I2max = 9.5 x In, I3max = 9.5 x In T4 250 / T5 400/600 PR222DS/P and PR222DS/PD-A T4 250 / T5 400/600 PR222DS/P and PR222DS/PD-A L-S-I Functions (I2t const = OFF) G Function Note: For T5 In = 600 A I2max = 9.5 x In, I3max = 9.5 x In I4=0.2...0.49 x In inhibition at 4 x In I4=0.5...0.79 x In inhibition at 6 x In I4=0.8...1.00 x In inhibition at 8 x In 4/8 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information T6 800 - PR221DS T6 800 - PR221DS L-I Functions L-S Functions t [s] t [s] 104 104 0.4...1 0.4...1 1 0.4 1 0.4 1 1 103 103 1...10 1...10 102 102 10 10 10 10 102 102 1 1 10-1 10-1 10-2 10-2 T6 800 T6 800 10-3 10-3 10-1 10 1 1 x In 10-1 10 I [kA] 10 1 1 x In T6 800 - PR222DS and PR222DS/PD-A T6 800 - PR222DS and PR222DS/PD-A L-S-I Functions G Function t [s] 10 I [kA] t [s] 104 104 0.2...1 0.4...1 1 0.4 0.2 1 103 103 0.6...10 10 0.6 102 102 1.5...12 1.5 12 I2t ON 10 10 102 1 1 ))NDISABLEDAT)N ))NDISABLEDAT)N ))NDISABLEDAT)N I2t OFF 10-1 10-1 10-2 10-2 T6 800 10-3 10-3 10-1 1 10 1 x In 10 I [kA] 10-1 1 10 10 2 In Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 4/9 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information T7 1000/1200 - PR231/P T7 1000/1200 - PR231/P L-I Functions L-S Functions t [s] t [s] 104 104 0,4...1 0.4...1 1 0,4 1 0.4 103 103 1...10 1 10 102 102 1 10 1...10 10 10 I2t = k 102 102 1 1 10-1 10-1 T7 S,H,L T7 S,H,L T7 S,H,L 10-2 10-2 T7 V 10-3 10-3 10-1 10 1 10-1 102 I [kA] 10 x In 10 1 T7 1000/1200 - PR232/P T7 1000/1200 - PR331/P L-S-I Functions L-S-I Functions t [s] 102 I [kA] 10 x In t [s] 104 104 0.4...1 0,4...1 0.4 1 0,4 103 103 0,6...10 0.6...10 10 0,6 1,5 10 0.6 1,5...12 102 1 3...144 102 12 2 t = k/I 1.5 1.5...15 15 10 10 t = k/I2 102 102 t=k 1 1 10-1 10-1 t=k T7 S,H,L T7 S,H,L 10-2 10-2 10-3 10-3 10-1 1 10 x In 10 4/10 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 102 I [kA] 10-1 1 10 10 x In 102 I [kA] Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information T7 1000/1200 - PR331/P T7 1000/1200 - PR332/P G Function L-I Functions t [s] t [s] 104 104 0.2...1 0.4...1 1 0.2 1 0.4 103 103 102 102 3...144 1.5...15 1.5 10 15 10 102 t = k/I2 1 1 ) )NDISABLEDAT)N ))NDISABLEDAT)N ) )NDISABLEDAT)N 10-1 10-1 T7 S,H,L t=k 10-2 10-2 10-3 10-3 10-1 10 2 I [kA] 10 1 10-1 10 1 T7 1000/1200 - PR332/P T7 1000/1200 - PR332/P L-S-I Functions G Function 10 x In 102 I [kA] t [s] t [s] 104 104 0.4...1 0.2...1 1 0.4 0.2 103 1 103 0.6...10 0.6 10 3...144 102 102 1.5 15 1.5...15 10 10 t = k/I2 t = k/I2 102 1 1 ))NDISABLEDAT)N ))NDISABLEDAT)N ))NDISABLEDAT)N t=k 10-1 10-1 T7 t=k 10-2 10-2 10-3 10-3 10-1 1 10 10 x In 102 I [kA] 10-1 1 10 10 2 I [kA] Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 4/11 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information T7 1000/1200 - PR332/P T7 1000/1200 - PR332/P Rc Function L Function t [s] t [s] 104 104 0.4 0.2...30 0.4...1 1 30 0.2 103 103 102 102 10 3...144 1 10 10-1 1 10-2 10-1 10-3 10-1 10 1 10 2 I [kA] 10-1 1 T7 1000/1200 - PR332/P T7 1000/1200 - PR332/P L Function L Function t [s] 10 10 2 x In 10 10 2 x In t [s] 104 0.4 0.4...1 104 1 103 0.4 0.4...1 1 103 102 3...144 102 3...144 10 10 1 1 10-1 10-1 10-1 1 10 4/12 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 10 2 x In 10-1 1 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information T7 1000/1200 - PR332/P T7 1000/1200 - PR332/P with PR330/V U Function UV Function 2% 90% 2...90% UV 6 0.5...6 0.1....5 0.5 T7 1000/1200 - PR332/P with PR330/V T7 1000/1200 - PR332/P with PR330/V OV Function RV Function OV RV 0.1....5 0.5...30 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 4/13 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information T7 1000/1200 - PR332/P with PR330/V T8 1600/2000/2500/3000 - PR331/P RP Function Functions L-S-I Note: For T8 In = 3000 A I3max = 12 x In t [s] 104 0.4...1 0.4 1 103 0.6...10 10 0.6 3...144 102 RP 1.5...15 1.5 15 10 t = k/I2 102 1 t=k 10-1 0.5...25 T7 S,H,L T7 V 10-2 10-3 10-1 10 1 102 I [kA] 10 x In T8 1600/2000/2500/3000 - PR331/P T8 1600/2000/2500/3000 - PR332/P Function G L-I Functions Note: For T8 In = 3000 A I3max = 12 x In t [s] t [s] 104 104 0.2...1 0.4...1 1 0.2 1 0.4 103 103 102 102 3...144 1.5 10 1.5...15 15 10 102 t = k/I2 1 1 I4 = 0.2-0.3-0.4 In disabled at 4 In I4 = 0.6 In disabled at 6 In I4 = 0.8-0.9-1 In disabled at 8 In 10-1 10-1 T7 S,H,L t=k 10-2 10-2 10-3 T7 V 10-3 10-1 1 10 4/14 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 10 2 I [kA] 10-1 1 10 10 x In 102 I [kA] Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information T8 1600/2000/2500/3000 - PR332/P T8 1600/2000/2500/3000 - PR332/P L-S-I Functions G Function Note: For T8 In = 3000 A I3max = 12 x In t [s] t [s] 104 104 0.4...1 0.2...1 1 0.4 0.2 103 1 103 0.6...10 0.6 10 3...144 102 102 1.5 15 1.5...15 10 10 t = k/I2 t = k/I2 102 1 1 I4 = 0.2...0.48 In inhibicion a 4 In I4 = 0.5...0.78 In inhibicion a 6 In I4 = 0.8...1.00 In inhibicion a 8 In t=k 10-1 10-1 T7 10-2 t=k T7 V 10-2 10-3 10-3 10-1 10 1 102 I [kA] 10 x In 10-1 1 10 2 I [kA] 10 T8 1600/2000/2500/3000 - PR332/P T8 1600/2000/2500/3000 PR332/P + PR330/V U Function UV Function 2% 90% 2...90% UV 6 0.5...6 0.1....5 0.5 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 4/15 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information T8 1600/2000/2500/3000 PR332/P + PR330/V T8 1600/2000/2500/3000 PR332/P + PR330/V OV Function RV Function OV RV 0.1....5 0.5...30 T8 1600/2000/2500/3000 PR332/P + PR330/V RP Function RP 0.5...25 4/16 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information Trip curves for motor protection (MCP) Circuit breakers with magnetic only trip units T2-T3 100 MCP Ts3 150 Adjustable magnetic only trip unit I3 = 6...12 x In Adjustable magnetic only trip unit I3 = 4...12 x In t [s] 104 103 102 10 1 10-1 4 12 10-2 10-3 10-1 1 10 102 x In Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 4/17 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information Trip curves for motor protection (MCP) Circuit breakers with electronic trip units T2 100 - PR221DS-I T4 250 / T5 400/600 - PR221DS-I I Function I Function Overload limit T4 320 - T5 630 Overload limit Overload limit T4 250 - T5 400 T6 800 - PR221DS-I T7 1000/1200 - PR231/P-I I Function I Function t [s] t [s] 104 104 1 103 103 Overload limit T6 800 Overload limit 102 102 10 10 1...10 10 1 12 102 102 1 1 10-1 10-1 10-2 10-2 T6 800 10-3 10-3 10-1 1 10 1 x In 4/18 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 10 I [kA] 10-1 1 10 x In 10 102 I [kA] Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information Specific let-through energy curves (current limiting circuit breakers and T8) T2H PR221 100A T2H TM 100A 480 V 480 V I2t [106 A2s] 10 I2t [106 A2s] 10 1 1 10-1 10-1 1 10 1 102 Irms [kA] T2H TM 50A T2H TM 30A 480 V 480 V I2t [106 A2s] 10 10 102 Irms [kA] 10 102 Irms [kA] I2t [106 A2s] 10 1 1 10-1 10-1 1 10 102 Irms [kA] 1 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 4/19 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information T2H TM 15A T4H/V 480 V 480 V I2t [106 A2s] 10 I2t [106 A2s] 10 1 1 10-1 10-1 1 10 10 102 Irms [kA] T4H/V T5H/V 400 600 V 480 V I2t [106 A2s] 10 102 103 Irms [kA] 102 103 Irms [kA] I2t [106 A2s] 10 1 1 10-1 10-1 10 102 4/20 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 103 Irms [kA] 10 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information T5H/V 400 T8 480 V 600 V I2t [106 A2s] 10 I2t [106*A2s] 10 3 1 10 2 10-1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] 10 10 10 2 10 3 Irms [kA] T8 600 V I2t [106*A2s] 10 3 In=2500 A In=3000 A 10 2 10 10 10 2 10 3 Irms [kA] Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 4/21 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information Limitation curves (current limiting circuit breakers and T8) T2H PR221 100A T2H TM 100A 480 V 480 V Ip [kA] Ip [kA] 102 102 10 10 1 1 1 10 1 102 Irms [kA] T2H TM 50A T2H TM 30A 480 V 480 V 10 102 Irms [kA] 10 102 Irms [kA] Ip [kA] Ip [kA] 102 102 10 10 1 1 1 10 4/22 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 102 Irms [kA] 1 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information T2H TM 15A T4H/V 480 V 480 V Ip [kA] Ip [kA] 102 102 10 10 1 1 1 10 10 102 Irms [kA] T4H/V T5H/V 400 600 V 480 V Ip [kA] Ip [kA] 102 102 10 10 102 103 Irms [kA] 102 103 Irms [kA] 1 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] 10 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 4/23 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information T5H/V 400 T8 480 V 600 V Ip [kA] Ip [kA] 102 10 3 10 2 10 10 1 10 102 103 Irms [kA] 1 10 T8 600 V Ip [kA] 10 3 10 2 10 1 10 10 2 4/24 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 103 Irms [kA] 10 2 103 Irms [kA] Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information Temperatre performances Circuit breakers with electronic trip units PR221DS PR222DS/P PR231/P PR232/P PR331/P PR332/P Imax [xIn] 1.05 1 0.95 0.9 0.85 0.8 0.75 0.7 0.65 0.6 95/35 104/40 113/45 122/50 131/55 149/65 140/60 158/70 Ambient temperature [F/C] Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 4/25 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information Temperatre performances Circuit breakers with thermal magnetic trip units Tmax T1 and T1 1P In [A] 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 50 F / 10 C 68 F / 20 C 86 F / 30 C 18 24 29 35 47 60 71 83 94 106 121 17 22 28 34 45 57 68 79 90 101 114 16 21 27 32 43 53 64 75 85 96 107 50 F / 10 C 68 F / 20 C 86 F / 30 C 18 24 30 35 40 46 56 71 83 96 109 115 17 23 28 33 39 44 54 68 79 91 103 110 16 21 27 32 37 42 52 64 75 86 97 105 50 F / 10 C 68 F / 20 C 86 F / 30 C 70 82 92 104 117 145 175 205 236 264 67 78 88 100 112 139 167 195 224 251 64 74 84 95 106 132 159 185 213 239 104 F / 40 C 122 F / 50 C 140 F / 60 C 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 14 19 23 28 37 46 56 65 75 84 92 13 17 22 26 34 42 51 60 69 78 84 Tmax T2 In [A] 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 104 F / 40 C 122 F / 50 C 140 F / 60 C 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 14 18 23 28 33 38 48 56 65 74 83 95 12 17 21 26 31 35 45 51 60 67 75 89 Tmax T3 In [A] 60 70 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 225 4/26 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 104 F / 40 C 122 F / 50 C 140 F / 60 C 60 70 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 225 56 66 75 85 94 118 141 164 187 211 52 61 71 79 87 110 131 152 172 195 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information Tmax Ts3 150 In [A] 50 F / 10 C 68 F / 20 C 86 F / 30 C 18 24 30 35 41 47 59 71 83 94 106 118 148 177 17 22 28 33 39 44 56 67 78 90 101 112 140 168 16 21 27 32 37 42 53 64 74 85 95 106 133 159 50 F / 10 C 68 F / 20 C 86 F / 30 C 207 236 266 196 224 252 186 212 239 50 F / 10 C 68 F / 20 C 86 F / 30 C 24 30 47 59 94 118 148 177 236 266 22 28 44 56 90 112 140 168 224 252 21 27 42 53 85 106 133 159 212 239 50 F / 10 C 68 F / 20 C 86 F / 30 C 241...345 325...465 483...690 230...328 310...442 459...656 220...314 295...420 440...628 50 F / 10 C 68 F / 20 C 86 F / 30 C 520...740 685...965 493...705 640...905 462...660 605...855 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 125 150 104 F / 40 C 122 F / 50 C 140 F / 60 C 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 125 150 14 19 23 28 33 37 47 56 66 75 85 95 119 143 13 17 21 26 30 34 43 51 60 68 77 85 106 127 Tmax Ts3 225 In [A] 175 200 225 104 F / 40 C 122 F / 50 C 140 F / 60 C 175 200 225 166 190 214 149 170 191 Tmax T4 In [A] 20 25 40 50 80 100 125 150 200 250 104 F / 40 C 122 F / 50 C 140 F / 60 C 20 25 40 50 80 100 125 150 200 225 19 23 37 47 75 95 119 143 190 214 17 21 34 43 68 85 106 127 170 191 Tmax T5 400/600 In [A] 300 400 600 104 F / 40 C 122 F / 50 C 140 F / 60 C 210...300 280...400 420...600 200...286 265...380 400...572 187...267 250...355 374...534 Tmax T6 800 In [A] 600 800 104 F / 40 C 122 F / 50 C 140 F / 60 C 441...630 560...800 405...580 520...740 380...540 470...670 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 4/27 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information Power losses Type T1 - T1B 1p Trip unit TMF TMF T2 ELT T3 TMF Ts3 TMF 4/28 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL In [A] P [W/pole] 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 10 25 63 100 60 70 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 225 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 225 1.3 1.3 2.0 1.8 2.6 3.7 3.9 5.3 4.8 6.1 6.8 1.0 1.7 1.6 2.4 3.0 2.8 3.2 4.6 4.7 5.4 6.9 7.7 0.5 1.0 3.5 8.0 3.9 4.2 4.8 5.0 5.3 6.6 7.4 11.6 13.2 15.0 3.2 3.2 3.3 3.5 4.8 6.3 5.3 7.7 4.6 6.0 7.6 7.0 6.7 8.8 9.2 12.0 13.5 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information Type Trip unit TMF TMD T4 TMA ELT TMA T5 ELT TMA T6 ELT T7 ELT T8 ELT In [A] P [W/pole] 15 20 30 40 50 80 100 125 150 200 250 100 150 200 300 400 600 300 400 600 600 800 600 800 400 600 800 1000 1200 1600 2000 2500 3000 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.8 3.9 4.6 5.2 5.7 6.9 9.9 13.7 1.7 3.9 10.7 12.3 19.5 40.1 9.3 16.5 37.1 30.6 31 30 32 5 12 19.3 30 47 30 46 73 117 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 4/29 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information Wiring possibilities in DC applications Use of direct current apparatus To obtain the number of poles in series needed to guarantee the required breaking capacity at the various operating voltages, suitable connection diagrams must be used. For the breaking capacity (Icu), according to the voltage and the number of poles connected in series with reference to the connection diagrams, please refer to the main characteristic table in the first section of this catalog Diagram A: Interruption with one pole for polarity Load Note: With negative polarity not connected to earth, the installation method must be such as to make the probability of a second earth fault nil. Diagram B: Interruption with two poles in series for one polarity and one pole for the other polarity Load Note: With negative polarity not connected to earth, the installation method must be such as to make the probability of a second earth fault nil. Diagram C: Interruption with three poles in series for polarity Load 4/30 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Curves and technical information Diagram D: Interruption with four poles in series for one polarity (for use at 1000 V DC) IEC Load Diagram E: Interruption with three poles in series on one polarity and one pole on the remaining polarity Load Note: With negative polarity not connected to earth, the installation method must be such as to make the probability of a second earth fault nil. Diagram F: Interruption with two poles in series for polarity Load Note: With negative polarity not connected to earth, the installation method must be such as to make the probability of a second earth fault nil. Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 4/31 Table of contents Wiring diagrams Information for read Tmax T1 - T3 and T4 - T6 Tmax Ts3 Tmax T7 Tmax T8 5/2 5/6 5/8 5/12 Graphic symbols IEC 60617 and CEI 3-14...3-26 standards 5/16 Wiring diagrams circuit breakers T1 - T3 and T4 - T6 Ts3 T7 T8 5/17 5/19 5/20 5/22 Wiring diagrams electrical accessories T1 - T3 and T4 - T6 Ts3 T7 T8 5/23 5/27 5/28 5/31 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 5/1 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Information for reading - Circuit-breakers T1...T6 State of operation represented The diagram is shown in the following conditions: - plug-in version circuit-breaker open and racked-in - contactor for motor starting open - circuits de-energised - trip units not tripped - motor operator with springs charged. Version The diagram shows a circuit-breaker or switch-disconnector in the plug-in version (only T2, T3, T4 and T5) or in the withdrawable version (T6). The diagram is also valid for the fixed and withdrawable version circuit-breakers or switch-disconnectors. With the fixed version circuit-breakers or switch-disconnectors, the applications indicated in figures 26-27-28-29-30-31 and 32 cannot be provided. Caption * A1 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A2 A3 A4 D H, H1 K K51 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = K51/1...8 = K87 = Figure number of the diagram See note indicated by the letter Circuit-breaker applications FDU interfacing unit (front display) AUX-E type signalling unit, with auxiliary relays for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open and circuit-breaker tripped PR021/K type signalling unit, with auxiliary relays for electrical signalling of the protection functions of electronic trip unit MOE-E type actuation unit, with auxiliary relays for carrying out the commands coming from the dialogue unit PR212/CI type contactor control unit for motor starting Solenoid operating mechanism Unit for M motor electrical latching VM210 type voltage measuring unit Applications of the solenoid operator or motor operator Applications of the RC221, RC222 or RC223 type residual current release Indication apparatus and connections for control and signalling, outside the circuit-breaker Electronic time-delay device of the undervoltage release (outside the circuit-breaker) Signalling lamps Contactor for motor starting Electronic trip unit: - PR221 type overcurrent release, with the following protection functions: - L against overload with inverse long time delay - S against short-circuit with inverse or definite short time delay - I against short-circuit with instantaneous trip - PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD-A, type overcurrent release, with the following protection functions: - L against overload with inverse long time delay - S against short-circuit with inverse or definite short time delay - I against short-circuit with instantaneous trip time - G against earth fault with short time trip - PR222MP motor protection type trip unit, with the following protection functions: - against overload (thermal protection) - against rotor block - against short-circuit - against missing or unbalanced current between the phases Contact for electrical signalling of the protection functions of the electronic trip unit RC221, RC222 or RC223 type residual current trip unit 5/2 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Caption (continued) M M1 Q Q/0,1,2,3 R R1 R2 S1, S2 S3, S3/1 S4/1-2 S51/S S75I/1...3 = = = = = = = = = = = = S75S/1...3 = S87/1 S87/2 = = S87/3 = SC SC3 SD SO SO1, SO2 = = = = = SO3 SQ SY = = = TI TI/L1 TI/L2 TI/L3 TI/N W1 X1,X2,X5...X9 = = = = = = = X11 X3,X4 = = XA XA1 XA10 XA2 XA5 = = = = = XA6 = XA7 XA8 XA9 = = = Motor for circuit-breaker opening and circuit-breaker closing spring charging Three-phase asynchronous motor Main circuit-breaker Auxiliary circuit-breaker contacts Resistor (see note F) Motor thermistor Thermistor in the motor operator Contacts controlled by the cam of the motor operator Change-over contact for electrical signalling of local/remote selector status Contacts activated by the circuit-breaker rotary handle (see note C) Contact for electrical signalling of overload in progress (start) Contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker in racked-in position (only provided with circuit-breakers in plug-in and withdrawable version) Contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker in racked-out position (onlyprovided with circuit-breakers in plug-in and withdrawable version) Contact for electrical signalling of RC222 or RC223 type residual current release pre-alarm Contact for electrical signalling of RC222 Change-over contact for electrical signalling of local/remote selector status type residual current release alarm Contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to RC221, RC222 or RC223 type residual current release trip Pushbutton or contact for closing the circuit-breaker Pushbutton for motor starting Switch-disconnector of the power supply of the RC221 or RC222 type residual current release Pushbutton or contact for opening the circuit-breaker Pushbuttons or contacts for the circuit-breaker opening (see Resetting instructions for circuit-breaker tripped by trip units) Pushbutton for stopping the motor Contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open Contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to YO, YO1, YO2 or YU thermomagnetic trip unit intervention (tripped position) Toroidal current transformer Current transformer placed on phase L1 Current transformer placed on phase L2 Current transformer placed on phase L3 Current transformer placed on the neutral Serial interface with the control system (EIA RS485 interface. See note D) Connectors for the circuit-breaker auxiliary circuits (in the case of circuit-breakers in plug-in version, removal of the connectors takes place simultaneously with that of the circuit-breaker. See note E) Back-up terminal box Connectors for the circuits of the electronic trip unit (in the case of circuit-breakers in the plug-in version, remo val of the connectors takes place simultaneously with that of the circuit-breaker) Interfacing connector of the PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD-A trip unit Three-way connector for YO/YU (see note E) Six-way connector for solenoid operator Twelve-way connector for auxiliary contacts (see note E) Three-way connector for contact of electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to trip of the RC221, RC222 or RC223 type residual current release (see note E) Three-way connector for contact of electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to trip of the overcurrent release (see note E) Six-way connector for auxiliary contacts (see note E) Six-way connector for contacts operated by the rotary handle or for the motor operator (see note E) Six-way connector for the electrical signalling of RC222 or RC223 type residual current release pre-alarm and alarm and for opening by means of the release itself (see note E) Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 5/3 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Caption (continued) XB,XC,XE= XD = XF = X0 = X01 = XV = YC = YO = YO1 = YO2 = YO3 = YU = Interfacing connectors of the AUX-E unit Interfacing connector of the FDU unit Interfacing connector of the MOE-E unit Connector for the YO1 trip coil Connector for the YO2 trip coil Terminal boxes of the applications Closing release of the motor operating mechanism Opening release Trip coil of the electronic trip unit Trip coil of the RC221, RC222 or RC223 type residual current release Shunt opening release of the solenoid operator Undervoltage release (see note B). Description of figures (seen on top right corner of each wiring diagrams) Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7 = = = = = = = Fig. 8 Fig. 9 Fig. 10 Fig. 11 Fig. 12 Fig. 21 = = = = = = Fig. 22 = Fig. 23 Fig. 24 Fig. 25 Fig. 26 Fig. 27 Fig. 28 Fig. 29 Fig. 30 Fig. 31 Fig. 32 = = = = = = = = = = Fig. 41 Fig. 42 Fig. 43 = = = Fig. 44 Fig. 45 = = Fig. 46 = Opening release. Permanent opening release. Instantaneous undervoltage release (see note B and F). Undervoltage release with electronic time-delay device outside the circuit-breaker (see note B). Instantaneous undervoltage release in version for machine tools with one contact in series (see note B, C, and F). Instantaneous undervoltage release in version for machine tools with two contacts in series (see note B, C, and F). One changeover contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to RC221, RC222 or RC223 type residual current release trip. RC222 or RC223 type residual current release circuits. Two electrical signalling contacts for RC222 or RC223 type residual current release pre-alarm and alarm. Solenoid operator. Stored energy motor operator. Local/remote auxiliary contact for stored-energy motor operating mechanism. Three changeover contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open or closed and one changeover contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to YO, YO1, YO2 and YU thermomagnetic trip unit intervention (tripped position). One changeover contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open or closed and a changeover contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to YO, YO1, YO2 or YU the thermomagnetic trip unit intervention (tripped position). Two changeover contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open or closed. One changeover contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to overcurrent release trip (T2). One contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to overcurrent release trip (T4-T5-T6). First position of circuit-breaker changeover contact, for electrical signalling of racked-in. Second position of circuit-breaker changeover contact, for electrical signalling of racked-in. Third position of circuit-breaker changeover contact, for electrical signalling of racked-in. First position of circuit-breaker changeover contact, for electrical signalling of isolated. Second position of circuit-breaker changeover contact, for electrical signalling of isolated. Third position of circuit-breaker changeover contact, for electrical signalling of isolated. Circuit of the current transformer on neutral conductor outside the circuit-breaker (for plug-in and withdrawable version circuit-breaker). Auxiliary circuits of the PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD-A electronic trip unit connected with FDU front display unit. Auxiliary circuits of the PR222DS/PD-A, electronic trip unit connected with PR021/K type signalling unit. Auxiliary circuits of the PR222DS/PD-A, electronic trip unit connected with FDU front display unit and with PR021/K type signalling unit. Auxiliary circuits of the PR222DS/PD-A, electronic trip unit connected with the AUX-E auxiliary cotacts. Auxiliary circuits of the PR222DS/PD-A, electronic trip unit connected with the auxiliary contacts AUX-E and with MOE-E type actuation unit. Auxiliary circuits of the PR222DS/PD-A, electronic trip unit connected with FDU front display unit and with the AUX-E auxiliary contacts. 5/4 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Incompatibility The circuits indicated by the following figures cannot be supplied at the same time on the same circuit-breaker: 1-2-3-4-5-6 5 - 6 - 11 10 - 11 - 45 10 - 12 21 - 22 - 23 - 44 - 45 - 46 24 - 25 26 - 32 41 - 42 - 43 - 44 - 45 - 46 Notes A) B) C) E) F) G) H) I) The circuit-breaker is only fitted with the applications specified in the ABB SACE order confirmation. To make out the order, please consult this catalogue. The undervoltage release is supplied for power supply branched on the supply side of the circuit-breaker or from an independent source: circuit-breaker closing is only allowed with the release energised (the lock on closing is made mechanically). The S4/1 and S4/2 contacts shown in figures 5-6 open the circuit with the circuit-breaker open and close it again when a manual closing command is given by means of the rotary handle, in accordance with the Standards regarding machine tools (in any case, closing does not take place if the undervoltage release is not supplied). Connectors XA1, XA2, XA5, XA6, XA7, XA8 and XA9 are supplied on request. They are always supplied with T2 and T3 circuit-breakers in the plug-in version, and with T4 and T5 circuit-breakers in the plug-in version equipped with unwired electronic accessories. Connectors X1, X2, X5, X6, X7, X8 and X9 are supplied on request. They are always supplied with T4, T5 and T6 circuit-breakers in the fixed version or in the withdrawable version equipped with unwired electronic accessories. Additional external resistor for undervoltage release supplied at 250 V DC, 380/440 V AC and 480/500 V AC. In the case of fixed version circuit-breaker with current transformer on external neutral conductor outside the circuit-breaker, when the circuit-breaker is to be removed, it is necessary to short-circuit the terminals of the TI/N transformer. SQ and SY contacts of AUX-E signalling unit are opto-isolated contacts. The connection to poles 3-4 of X4 connector can be used in two ways: connecting a generic digital input or connecting the motor thermistor. The two functions are alternative. Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 5/5 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Information for reading - Circuit-breaker Ts3 Versions The diagram indincates a circuit breaker or an isolating-switch in draw out or plug-in version but it may be applied to a circuit breaker or an isolating-switch in fixed version too. Circuit given in figures 21-22-31-32 cannot be supplied with circuit breakers or isolating-switch in fixed version. Caption = * = A1 = A2 = A4 = D = K87 = KO = M = Q = Q/D...2 = R = S1 = S2 = S4 = S75I/1-2 = S75S/1-2= SC = SO = SO1,SO2= SY TI X1,X2 XV YO YO1 YO2 YU = = = = = = = = Figure number of the diagram See note indicated by the letter Circuit-breaker accessories Motor operator accessories Indication apparatus and connections for control and signalling, outside the circuit-breaker Electronic time-delay device of the undervoltage release (outside the circuit-breaker) Signalling lamps Contactor for motor starting Motor with series energization for the circuit breaker opening and closing Main circuit breaker Circuit breaker auxiliary contacts Resistance external to the circuit breaker, supplied for motor supply voltage higher than 220V Position contact operated by a cam of the circuit breaker Safety contact operated by key lock (if provided) or padlock device Contact operated by the circuit breaker rotary handle (see note C) Contacts signalling circuit breaker in the connected position (provided with the circuit breaker in draw out or plug-in version only (see note D) Contacts signalling circuit breaker in the isolated or plugged-in position (provided with the circuit breaker in draw out or plug-in version only (see note D) Pushbutton or contact for circuit breaker closing, the operation shall last for 100 ms at least. Pushbutton or contact for circuit breaker opening Pushbutton or contact for circuit breaker opening, the operation shall last for 100 ms at least (see instructions for resetting the circuit breaker after the releases has tripped) Contact signalling circuit breaker tripped through thermomagnetic, YO, YO1, YO2, YU releases operation (bell alarm) Ring current transformer Connectors for the circuit breaker auxiliary circuits Terminal boards of the accessories Shunt trip Opening solenoid of the RC211 or RC212 type residual current release Shunt trip for permanent supply Undervoltage release (see note B) 5/6 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Description of figures (seen on top right corner of each wiring diagrams) Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7 Fig. 8 Fig. 11 Fig. 12 = = = = = = = = = = Fig. 21 Fig. 22 Fig. 31 Fig. 32 = = = = Shunt trip. Opening solenoid of the RC211 type residual current release. Opening solenoid of the RC212 type residual current release. Instantaneous undervoltage release (see note B) Instantaneous undervoltage release in version for machine tools (see note B and C). Undervoltage release with solid-state time-delaying device external to the circuit breaker (see note B). Direct acting motor operator Shunt trip for permanent supply. Two change-over contacts signalling circuit breaker on/off. One change-over contact signalling circuit breaker on/off and one change-over contact signalling circuit breaker tripped through thermomagnetic YO, YO1, YO2, YU releases operation (bell alarm). First circuit breaker position contact, signalling the connected position (see note D). Second circuit breaker position contact signalling the connected position (see note D). First circuit breaker position contact signalling isolated or plugged-out position (see note D). Second circuit breaker position contact signalling isolated or plugged-out position (see note D). Incompatibility The circuits indicated by the following figures cannot be supplied at the same time on the same circuit-breaker: 2-3 1-4-5-6-7-8 11 - 12 21 - 31 22 - 32 Notes A) B) C) D) Circuit breaker is delivered complete with the accessories listed in the ABB order acknowledgement only.. Undervoltage release is suitable for circuit breaker supply side feeding or for feeding from an independen source: circuit breaker closes only if the undervoltage release is energized (lock on closing is achieved mechanically). Contact S4 given in fig. 5 opens the circuit when the circuit breaker is open and it closes when a manual closing control is carried out through rotary handle, in compiance with the Standards relevant to the machine tools (the closing does not occur indeed if the undervoltage release is not energized). Circuit breaker can be equipped with S75I and S75S position contacts, in whatever combination, with a maximum of 2 contacts. Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 5/7 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Information for reading - Circuit-breaker T7 Warning Before installing the circuit-breaker, carefully read notes F and O on the circuit diagrams. Operating status shown The circuit diagram is for the following conditions: - withdrawable circuit-breaker, open and racked-in - circuits de-energised - releases not tripped - motor operating mechanism with springs discharged. Versions Though the diagram shows a circuit-breaker in withdrawable version, it can be applied to a fixed version circuit-breaker as well. Fixed version The control circuits are fitted between terminals XV (connectors X12-X13-X14-X15 are not supplied). With this version, the applications indicated in figure 31A cannot be provided. Withdrawable version The control circuits are fitted between the poles of connectors X12-X13-X14-X15 (terminal box XV is not supplied). Version without overcurrent release With this version, the applications indicated in figures 13A, 14A, 41A, 42A, 43A, 44A, 45A, 62A cannot be provided. Version with PR231/P or PR232/P electronic trip unit With this version, the applications indicated in figures 41A, 42A, 43A, 44A, 45A, 62A cannot be provided. Version with PR331/P electronic trip unit With this version, the applications indicated in figures 42A, 43A, 44A, 45A cannot be provided. Version with PR332/P electronic trip unit With this version, the applications indicated in figure 41A cannot be provided Caption * A1 A3 A4 A13 A19 AY D K51 = = = = = = = = = = K51/1...8 K51/GZin (DBin) = = K51/GZout (DBout)= Circuit diagram figure number See note indicated by letter Circuit-breaker accessories Accessories applied to the fixed part of the circuit-breaker (for withdrawable version only) Example switchgear and connections for control and signalling, outside the circuit-breaker PR021/K signalling unit (outside the circuit-breaker) PR330/R actuation unit SOR TEST UNIT Test/monitoring Unit (see note R) Electronic time-delay device of the undervoltage release, outside the circuitbreaker PR231/P, PR232/P, PR331/P, PR332/P type electronic trip unit with the following protection functions: - L overload protection with inverse long time-delay trip - setting I1 - S short-circuit protection with inverse or definite short time-delay trip - setting I2 - I short-circuit protection with instantaneous time-delay trip - setting I3 - G earth fault protection with inverse short time-delay trip - setting I4 Contacts of the PR021/K signalling unit Zone selectivity: input for protection G or "reverse" direction input for protection D (only with Uaux. and PR332/P trip unit) Zone selectivity: output for protection G or "reverse" direction output for protection D (only with and PR332/P trip unit) 5/8 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Caption (continued) K51/SZin (DFin) = K51/SZout (DFout)= K51/YC = K51/YO = M Q Q/1...6 S33M/1...3 S4/1-2-3 = = = = = S43 S51 = = S51/P1 S75E/1...2 = = S75I/1...7 S75T/1..2 = = SC SO SO1 SO2 SR SRTC SY = = = = = = = TI/L1 TI/L2 TI/L3 T0 TU Uaux. UI/L1 UI/L2 UI/L3 UI/N UI/0 = = = = = = = = = = = W1 W2 X12...X15 XB1...XB7 XF = = = = = XO XR1 - XR2 XR5 - XR13 XV YC YO YO1 YO2 YR YU = = = = = = = = = = Zone selectivity: input for protection S or "direct" input for protection D (only with Uaux. and PR332/P trip unit) Zone selectivity: output for protection S or "direct" output for protection D (only with Uaux. and PR332/P trip unit) Closing control from PR332/P electronic trip unit with communication module PR330/D-M and PR330/R actua tion unit Opening control from PR332/P electronic trip unit with communication module PR330/D-M and PR330/R actuation unit Motor for charging the closing springs Circuit-breaker Circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts Limit contacts for spring-charging motor Contacts activated by the rotary handle of the circuit-breaker - only for circuit-breakers with manual control (see note C) Switch for setting remote/local control Contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to tripping of the overcurrent trip unit. The circuitbreaker may be closed only after pressing the reset pushbutton, or after energizing the coil for electrical reset (if available) Programmable contact (as default it signals overload present - start) Contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker in racked-out position (only with withdrawable circuit breakers) Contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker in racked-in position (only with withdrawable circuit-breakers) Contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker in test isolated position (only with withdrawable circuit breakers) Pushbutton or contact for closing the circuit-breaker Pushbutton or contact for opening the circuit-breaker Pushbutton or contact for opening the circuit-breaker with delayed trip Pushbutton or contact for opening the circuit-breaker with instantaneous trip Pushbutton or contact for electrical circuit-breaker reset Contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open, with springs charged and ready to close Contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to trip units tripped, YO, YO1, YO2, YU (tripped position) only for circuit-breakers with direct control Current transformer located on phase L1 Current transformer located on phase L2 Current transformer located on phase L3 Homopolar Toroidal current transformer (see note T) Insulating voltage transformer Auxiliary power supply voltage (see note F) Current sensor (Rogowski coil) located on phase L1 Current sensor (Rogowski coil) located on phase L2 Current sensor (Rogowski coil) located on phase L3 Current sensor (Rogowski coil) located on neutral Current sensor (Rogowski coil) located on the conductor connecting to earth the star point of the MV/LV transformer (see note G) Serial interface with control system (external bus): EIA RS485 interface (see note E) Serial interface with the accessories of PR331/P and PR332/P trip units (internal bus) Delivery connectors for auxiliary circuits of withdrawable version circuit-breaker Connectors for the accessories of the circuit-breaker Delivery terminal box for the position contacts of the withdrawable circuit-breaker (located on the fixed part of the circuit-breaker) Connector for YO1 release Connector for power circuits of PR231/P, PR232/P, PR331/P, and PR332/P trip units Connector for power circuits of PR332/P trip unit Delivery terminal box for the auxiliary circuits of the fixed circuit-breaker Shunt closing release Shunt opening release Overcurrent shunt opening release (trip coil) Second shunt opening release (see note Q) Coil to electrically reset the circuit-breaker Undervoltage release (see notes B, C and Q) Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 5/9 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Description of figures Fig. 1A Fig. 2A Fig. 4A Fig. 6A Fig. 7A Fig. 8A Fig. 11A Fig. 12A Fig. 13A = = = = = = = = = Fig. 14A Fig. 15A Fig. 21A Fig. 22A Fig. 31A Fig. 41A Fig. 42A Fig. 43A Fig. 44A = = = = = = = = = Fig. 45A = Fig. 46A = Fig. 61A = Fig. 62A = Motor circuit to charge the closing springs. Circuit of shunt closing release. Shunt opening release. Instantaneous undervoltage release (see notes B, C and Q). Undervoltage release with electronic time-delay device, outside the circuit-breaker (see notes B and Q). Second shunt opening release (see note Q). Contact for electrical signalling of springs charged or discharged. Contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open, with springs charged, and ready to close. Contact for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker open due to tripping of the overcurrent release. The circuit-breaker may be closed only after pressing the reset pushbutton, or after energizing the coil for electronic reset (if available). Electrical reset control. Contact operated by the circuit-breaker rotary handle - for circuit-breakers with manual control only (see note C). Circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts (for circuit-breakers with manual control only). Circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts (for circuit-breakers with motor control only). First set of contacts for electrical signalling of circuit-breaker in racked-in, test isolated, racked out position. Auxiliary circuits of PR331/P trip unit (see note F). Auxiliary circuits of PR332/P trip units (see notes F and N). Circuits of the measuring module PR330/V of the PR332/P trip units internally connected to the circuit-breaker (optional). Circuits of the measuring module PR330/V of the PR332/P trip units externally connected to the circuit-breaker (optional; see note O). Circuits of the PR332/P trip unit with communication module PR330/D-M connected to PR330/V actuation unit (see notes E, F and N). Circuits of the PR332/P trip unit PR330/V measuring module connected internally to the three-pole circuit-breaker with external neutral conductor (optional) SOR TEST UNIT Test/monitoring unit (see note R). Circuits of the PR021/K signalling module (outside the circuit-breaker). Incompatibility The circuits indicated in the following figures cannot be supplied simultaneously on the same circuit-breaker: 6A - 7A - 8A 21A - 22A 41A - 42A - 45A 43A - 44A - 46A 5/10 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Notes A) B) C) E) F) G) N) O) P) Q) R) S) T) The circuit-breaker is only fitted with the applications specified in the ABB SACE order confirmation. To make out the order, please consult this catalogue. The undervoltage release is supplied for operation using a power supply branched on the supply side of the circuit-breaker or from an independent source. The circuit-breaker can only close when the release is energized (there is a mechanical lock on closing). In conformity with the Standards governing machine tools, contacts S4 shown in Fig. 15A can be used to open the Yu undervoltage release circuit (Fig. 6A) when the circuit-breaker is open and close it again upon a manual closing command from the rotary handle. For the EIA RS485 serial interface connection see document RH0298 regarding MODBUS communication. The auxiliary voltage Vaux allows actuation of all operations of the PR331/P, PR332/P and trip units. Having requested a Vaux insulated from earth, one must use "galvanically separated converters" in compliance with IEC 60950 (UL 1950) or equivalent standards that ensure a common mode current or leakage current (see IEC 478/1, CEI 22/3) not greater than 3.5 mA, IEC 60364-41 and CEI 64-8. Earth fault protection is available with the PR332/P trip unit by means of a current sensor located on the conductor connecting to earth the star centre of the MV/LV transformer. The connections between terminals 1 and 2 (or 3) of current transformer UI/O and poles T7 and T8 of the X (or XV) connector Must be made with a two-pole shielded and stranded cable (see user manual), no more than 15 m long. The shield must be earthed on theccircuit-breaker side and current sensor side. With PR332/P trip unit, the connections to the zone selectivity inputs and outputs must be made with a two-pole shielded and stranded cable (see user manual), no more than 300 m long. The shield must be earthed on the selectivity input side. Systems with rated voltage greater than 690V require the use of an insulation voltage transformer to connect to the busbars. With PR332/P trip unit with communication module PR330/D-M, the coils YO and YC can be controlled directly from contacts K51/YO and K51/YC with maximum voltages of 110-120 V DC e 240-250 V AC. The second opening release may be installed as an alternative to the undervoltage release. The SACE SOR TEST UNIT + opening release (YO) is guaranteed to operate starting at 75% of the Vaux of the opening release itself. While the YO power supply contact is closing (short-circuit on terminals 4 and 5), the SACE SOR TEST UNIT is unable to detect the opening coil status. Consequently: - For continuously powered opening coil, the TEST FAILED and ALARM signals will be activated - If the coil opening command is of the pulsing type, the TEST FAILED signal may appear at the same time. In this case, the TEST FAILED signal is actually an alarm signal only if it remains lit for more than 20s. The connection cable shield must only be earthed on the circuit-breaker side. The connections between the TO toroidal transformer and the poles of the X13 (or XV) connector of the circuit-breaker must be made using a four-pole shielded cable with paired braided conductors (BELDEN 9696 paired type), with a length of not more than 15 m. The shield must be earthed on the circuit-breaker side. Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 5/11 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Information for reading - Circuit-breaker T8 Warning Before installing the circuit breaker, carefully read notes F and O on the circuit diagrams. Operating status shown The circuit diagram is for the following conditions: - circuit breaker in open position - circuits de-energized - trip units not tripped - motor operating mechanism with springs discharged. Versions The control circuits are fitted between terminals XV (connectors X12-X13-X14-X15 are not supplied). Molded case switches (MCS) With this version, the applications indicated in figures 13, 14, 41A, 42A, 43A, 44A, 45A, 62A cannot be provided. Version with PR331/P electronic trip unit With this version, the applications indicated in figures 42A, 43A, 44A, 45A cannot be provided. Version with PR332/P electronic trip unit With this version, the applications indicated in figure 41A cannot be provided. Caption * A1 A4 A13 A19 AY D K51 = = = = = = = = = K51/1...8 K51/GZin (DBin) = = K51/GZout (DBout)= K51/SZin (DFin) = K51/SZout (DFout) = K51/YC = Circuit diagram figure number See note indicated by letter Circuit breaker accessories Example switchgear and connections for control and signaling, outside the circuit breaker PR021/K signaling unit (outside the circuit breaker) PR330/R actuation unit SOR TEST UNIT Test/monitoring Unit (see note R) Electronic time-delay device of the undervoltage release, outside the circuit breaker PR331/P, PR332/P type electronic trip unit with the following protection functions: - L overload protection with inverse long time-delay trip - setting I1 - S short-circuit protection with inverse or definite short time-delay trip - setting I2 - I short-circuit protection with instantaneous time-delay trip - setting I3 - G ground fault protection with inverse short time-delay trip - setting I4 Contacts of the PR021/K signaling unit Zone selectivity: input for protection G or "reverse" direction input for protection D (only with Uaux. and PR332/P trip unit) Zone selectivity: output for protection G or "reverse" direction output for protection D (only with and PR332/P trip unit) Zone selectivity: input for protection S or "direct" input for protection D (only with Uaux. and PR332/P trip unit) Zone selectivity: output for protection S or "direct" output for protection D (only with Uaux. and PR332/P trip unit) Closing control from PR332/P electronic trip unit with communication module PR330/D-M and PR330/R actuation unit 5/12 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Caption (continued) K51/YO = M Q Q/1...5 S33M/1...3 S43 S51 = = = = = = S51/P1 SC SO SO1 SO2 SR SRTC SY = = = = = = = = TI/L1 TI/L2 TI/L3 Uaux. UI/L1 UI/L2 UI/L3 UI/N UI/0 = = = = = = = = = W1 W2 XB1...XB7 XF = = = = XO XR1 - XR2 XR5 - XR13 XV YC YO YO1 YO2 YR YU = = = = = = = = = = Opening control from PR332/P electronic trip unit with communication module PR330/D-M and PR330/R actuation unit Motor for charging the closing springs Circuit breaker Circuit breaker auxiliary contacts Limit contacts for spring-charging motor Switch for setting remote/local control Contact for electrical signaling of circuit breaker open due to tripping of the over-current trip unit. The circuit breaker may be closed only after pressing the reset pushbutton, or after energizing the coil for electrical reset (if available) Programmable contact (as default it signals overload present - start) Pushbutton or contact for closing the circuit breaker Pushbutton or contact for opening the circuit breaker Pushbutton or contact for opening the circuit breaker with delayed trip Pushbutton or contact for opening the circuit breaker with instantaneous trip Pushbutton or contact for electrical circuit breaker reset Contact for electrical signaling of circuit breaker open, with springs charged and ready to close Contact for electrical signaling of circuit breaker open due to trip units tripped, YO, YO1, YO2, YU (tripped position) only for circuit breakers with direct control Current transformer located on phase L1 Current transformer located on phase L2 Current transformer located on phase L3 Auxiliary power supply voltage (see note F) Current sensor (Rogowski coil) located on phase L1 Current sensor (Rogowski coil) located on phase L2 Current sensor (Rogowski coil) located on phase L3 Current sensor (Rogowski coil) located on neutral Current sensor (Rogowski coil) located on the conductor connecting to ground the star point of the MV/LV transformer (see note G) Serial interface with control system (external bus): EIA RS485 interface (see note E) Serial interface with the accessories of PR331/P and PR332/P trip units (internal bus) Connectors for the accessories of the circuit breaker Delivery terminal box for the position contacts of the draw out circuit breaker (located on the cradle of the circuit breaker) Connector for YO1 release Connector for power circuits of PR331/P, and PR332/P trip units Connector for power circuits of PR332/P trip unit Delivery terminal box for the auxiliary circuits Closing coil Shunt trip Overcurrent shunt trip (trip coil) Second shunt trip (see note Q) Coil to electrically reset the circuit breaker Undervoltage release (see notes B, C and Q) Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 5/13 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Description of figures Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 4 Fig. 6 Fig. 7 Fig. 8 Fig. 11 Fig. 12 Fig. 13 = = = = = = = = = Fig. 14 Fig. 21 Fig. 41A Fig. 42A Fig. 43A = = = = = Fig. 44A = Fig. 45A = Fig. 46A = Fig. 61A = Fig. 62A = Motor circuit to charge the closing springs. Circuit of closing coil. Shunt trip. Instantaneous undervoltage release (see notes B, C and Q). Undervoltage release with electronic time-delay device, outside the circuit breaker (see notes B and Q). Second shunt trip (see note Q). Contact for electrical signaling of springs charged or discharged. Contact for electrical signaling of circuit breaker open, with springs charged, and ready to close. Contact for electrical signaling of circuit breaker open due to tripping of the overcurrent release. The circuit breaker may be closed only after pressing the reset pushbutton, or after energizing the coil for electronic reset (if available). Electrical reset control. Circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (for circuit breakers with manual control only). Auxiliary circuits of PR331/P trip unit (see note F). Auxiliary circuits of PR332/P trip units (see notes F and N). Circuits of the measuring module PR330/V-T8 of the PR332/P trip units internally connected to the circuit breaker (optional). Circuits of the measuring module PR330/V-T8 of the PR332/P trip units externally connected to the circuit breaker (optional; see note O). Circuits of the PR332/P trip unit with communication module PR330/D-M connected to PR330/V actuation unit (see notes E, F and N). Circuits of the PR332/P trip unit PR330/V-T8 measuring module connected internally to the three-pole circuit breaker with external neutral conductor (optional) SOR TEST UNIT Test/monitoring unit (see note R). Circuits of the PR021/K signalling module (outside the circuit breaker) Incompatibilities The circuits indicated in the following figures cannot be supplied simultaneously on the same circuit breaker: 6-7-8 13 - 14 41A - 42A - 45A 43A - 44A - 46A 5/14 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Notes A) B) E) F) G) N) O) P) Q) R) S) T) The circuit breaker is only fitted with the accessories specified in the ABB order acknowledgement. Please contact your local sales organization. The undervoltage release is supplied for operation using a power supply branched on the supply side of the circuit breaker or from an independent source. The circuit breaker can only close when the trip unit is energized (there is a mechanical lock on closing). For the EIA RS485 serial interface connection see document ITSCE - RH0298 regarding MODBUS communication. The auxiliary voltage Uaux allows actuation of all operations of the PR331/P and PR332/P trip units. Having requested a Uaux insulated from ground, one must use "galvanically separated converters" in compliance with IEC 60950 (UL 1950) or equivalent standards that ensure a common mode current or leakage current (see IEC 478/1, CEI 22/3) not greater than 3.5 mA, IEC 60364-41 and CEI 64-8. Ground fault protection is available with the PR332/P trip units by means of a current sensor located on the conductor connecting to ground the star center of the MV/LV transformer. The connections between terminals 1 and 2 (or 3) of current transformer UI/O and poles T7 and T8 of the X (or XV) connector must be made with a two pole shielded and stranded cable (type BELDEN 8762/8772), no more than 15 m long. The shield must be grounded on the circuit breaker side and current sensor side. With PR332/P trip units, the connections to the zone discrimination inputs and outputs must be made with a two-pole shielded and stranded cable (type BELDEN 8762/8772), no more than 300 m long. The shield must be grounded on the discrimination input side. Systems with rated voltage greater than 690V require the use of an insulation voltage transformer to connect to the busbars. With PR332/P trip units with communication module PR330/R, the power supply for coils YO and YC must not be taken from the main power supply. The coils can be controlled directly from contacts K51/YO and K51/ YC with maximum voltages of 110-120 V DC and 240-250 V AC. The second shunt trip may be installed as an alternative to the undervoltage release. The SOR TEST UNIT + shunt trip (YO) is guaranteed to operate starting at 75% of the Uaux of the shunt trip itself. While the YO power supply contact is closing (short-circuit on terminals 4 and 5), the SOR TEST UNIT is unable to detect the opening coil status. Consequently: - for continuously powered opening coil, the TEST FAILED and ALARM signals will be activated - if the coil opening command is of the pulsing type, the TEST FAILED signal may appear at the same time. In this case, the TEST FAILED signal is actually an alarm signal only if it remains lit for more than 20s. The connection cable shield must only be grounded on the circuit breaker side. The connections between the TO toroidal transformer and the poles of the X13 (or XV) connector of the circuit breaker must be made using a four-pole shielded cable with paired braided conductors (BELDEN 9696 paired type), with a length of not more than 15 m. The shield must be grounded on the circuit breaker side. Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 5/15 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Graphic symbols (IEC 60617 and CEI 3-14...3-26 standards) Thermal effect Connection of conductors Position switch (limit switch), break contact Differential current relay Electromagnetic effect Terminal Position switch (limit switch) change-over break before make contact Phase-failure detection relay in a three-phase system Delay Plug and socket (male and female) Contactor (contact open in the unoperated position) Locked-rotor detection relay operating by current sensing Mechanical connection (link) Resistor (general symbol) Circuit-breaker disconnector with automatic trip unit Lamp, general symbol Manually operated control (general case) Temperature dependent resistor Switch-disconnector (onload isolating switch) Mechanical interlock between two devices Operated by turning Motor (general symbol) Operating device (general symbol) Operated by pushing Induction motor, threephase, squirrel cage Thermal relay Operated by key Current transformer Instantaneous overcurrent or rate-of-rise relay Screen, shield (it may be drawn in any convenient shape) Operated by cam Current transformer with four threaded winding and with one permanent winding with one tapping Overcurrent relay with adjustable short time-lag characteristic Equipotentiality Hearth, groung (general symbol) Make contact Overcurrent relay with inverse short time-lag characteristic Voltage transformer Converter with galvanic separator Break contact Overcurrent relay with inverse long time-lag characteristic Winding of three-phase transformer, connection star Conductors in a screened cable, two conductors shown Change-over break before make contact Earth fault overcurrent relay with inverse short time-lag characteristic Current sensing element Twisted conductors, two conductors shown Position switch (limit switch), make contact Phase-balance current relay 5/16 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Operated by electric motor M M Motor with series energization Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Wiring diagrams circuit breakers T1 - T3 and T4 - T6 State of operation Three-pole or four-pole circuit-breaker with thermomagnetic trip unit PR221MP PR221GP PR221DS Three-pole or four-pole circuit-breaker with PR221 electronic trip unit Three-pole circuit-breaker with magnetic trip unit Three-pole or four-pole switch-disconnector (on-load isolating switch) PR222DS/P PR222DS/PD-A Three-pole or four-pole circuit-breaker with PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD-A electronic trip unit (for T4, T5 and T6) Three-pole or four-pole circuit-breaker with RC221, RC222 or RC223 residual current trip unit Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 5/17 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams State of operation PR221DS PR222DS/P PR222DS/PD-A PR222DS/P PR222DS/PD-A RC221 RC222 RC223 Three-pole or four-pole circuit-breaker with PR221DS, PR222DS/P or PR222DS/PD-A electronic trip unit and RC221, RC222 or RC223 residual current trip unit (for T4, T5 and T6 fourpole only) Fixed version three-pole circuit-breaker with current transformer on neutral conductor, external to circuit-breaker (for T4, T5 and T6) PR222DS/P PR222DS/PD-A Plug-in or withdrawable version three-pole circuit-breaker with current transformer on neutral conductor, external to circuit-breaker (for T4, T5 and T6) 5/18 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Wiring diagrams circuit breakers Ts3 State of operation 2 pole, 3 pole or 4 pole Ts3 circuit breaker with thermomagnetic trip unit Fixed version 4 pole Ts3 circuit breaker with RC211 or RC212 residual current release (side by side installation) Fixed version 4 pole Ts3 circuit breaker with RC211 or RC212 residual current release (vertical installation) Ts3 MCP 3 pole with magnetic trip unit Ts3 MCS 3 pole or 4 pole Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 5/19 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Wiring diagrams circuit breakers T7 State of operation 3 pole circuit-breaker with PR231/P, PR232/P, PR331/P, PR332/P electronic trip unit PE L1 L2 L3 N N L1 L2 L3 K51 N Q L1 L2 L3 XR1 4 In 400/800A 3 In 100/250A 2 T11 9 TI/L1 T12 10 T21 11 TI/L2 T22 12 T31 13 T32 14 TI/L3 > Q >> XO 1 >> 1 T13 1 T14 2 T23 3 T24 4 T33 5 UI/L3 T34 6 T43 7 UI/N T44 8 UI/L1 * G) UI/L2 1 XR1 >>> Y01 XO >> 2 UI/O 2 PR231/P PR232/P PR331/P X13 XV T7 T7 T7 T8 T8 T8 PR332/P * G) 4 pole circuit-breaker with PR231/P, PR232/P, PR331/P, PR332/P electronic trip unit 5/20 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 3 pole or 4 pole switch disconnector Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams State of operation Three-pole circuit-breaker with PR332/P electronic trip unit, residual current protection and U 690 V Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 5/21 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Wiring diagrams circuit breakers T8 State of operation 4 pole circuit-breaker with PR331/P, PR332/P electronic trip unit 3 pole circuit-breaker with PR331/P, PR332/P electronic trip unit 5/22 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 3 pole or 4 pole switch disconnector Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Wiring diagrams electrical accessories T1 - T3 and T4 - T6 Shunt trip and undervoltage release Residual current release and remote controls Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 5/23 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Auxiliary contacts Position contacts 5/24 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams PR222DS/P, PR222DS/PD-A electronic trip unit connected to FDU display unit PR222DS/P PR222DS/PD-A PR222DS/PD-A electronic trip unit connected with the AUX-E auxiliary contacts PR222DS/PD-A Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 5/25 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams PR222DS/PD-A electronic trip unit connected with the AUX-E auxiliary contacts and MOE-E 45 Q PR222DS/PD-A PR222DS/PD-A electronic trip unit connected with the AUX-E auxiliary contacts and FDU PR222DS/PD-A 5/26 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Wiring diagrams electrical accessories Ts3 Residual current releases, service releases and direct action motor operator Auxiliary contacts Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 5/27 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Wiring diagrams electrical accessories T7 Motor operator, shunt trip, closing coil and undervoltage releases Signalling contacts 5/28 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Signalling contacts Auxiliary circuits of the PR331/P and PR332/P trip units Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 5/29 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams PR332/P trip unit equipped with PR330/R actuator unit and PR330/D-M dialog unit Mesuring module PR330/V 5/30 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Wiring diagrams electrical accessories T8 Motor operator, shunt trip, closing coil and undervoltage releases Signalling contacts Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 5/31 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams Auxiliary circuits of the PR331/P and PR332/P trip units WARNING: see note F WARNING: see note F Mesuring module PR330/V-T8 WARNING: see note O 5/32 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Wiring diagrams PR332/P trip unit equipped with PR330/R actuator unit and PR330/D-M dialog unit WARNING: see note F Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 5/33 Table of contents Overall dimensions FIXED circuit breakers and terminals Tmax T1 1P and T1 Tmax T2 Tmax T3 Tmax Ts3 Tmax T4 Tmax T5 (400) Tmax T5 (600) Tmax T6 Tmax T7 Tmax T7M Tmax T8 6/2 6/4 6/8 6/13 6/17 6/21 6/25 6/27 6/31 6/37 6/43 PLUG-IN circuit breakers and terminals Tmax T2 Tmax T3 Tmax Ts3 Tmax T4 Tmax T5 (400) 6/47 6/51 6/55 6/58 6/62 DRAW OUT circuit breakers and terminals Tmax Ts3 Tmax T4 Tmax T5 Tmax T6 Tmax T7 Tmax T7M 6/66 6/69 6/73 6/77 6/80 6/83 Accessories Tmax T1-T2-T3 Tmax Ts3 Tmax T4-T5 Tmax T6 Tmax T7 Tmax T7M 6/86 6/96 6/100 6/110 6/116 6/122 Distances to be respected Insulation distance Minimum distance side by side Minimum distance superimposed 6/124 6/124 6/124 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions T1 FIXED VERSION 24.5 0.96 17 0.67 11.5 0.45 52 2.05 45 1.77 11.5 0.45 76 2.99 17 0.67 5 Nm 45 1.77 130 5.12 104 4.09 65 2.56 52 2.05 25.4 1.0 12x12 0.47x0.47 7 Nm 83 3.27 70 2.76 12x12 0.47x0.47 104 4.09 24.5 0.96 T1 1P (SINGLE-POLE) With inserts 152 5.98 T1 1P (SINGLE-POLE) Without inserts 83 3.27 70 2.76 5 5 0.8 Nm 1 1.4 Nm 3 0.12 2 0.08 1 0.04 3 0.12 79 71 3.11 2.80 1 0.04 1 2 79 71 2 3.11 2.80 102 4.02 102 4.02 T1 3P/4P Fixing on DIN rail T1 3P/4P Fixing on sheet 83 3.27 79 3.11 101.2 (4P) 3.98 38.1 1.5 25 0.98 2 0.08 25 0.98 25 0.98 72.5 2.85 70 2.76 5 Y 1.5 0.06 Y 1 0.04 5 4 Y 76.2 (3P) 3.0 3 0.12 1 0.04 79 1 3.11 Y 71 2 2.80 102 4.02 Caption 1 Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit breaker with face not extending from the compartment door, with or without flange 2 Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit breaker with face extending from the compartment door, without flange 3 Bracket for fixing onto rail 4 Bottom terminal covers with IP40 degree of protection 5 Insulating plate 6/2 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 2 0.08 22.5 0.89 5.5 0.22 1.1 Nm 7.5 0.30 X 45 1.77 X 35 1.38 X 134 5.28 X 45 1.77 X 67 2.64 17 0.67 76.2 3.0 1.1 Nm 130 5.12 65 2.56 3 85.5 3.37 104.5 4.11 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions Front for CuAl cables (FC CuAl) 3 POLES 25 0.98 1P without inserts 25 0.98 O 4.5 - M4 O 0.18 53.5 2.11 107 4.21 107 4.21 107 4.21 17 0.67 45 1.77 52 2.05 104 4.09 1P with inserts 22.4 0.88 O 3.5 - M3 O 0.14 53.5 2.11 O 4.5 - M4 O 0.18 4 POLES 25 0.98 53.5 2.11 11.5 0.45 84 71 3.31 2.80 9.5x9.5 0.37x0.37 25.5 1.00 72 2.83 DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet 144 5.67 TERMINALS O 4.5 - M4 O 0.18 DRILLING TEMPLATES 2 0.08 103.2 4.06 78.2 3.08 With flange and circuit breaker face flush with door (3-4 POLES) 39.1 1.54 47 1.85 47 1.85 18 0.71 18 0.71 83 3.27 58 2.28 23.5 0.93 103 4.06 Without flange and circuit breaker face flush with door (3-4 POLES) or extending (3 POLES) Without flange and circuit breaker face extending (4 POLES) 47 1.85 18 0.71 27.4 1.08 (SINGLE-POLE) 33.5 1.32 Flange for the compartment door 88.2 3.47 78 3.07 3 0.12 Compartment door Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/3 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions T2 FIXED VERSION T2 3P/4P Fixing on sheet T2 3P/4P Fixing on DIN rail 83 3.27 120 (4P) 4.72 78 3.07 45 1.77 30 1.18 30 1.18 30 1.18 72.5 2.85 1.5 0.06 70 2.76 5 1 0.04 4 3 0.12 1 0.04 1 79 3.11 2 0.08 71 2.80 102 4.02 Caption 1 Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit breaker with face not extending from the compartment door, with or without flange 2 Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit breaker with face extending from the compartment door, without flange 3 Bracket for fixing onto rail 4 Bottom terminal covers with IP40 degree of protection 5 Insulating plate 6/4 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 2 5.5 0.22 35 1.38 3 134 5.28 45 1.77 0.8 Nm 90 (3P) 3.54 67 2.64 17 0.67 76.2 3.0 130 5.12 65 2.56 5 4 0.8 Nm 7.5 0.30 85.5 3.37 104.5 4.11 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS Front (F) MAX 20 0.79 2 17.5 0.69 12 0.47 1 0.04 6 Nm Caption 53.25 2.10 O 6.5 O 0.26 MAX 7.5 0.30 MAX 5 0.20 1 1 Insulating base plate (compulsory) 2 Insulating barriers between phases (compulsory) Front for Cu cables (FC Cu) 17.5 0.69 14x14 0.55x0.55 1 0.04 7 Nm Caption 1 53.25 2.10 13 0.51 1 Insulating base plate (compulsory) Front for CuAl cables (FC CuAl) 17.5 0.69 14x14 0.55x0.55 1 0.04 5.6 Nm Caption 1 53.25 2.10 13 0.51 1 Insulating base plate (compulsory) Front extended spread (ES) 165 6.5 52.5 2.07 30 1.18 30 1.18 30 1.18 30 1.18 45 1.77 30 1.18 5 0.20 1 18 Nm 200 7.87 76.2 3.0 107.25 4.22 57.25 2.25 65 2.56 76.2 3.0 O 10.5 O 0.41 57.25 2.25 25 0.98 30 1.18 7.5 0.3 1 65 2.56 45 1.77 O 10.5 O 0.41 30 1.18 45 1.77 52.5 2.07 6 Nm 135 5.31 1 0.04 Caption 1 Insulating base plate (compulsory) 2 Insulating barriers between phases (compulsory) 2 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/5 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS (continued) Front extended (EF) 2 100 3.94 2 O 8.2 O 0.32 30 1.18 30 1.18 25 0.98 30 1.18 17.5 0.69 5 0.20 1 0.04 85.2 3.35 Caption 130 5.12 170.5 6.71 65 2.56 76.2 3.0 3 1 High terminal covers with IP40 protection degree 2 Insulating barriers between phases (compulsory without 1) 3 Insulating base plate (compulsory) 50 1.97 9 Nm 1 6 Nm Rear (R) 9 Nm 67 2.64 1 134 5.28 106.5 4.19 53.3 2.10 76.2 3.0 2 3.5 0.14 Caption 30 1.18 30 1.18 1 0.04 30 1.18 O 8.25 O 0.32 55 2.17 42.5 1.67 92.5 3.64 105 4.13 25 0.98 18.8 0.74 6/6 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 17.5 0.69 6 Nm 1 Low terminal covers with IP40 protection degree 2 Insulating plate Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet 30 1.18 107 4.21 107 4.21 53.5 2.11 30 1.18 4 POLES With front terminals 30 1.18 30 1.18 30 1.18 30 1.18 O 22 O 0.87 O 22 O 0.87 O 4.5 - M4 O 0.18 3 POLES With front terminals 30 1.18 O 4.5 - M4 O 0.18 O 4.5 - M4 O 0.18 53.5 2.11 30 1.18 53.5 2.11 107 4.21 53.5 2.11 O 4.5 - M4 O 0.18 107 4.21 30 1.18 30 1.18 3 POLES With rear terminals 30 1.18 4 POLES With rear terminals DRILLING TEMPLATES 47 1.85 47 1.85 With flange and circuit breaker face flush with door (3-4 POLES) Without flange and circuit breaker face flush with door (3-4 POLES) or extending (3 POLES) 122 4.8 18 0.71 92 3.62 46 1.81 47 1.85 18 0.71 78.2 3.08 18 0.71 83 3.27 58 2.28 23.5 0.93 Compartment door Without flange and circuit breaker face extending (3 POLES) Without flange and circuit breaker face extending (4 POLES) 82 3.47 78 3.07 33.5 1.32 Flange for the compartment door Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/7 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions T3 FIXED VERSION T3 3P/4P Fixing on sheet T3 3P/4P Fixing on DIN rail 1.5 0.06 1 0.04 72.5 2.85 5 3 10 0.39 45 1.77 35 1.38 12.5 0.49 76.2 3.0 22.5 0.89 35 1.38 77 3.03 35 1.38 150 5.91 75 2.95 35 1.38 83 3.27 78 3.07 70 2.76 52.5 2.07 45 1.77 140 (4P) 5.51 4 5 1.1 Nm 3 0.12 105 (3P) 4.13 2 0.08 1 0.04 1 79 3.11 71 2.80 102 4.02 Caption 1 Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit breaker with face not extending from the compartment door, with or without flange 2 Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit breaker with face extending from the compartment door, without flange 3 Bracket for fixing onto rail 4 Bottom terminal covers with IP40 degree of protection 5 Insulating plate 6/8 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 2 7.5 0.30 85.5 3.37 104.5 4.11 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS Front (F) MAX 24 0.94 MAX 8 0.31 19 0.75 17.5 0.69 O 8.5 O 0.33 1 0.04 8 Nm Caption 1 Insulating base plate (compulsory) MAX 9.5 0.37 58 2.28 1 Front for Cu cables (FC Cu) 18x18 0.71x0.71 19 0.75 1 0.04 10 Nm 1 Caption 58 2.28 19 0.75 1 Insulating base plate (compulsory) Front for CuAl cables (FC CuAl) 1 O 10 O 0.39 FC CuAl 1/0 - 14AWG Caption 58 2.28 9.3 0.37 6.2 0.24 71 2.8 84 3.31 79 3.11 45 1.77 Insulating base plate (compulsory) 165 6.5 12.5 0.49 116 4.57 1 3 0.12 O 17 O 0.67 2 0.08 FC CuAl 300 Kcmil - 4 AWG 103 4.06 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/9 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS (continued) Front extended spread (ES) 1 25 0.98 1 18 Nm 118 4.65 O 10.5 O 0.41 1 0.04 75 2.95 O 10.5 O 0.41 75 2.95 76.2 3.0 6 0.24 76.2 3.0 200 7.87 30 1.18 45 1.77 30 30 1.18 1.18 5 0.2 58 2.28 30 1.18 58 2.28 30 1.18 50 1.97 8 Nm 45 1.77 30 30 1.18 1.18 130 5.12 50 1.97 165 6.5 45 1.77 Caption 1 Insulating barriers between phases (compulsory) 2 Insulating plate 2 Front extended (EF) 100 3.94 2 O 10 O 0.39 35 1.38 35 1.38 35 1.38 25 0.98 19.5 0.77 6 0.24 1 0.04 2 101 3.98 202 7.95 76.2 3.0 150 5.91 75 2.95 Caption 60 2.36 6/10 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 2 Insulating barriers between phases (compulsory without 1) Insulating plate 8 Nm 8 Nm High terminal covers with IP40 protection degree 3 3 1 1 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS (continued) 116 4.57 154 6.06 76.2 3.0 58 2.28 4.5 0.18 77 3.03 Rear (R) 2 Caption 9 Nm 35 1.38 35 1.38 1 0.04 6 Nm 19 0.75 1 Low terminal covers with IP40 protection degree 2 Insulating base plate O 8.25 O 0.32 55 2.17 42.5 1.67 92.5 3.64 105 4.13 25 0.98 18.8 0.74 35 1.38 1 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/11 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet 3 POLES With front terminals O 4.5 - M4 O 0.18 4 POLES With front terminals 116 4.57 61 2.4 116 4.57 O 25 O 0.98 122 4.8 61 2.4 122 4.8 122 4.8 61 2.4 122 4.8 35 1.38 O 4.5 - M4 O 0.18 35 1.38 35 1.38 O 25 O 0.98 35 35 1.38 1.38 35 1.38 35 1.38 35 35 35 1.38 1.38 1.38 3 POLES With rear terminals 4 POLES With rear terminals DRILLING TEMPLATES 13.5 0.53 107 4.21 Without flange and With flange and Without flange and circuit breaker face flush circuit breaker face flush circuit breaker face with door (3-4 POLES) with door (3-4 POLES) extending (3 POLES) or extending (3 POLES) 82 3.47 78 3.07 29 1.14 Flange for the compartment door 6/12 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 142 5.59 53.5 2.11 47 1.85 13.5 0.53 78.2 3.08 47 1.85 13.5 0.53 47 1.85 58 2.28 19 0.75 Compartment door 83 3.27 35 1.38 58 2.28 O 4.5 - M4 O 0.18 61 2.4 O 4.5 - M4 O 0.18 35 1.38 35 1.38 35 1.38 58 2.28 35 1.38 35 1.38 Without flange and circuit breaker face extending (4 POLES) Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions Ts3 FIXED VERSION Ts3 3P/4P Fixing on sheet Ts3 3P/4P Fixing on DIN rail 117 4.61 B 4 poles 3 poles Z A 3 0.12 V F 25 0.98 135 5.31 101.5 4.0 108 4.25 H 1 4 22.5 0.89 D G 45 1.77 O 105 4.13 C 161 6.34 = o I 4.5 0.18 = off H 2 1 E E 4 E 3 5 0.20 105 4.13 103.5 4.07 107 4.21 2 0.08 Letter A B C D E F G H I L V Z mm 105 140 170 87.25 35 O8 143 10 73.75 18x18 24 17.5 in 4.13 5.51 6.69 3.44 1.38 O 0.31 5.63 0.39 2.90 0.71x0.71 0.94 0.69 Caption 1 Flange for compartment door 2 DIN rail bracket (75mm DIN) 3 1,77 in (45mm) front flange 4 Tightening torque 2 Nm Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/13 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS Front (F) 3 0.12 10 0.39 5 0.20 X M8 20 0.79 Front for CuAl cables (FC CuAl) L I X Front extended spread (ES) A1 B1 D1 C1 C1 L1 F1 H1 5 0.20 2.5 0.10 2.5 0.10 H1 I X I1 G1 E1 E1 60 2.36 G1 F1 101 3.98 D1 D1 O o o I O off X off Letter I L A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 H1 I1 mm in 73.75 O 16 130 165 50 45 30 155 ... O 8.5 12.5 45 2.90 O 0.63 5.12 6.50 1.97 1.77 1.18 6.10 ... O 0.33 0.49 1.77 6/14 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL L1 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS (continued) Front extended (EF) 25 0.98 Y 1 6 P 12.5 0.49 Caption 33.5 1.32 46 1.81 O 1 Separator plates between the phases (to order) N D I o I O X off Rear for CuAl cables 13.5 0.53 1 L Caption 1 High terminal covers included in supply I X Rear threaded (R) 25 0.98 Q R S 1 U Caption I 1 Low terminal covers included in supply X T Letter D I L N O P Q R S T U mm in 87.25 73.75 O 16 20 O 8.5 100 81.5 36.5 55 100 M12 3.44 2.90 O 0.63 0.79 O 0.33 3.94 3.21 1.44 2.17 3.94 M12 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/15 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet (minimum thickness of sheet metal 0.12" / 3mm) Y A A M C C G N X C A E H A E 3 poles B 3 poles Y I For front terminals and extended front terminals O 5.5 - M5 O 0.22 4 poles For rear terminals (CuAl) For rear threaded terminals 3 pole For rear threaded terminals 4 pole DRILLING TEMPLATES Y 112 4.41 80 3.15 112 4.41 142 5.59 X Y Letter A B C D E F G H I L M N mm in 35 1.38 70 2.76 139 5.47 71.75 2.82 17.5 0.69 94.75 3.73 185 7.28 R15 R0.59 105 4.13 73.75 2.90 O 24 O 0.94 143 5.63 6/16 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL B 4 poles Compartment door (minimum thickness of sheet metal 0.08" / 2mm) O 7 O 0.28 D N C O 5.5 - M5 O 0.22 L D A O 5.5 - M5 O 0.22 M L F D X A E D X A A 3 poles B 4 poles A 3 poles B 4 poles Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions T4 FIXED VERSION T4 3P/4P Fixing on sheet 105 4.13 5.5 0.22 105 4.13 2.7 0.11 59.5 2.34 2.7 0.11 112.5 4.43 103.5 4.07 2 1 140 (4P) 5.51 2 Nm 205 8.07 102.5 4.04 105 (3P) 4.13 52.5 2.07 35 35 35 1.38 1.38 1.38 107 4.21 3 0.12 2 0.08 139 5.47 Caption 1 Overall dimensions with cabled accessories mounted (SOR-C, UVR-C) 2 Overall dimensions with cabled auxiliary contacts mounted (only 3Q+1SY) Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/17 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS Front (F) MAX 25 0.98 17.5 0.69 20 0.79 MAX 8 0.31 18 Nm 84.75 3.34 MAX 9.5 0.37 O 8.5 O 0.33 Front for Cu cables (FC Cu) 18x18 0.71x0.71 20 0.79 19 0.75 84.75 3.34 10 Nm Front for CuAl cables (FC CuAl) O 18 O 0.71 5.6 Nm 9 Nm 84.75 3.34 31 Nm 20.75 0.82 84.75 3.34 9 Nm O 10 O 0.39 26 1.02 15.5 0.61 26 1.02 45 1.77 5 0.20 26 1.02 30 1.18 6/18 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 6 0.24 1 200 7.87 45 1.77 18 Nm 30 1.18 45 1.77 Caption 144.7 5.70 50 1.97 57.25 2.25 50 1.97 O 10 .5 O 0.41 165 6.50 130 5.12 102.5 4.04 102.5 4.04 57.25 2.25 O 10 .5 O 0.41 Front extended spread (ES) 1 Insulating barriers between phases (compulsory) Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS (continued) Front extended (EF) 39.25 1.55 100 3.94 105 (3P) 4.13 35 35 35 1.38 1.38 1.38 2 26 1.02 17.5 0.69 6 0.24 18 Nm Caption 60 2.36 84.7 3.34 1 High terminal covers with IP40 protection degree 2 Insulating barriers between phases (compulsory without 1) 169.5 6.67 205 8.07 255.5 10.06 102.5 4.04 127.7 5.03 O 10 O 0.39 1 52.5 2.07 103.5 4.07 140 (4P) 5.51 Rear (R) 105 (3P) 4.13 103.5 4.07 84.75 3.34 104.5 4.11 1 1 Low terminal covers with IP40 protection degree 4.5 0.18 209 8.23 169.5 6.67 Caption 6 Nm 52.5 2.07 140 (4P) 5.51 35 1.38 35 35 1.38 1.38 18.8 0.74 42.5 1.67 25 0.98 55 2.17 92.5 3.64 105 4.13 O 8.25 O 0.32 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/19 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet 3 POLES With rear terminals DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door 107 4.21 107 4.21 60.5 2.38 115 4.53 64.5 2.54 115 4.53 3 -4 POLE Without flange Flange for the compartment door 76 2.99 117 4.61 138 5.43 35 35 1.38 1.38 6/20 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 17.5 0.69 35 35 35 1.38 1.38 1.38 4 POLES With rear terminals 84.75 3.34 88 3.46 84.75 3.34 O 25 O 0.98 70 2.76 169.5 6.67 176 6.93 4 POLES With front terminals 3 -4 POLE With flange 35 1.38 169.5 6.67 88 3.46 176 6.93 176 6.93 88 3.46 17.5 0.69 O 25 O 0.98 3 POLES With front terminals O 5.5 - M5 O 0.22 O 5.5 - M5 O 0.22 176 6.93 70 2.76 O 5.5 - M5 O 0.22 88 3.46 35 1.38 O 5.5 - M5 O 0.22 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions T5 (400) FIXED VERSION T5 (400) 3P/4P Fixing on sheet 139.5 (3P) 5.49 69.75 2.75 205 8.07 103.5 4.07 5.5 0.22 59.5 2.34 2.7 0.11 105 4.13 112.5 4.43 46.5 1.83 105 4.13 2.7 0.11 46.5 1.83 2 1 186 (4P) 7.32 2 Nm 102.5 4.04 46.5 1.83 107 4.21 3 0.12 2 0.08 139 5.47 Caption 1 Overall dimensions with cabled accessories mounted (SOR-C, UVR-C) 2 Overall dimensions with cabled auxiliary contacts mounted (only 3Q+1SY) Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/21 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS Front (F) MAX 35 1.38 20 0.79 17.5 0.69 MIN 5 MAX 10 0.39 0.2 28 Nm 86.25 3.4 MAX 11 0.43 O 10.5 O 0.41 Front for Cu cables (FC Cu) 20 0.79 18 x 18 0.71 x 0.71 86.25 3.4 24 0.94 25 Nm Front for CuAl cables (FC CuAl) O 21.5 O 0.85 43.25 1.7 Caption 1 High terminal covers with IP40 protection degree 87 3.43 86.25 3.4 86.25 3.4 1 18 Nm 1 102.5 4.04 43 Nm 42.75 1.68 18 Nm 60 2.36 O 24.5 O 0.96 26.5 1.04 31 Nm 103.5 4.07 Front extended spread (ES) 54 2.13 57.75 2.27 40 1.57 O 11 O 0.43 3.75 0.15 54 2.13 40 1.57 30 1.18 62.25 2.45 62.25 2.45 O 11 O 0.43 57.75 2.27 202 7.95 54 2.13 6 0.24 1 28 Nm 200 7.87 155.5 6.12 Caption 6/22 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 144.75 5.70 102.5 4.04 102.5 4.04 1 Insulating barriers between phases (compulsory) Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS (continued) Front extended (EF) 139.9 (3P) 5.49 46.5 46 1.83 1.83 40.75 1.6 2 30 1.18 30 1.18 6 0.24 172.5 6.79 86.25 3.4 255.5 10.06 205 8.07 60 2.36 28 Nm Caption 127.75 5.03 O 11 O 0.43 102.5 4.04 100 3.94 46.5 1.83 1 High terminal covers with IP40 protection degree 2 Insulating barriers between phases (compulsory without 1) 1 103.5 4.07 69.75 2.75 186 (4P) 7.32 Rear (R) 139.5 (3P) 5.49 8 0.31 209 8.23 172.5 6.79 86.25 3.4 104.5 4.11 103.5 4.07 Caption 1 18 Nm 69.75 2.75 1 186 (4P) 7.32 46.5 46.5 1.83 1.83 46.5 1.83 40 1.57 O 11 O 0.43 70 2.76 115 4.53 50 1.97 135 5.31 30 1.18 Low terminal covers with IP40 protection degree Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/23 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet 3 POLES With front terminals 4 POLES With front terminals DRILLING TEMPLATES 107 4.21 60.5 2.38 115 4.53 64.5 2.54 107 4.21 3 -4 POLE With flange 3 -4 POLE Without flange Flange for the compartment door 76 2.99 138 5.43 117 4.61 6/24 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 93 3.66 46.5 1.83 46.5 1.83 46.5 1.83 46.5 46.5 1.83 1.83 4 POLES With rear terminals 86.25 3.4 88 3.46 86.25 3.4 23.25 0.92 O 35 O 1.38 3 POLES With rear terminals Compartment door 115 4.53 46.5 1.83 172.5 6.79 176 6.93 O 35 O 1.38 O 5.5 - M5 O 0.22 172.5 6.79 88 3.46 23.25 0.92 176 6.93 176 6.93 O 5.5 - M5 O 0.22 176 6.93 93 3.66 O 5.5 - M5 O 0.22 88 3.46 46.5 1.83 88 3.46 O 5.5 - M5 O 0.22 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions T5 (600) FIXED VERSION T5 (600) 3P Fixing on sheet 57.75 2.27 165 6.5 6 57.75 2.27 4 2 101.5 4.0 5 116 4.57 1 3 105 4.13 462 18.19 5.5 0.21 2.7 0.1 59.5 2.34 81 162 3.19 6.38 205 8.07 102.5 4.04 2 8 7 124 4.88 5 6 139.5 5.49 1 4 0.04 0.16 107 4.21 139 65.47 2 0.08 Caption 1 Low terminal covers with IP40 protection degree 2 Tightening torque 2 Nm 3 Tightening torque 31 Nm 4 Terminal cover 5 Insulating barrier + insulating plate 6 Terminals support 7 Spacing when equipped with SOR, UVR 8 Spacing when equipped with AUX (3Q+1SY only) Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/25 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet 1 65.5 2.58 46.5 1.83 176 6.93 420 16.54 Caption 1 O Fixing on sheet steel 5.5 0.22 DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door 1 With flange A A C B B C Without flange mm 115 107 in 4.53 4.21 mm 115 107 in 4.53 4.21 mm 64.5 60.5 in 2.54 2.38 Caption 1 Compartment door sheet steel drilling Flange for the compartment door 117 4.61 76 2.99 1 Caption 138 5.43 1 6/26 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Flange for the compartment door Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions T6 FIXED VERSION T6 3P/4P Fixing on sheet 210 (3P) 8.27 140 5.51 115 4.53 103.5 4.07 61.25 2.41 2.7 0.11 70 2.76 5.5 0.22 105 4.13 2.7 0.11 2 1 280 (4P) 11.02 2 Nm 268 10.55 134 5.28 70 2.76 105 4.13 70 2.76 3 0.12 107 4.21 159 6.26 2 0.08 Caption 1 Overall dimensions with cabled accessories mounted (SOR-C, UVR-C) 2 Overall dimensions with cabled auxiliary contacts mounted (only 3Q+1SY) Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/27 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS Front (F) MAX 40 1.57 O 6.5 O 0.26 23 0.90 MIN 5 MAX 10 0.2 0.39 9 Nm 120.5 4.74 MAX 12 0.47 MIN 18 0.71 22.5 0.89 Front for CuAl cables (FC CuAl) 70 2.76 70 2.76 20 0.79 25.5 1.0 9 Nm 59 2.32 O 19 O 0.75 43 Nm 120.5 4.74 134 5.28 39 1.53 70 2.76 Front extended spread (ES) 134 5.28 88 3.46 23 0.90 45 1.77 45 1.77 90 3.54 90 3.54 45 1.77 O 13 O 0.51 6/28 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 116 4.57 116 4.57 116 4.57 88 3.46 88 3.46 23 0.90 45 1.77 90 3.54 50 1.97 8 0.31 O 13 O 0.51 9 Nm 230.5 9.07 116 4.57 116.5 4.59 116.5 4.59 88 3.46 45 1.77 116 4.57 134 5.28 45 1.77 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS (continued) Front extended (EF) 70 2.76 70 2.76 70 2.76 50 1.97 O 14 O 0.55 33.5 1.32 8 0.31 134 5.28 167.5 6.59 53.5 2.11 9 Nm 48.1 1.89 23.1 0.91 41 1.61 147 5.79 43 Nm 9 Nm 120.5 4.74 70 2.76 137.5 5.41 70 2.76 134 5.28 39.5 1.55 70 2.76 O 17.5 O 0.69 Rear for CuAl cables Rear (R) 280 (4P) 11.02 210 (3P) 8.27 70 2.76 70 2.76 73 2.87 33 1.30 53 2.09 120.5 4.74 O 14 O 0.55 O 14 O 0.55 33 1.30 53 2.09 120.5 4.74 70 2.76 70 2.76 70 2.76 70 2.76 3-4 POLES Horizontally oriented 8 0.31 73 2.87 8 0.31 53 2.09 3-4 POLES Vertically oriented Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/29 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet 237 9.33 O 35 O 1.38 70 2.76 70 2.76 70 2.76 4 POLES With rear terminals DRILLING TEMPLATES Flange for the compartment door 3/4 POLES With flange 77.75 3.06 138 5.43 142 5.59 107 4.21 116 4.57 149 5.87 62.25 2.45 Compartment door 3/4 POLES Without flange 6/30 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 152 5.98 150.5 5.92 118.5 4.66 237 9.33 4 POLES With rear terminals for CuAl cables 8 0.31 70 2.76 3 POLES With rear terminals 66.75 2.63 85.75 3.38 118.5 4.66 120.5 4.74 241 9.49 237 9.33 8 0.31 241 9.49 70 2.76 241.5 9.51 140 5.51 35 1.38 O 5.5 - M5 O 0.22 118.5 4.66 120.5 4.74 O 5.5 - M5 O 0.22 R 21.5 R 0.85 3 POLES With rear terminals for CuAl cables 70 2.76 O 35 O 1.38 171.5 6.75 4 POLES With front terminals 35 1.38 301 11.85 118.5 4.66 150.5 5.92 301 11.85 237 9.33 237 9.33 R 21.5 R 0.85 3 POLES With front terminals O 5.5 - M5 O 0.22 140 5.51 35 1.38 35 1.38 118 4.67 118.5 4.67 O 5.5 - M5 O 0.22 O 5.5 - M5 O 0.22 140 5.51 O 5.5 - M5 O 0.22 237 9.33 70 2.76 70 2.76 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions T7 FIXED VERSION T7 3P/4P Fixing on sheet with front terminals (F) 70 2.76 70 2.76 6 0.24 10 0.39 10 0.39 24 0.94 9 1 2 14.5 0.58 3 4 5 105 4.13 204 8.03 268 10.55 18.75 0.74 102 4.02 103.6 4.08 134 5.28 147.5 5.81 70 2.76 50 1.97 25 0.98 125 4.92 97 3.82 10 0.39 6 8 125 4.92 152 5.98 154.25 6.07 160 6.3 280 11.02 3 0.12 210 8.27 A 7 225 8.86 With flange A (mm) A (in) 2 0.08 Without flange 125...141 147 4.92...5.55 5.79 190 7.48 206 8.11 Caption 1 Front terminals for flat connection 2 Busbars 3 Tightening torque 18 Nm 4 Flange for the compartment door 5 Padlock (optional) 6 Key lock (optional) 7 Flange fixing screws 8 Tightening torque 2.5 Nm 9 Terminal for auxiliary contacts Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/31 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS Front for CuAl cables (FC CuAl) 320 12.6 250 9.84 101 3.98 125 4.92 70 2.76 70 2.76 70 2.76 28 1.10 1 34.75 0.52 66.25 2.61 1 0.04 2 150 5.9 3 79 3.11 202 7.95 4 O 21.5 O 0.85 Caption 1 Protection plate 2 Front terminals for cables FC CuAl 3 Tightening torque 43 Nm 4 Tightening torque 18 Nm 6/32 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS (continued) Front extended spread (ES) 116 / 4.57 116 116 / 4.57 10 40.5 90 / 3.54 90 / 3.54 90 / 3.54 / 4.57 O O 0 13 .51 100 45 1.77 7 15 258 10.16 334 79 3.11 144 5.67 189 7.44 45 1.77 33 1.3 55 2.17 118.5 134 5.28 79 3.11 100 3.94 2 23 0.91 45 1.77 45 1.77 147.5 5.81 ~200 ~10.16 23 268 10.55 100 3.94 X X Front extended (EF) 320 12.6 70 2.76 25 0.98 250 9.84 70 2.76 Y 125 70 4.92 2.76 44 1.73 1 O 11 O 0.43 9 100 3.94 29.5 29.5 15 0.59 8 1 X X 250 9.84 118.5 4.66 79 3.11 12.5 0.49 160.5 6.32 199.5 7.85 229 9.02 25 0.98 7 X X Caption 1 Extended front terminals EF 2 Extended spread front terminals ES 6 Drilling template for fixing on support sheet 7 Tightening torque 18 Nm 8 Phase separator 100 mm 9 Protection plate 10 Phase seperator 200 mm 13 Clamp for auxiliary contacts Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/33 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS (continued) Rear terminal HR or VR 59 2.32 2 3 109 4.29 218 8.58 18.5 0.73 25 0.98 15 0.59 237 9.34 273 10.75 118.5 4.66 44 1.73 1 70 2.76 44 1.73 70 2.76 25 1 0.98 O 11 O 0.43 46.5 1.84 70 2.76 2 70 2.76 70 2.76 70 2.76 15 0.59 Caption 1 Rear horizontal terminals 2 Rear vertical terminals 3 Tightening torque 20 Nm 6/34 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL O 11 O 0.43 46.5 1.84 59 2.32 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS (continued) Rear adjustable (R) 59 2.32 3 70 2.76 2 2 70 2.76 3.75 0.15 15 0.59 106 4.17 212 8.35 254.5 10.02 277 10.90 127.25 5.01 44 1.73 1 70 2.76 23.5 0.92 15 0.59 1.5 0.06 18.5 0.73 70 2.76 70 2.76 44 1.73 70 2.76 23.5 1.5 0.92 0.06 R 5.5 R 5.5 46.5 1.84 59 2.32 70 2.76 70 2.76 3.75 0.15 70 2.76 46.5 1.84 1 Caption 1 Rear horizontal terminals 2 Rear vertical terminals 3 Tightening torque 20 Nm Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/35 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet B B DRILLING TEMPLATES 42.75 1.68 59.75 2.35 140 5.51 192.5 262.5 7.58 10.33 144.5 5.69 O 4 O 0.16 With reduced flange 144.5 5.69 263 10.35 208 8.19 19.75 0.78 107 4.21 70 A 241 9.49 226 8.9 192 7.56 24.25 0.95 R 10 With standard flange Flange for the compartment door (supplied as standard) 268 10.55 2 0.08 Standard flange 6/36 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 1 35.25 1.39 138 5.43 304 11.97 152 5.98 155 8.10 Caption 203 7.99 1 Reduced flange (optional) 4 poles 2.76 With rear adjustable terminals (R) Compartment door 116 4.57 A mm A in B mm B in 206 8.11 With rear terminals (HR/VR) 201 7.91 122.5 4.82 8 0.31 O 5.5 M5 O 0.22 151 5.94 With front terminals (F/ES/EF) 17.5 0.69 R 10 A 35 1.38 3 poles 103 4.05 O 5.5 M5 O 0.22 245 9.65 35 1.38 17.5 0.69 O 5.5 M5 O 0.22 61.25 2.41 52.5 2.07 245 9.65 35 1.38 122.5 4.82 245 9.65 122.5 4.82 8 0.31 A 39.75 1.56 61.25 2.41 Reduced flange (optional) Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions T7M FIXED VERSION T7M 3P/4P Fixing on sheet with front terminals (F) 10 0.39 9 1 4 10 0.39 204 8.03 237 9.34 268 10.55 10 0.39 24 0.94 102 4.02 103.6 4.08 6 70 0.24 2.76 70 2.76 2 3 14.5 0.58 25 0.98 134 5.28 147.5 5.81 70 2.76 118.5 4.66 50 1.97 125 4.92 97 3.82 5 6 8 7 3 0.12 A 193.5 7.62 B 175 6.89 178 7.01 125 4.92 280 11.02 210 8.27 190 7.48 206 8.11 A mm A in B mm B in 2 0.08 With flange Without flange 125...184 170 4.92...7.24 6.7 Standard Ronis Profalux Kirk Castell 208 216 224 no no 8.19 8.5 8.82 no no Caption 1 Front terminals for flat connection 2 Busbars 3 Tightening torque 18 Nm 4 Flange for the compartment door 5 Padlock (optional) 6 Key lock (optional) 7 Flange fixing screws 8 Tightening torque 2.5 Nm 9 Terminal for auxiliary contacts Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/37 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS Front for CuAl cables (FC CuAl) 320 12.6 70 2.76 70 2.76 250 9.84 70 2.76 125 4.92 28 1.10 1 34.75 0.52 1 101 3.98 66.25 2.61 0.04 2 150 5.9 3 79 3.11 202 7.95 4 O 21.5 O 0.85 Caption 1 Protection plate 2 Front terminals for cables FC CuAl 3 Tightening torque 43 Nm 4 Tightening torque 18 Nm 6/38 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS (continued) Front extended spread (ES) 320 12.6 90 3.54 116 4.57 90 3.54 250 9.84 116 4.57 90 3.54 23 0.90 116 4.57 100 3.94 90 3.54 3 O 13 O 0.51 40.5 1.59 1 45 1.77 45 1.77 45 1.77 2 15 0.59 118.5 4.66 79 3.11 79 3.11 79 3.11 229 9.02 258 10.16 278 10.94 33 1.30 334 13.15 45 1.77 Front extended (EF) 320 12.6 250 9.84 70 2.76 25 0.98 70 2.76 1 0.04 125 70 4.92 2.76 44 1.73 O 11 O 0.43 100 3.94 29.5 1.16 15 0.59 6 4 5 250 9.84 7 118.5 4.66 79 3.11 12.5 160.5 0.49 6.32 199.5 7.85 229 9.02 25 0.98 2 Caption 1 Rear spread terminals ES 2 Tightening torque 18 Nm 3 Phase seperators 200 mm 4 Protection plate 5 Extended fron terminals EF 6 Phase seperators 100 mm 7 Clamp for auxiliary contacts Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/39 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS (continued) Rear terminal HR or VR 59 2.32 3 2 109 4.29 218 8.58 237 9.34 273 10.75 118.5 4.66 44 1.73 1 25 0.98 15 0.59 18.5 0.73 O 11 O 0.43 70 2.76 44 1.73 70 2.76 1 25 O 11 O 0.43 0.98 46.5 1.84 70 2.76 70 2.76 70 2.76 70 2.76 15 0.59 2 Caption 1 Rear horizontal terminals 2 Rear vertical terminals 3 Tightening torque 20 Nm 6/40 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 46.5 1.84 59 2.32 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS (continued) Rear adjustable (R) 59 2.32 3 2 70 2.76 70 2.76 70 2.76 3.75 0.15 15 0.59 106 4.17 212 8.35 254.5 10.02 273 10.75 127.25 5.01 44 1.73 1 2 23.5 0.92 1.5 0.06 15 0.59 18.5 0.73 R 5.5 44 1.73 70 2.76 70 2.76 23.5 1.5 0.92 0.06 70 2.76 3.75 0.15 70 2.76 70 2.76 R 5.5 1 46.5 1.84 70 2.76 46.5 1.84 59 2.32 Caption 1 Rear horizontal terminals 2 Rear vertical terminals 3 Tightening torque 20 Nm Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/41 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES 8 0.31 122.5 4.82 245 9.65 245 9.65 122.5 4.82 35 1.38 35 1.38 17.5 0.69 O 5.5 M5 O 0.22 O 5.5 M5 O 0.22 With front terminals (F) 52.5 2.07 61.25 2.41 A 39.75 1.56 Support sheet R 10 3 poles A mm A in B mm B in 140 2.76 5.51 192.5 262.5 7.58 10.33 A With rear terminals (R/HR/VR) DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door 206 8.11 103 4.05 208 8.19 263 10.35 151 5.94 241 9.49 226 8.9 144.5 5.69 144.5 5.69 O 4 O 0.16 With flange Without flange Flange for the compartment door (supplied as standard) 304 11.97 152 5.98 268 10.55 6/42 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 4 poles 70 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions T8 FIXED VERSION T8 3P/4P Fixing on sheet with front terminals (F) 1600/2000/2500A Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/43 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS Rear vertical terminals VR (1600/2000/2500A) 6/44 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS (continued) Rear vertical terminals VR (3000A) Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/45 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet With front terminals (F) With rear terminals (F) DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door 6/46 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions T2 PLUG-IN VERSION T2 3P/4P Fixing on sheet 4 3 1 2 Caption 1 Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit breaker with face not extending from the compartment door, with or without flange 2 Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit breaker with face extending from the compartment door, without flange 3 Cradle 4 Moving part with terminal covers, degree of protection IP40 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/47 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS Front (F) 6 Nm Front for Cu cables (FC Cu) Front for CuAl cables (FC CuAl) 5.6 Nm Front extended spread (ES) 57.25 6 Nm 1 6/48 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 18 Nm Caption 1 Insulating barrier between phases (compulsory) Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS (continued) Front extended (EF) 2 9 Nm Caption High terminal covers with IP40 protection degree 2 Insulating barriers between phases (compulsory without 1) 6 Nm 1 1 1 9 Nm Rear (R) Caption 1 Low terminal covers with IP40 protection degree Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/49 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet 3 poles with front terminals (F) 4 poles with front terminals (F) 3 poles with rear terminals (R) DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door 3-4 poles with flange and circuit breaker face flush with door 3-4 poles without flange and circuit breaker face flush with door 3 poles with flange and circuit breaker face extending Flange for the compartment door 6/50 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 4 poles with flange and circuit breaker face extending 4 poles with rear terminals (R) Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions T3 PLUG-IN VERSION T3 3P/4P Fixing on sheet 3 1 4 2 Caption 1 Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit breaker with face not extending from the compartment door, with or without flange 2 Depth of the switchboard in the case of circuit breaker with face extending from the compartment door, without flange 3 Cradle 4 Moving part with terminal covers, degree of protection IP40 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/51 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS Front (F) 8 Nm Front for Cu cables (FC Cu) Front for CuAl cables (FC CuAl) 10 0.39 Front extended spread (ES) 1 18 Nm Caption 8 Nm 1 6/52 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Insulating barrier between phases (compulsory) Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS (continued) Front extended (EF) 2 18 Nm Caption High terminal covers with IP40 protection degree 2 Insulating barriers between phases (compulsory without 1) 8 Nm 1 1 Rear (R) 1 Caption 1 9 Nm Low terminal covers with IP40 protection degree 6 Nm Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/53 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet 3 poles with front terminals (F) 4 poles with front terminals (F) 3 poles with rear terminals (R) DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door 3-4 poles with flange and circuit breaker face flush with door 3-4 poles without flange and circuit breaker face flush with door 3 poles with flange and circuit breaker face extending Flange for the compartment door 6/54 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 4 poles with flange and circuit breaker face extending 4 poles with rear terminals (R) Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions Ts3 PLUG-IN VERSION Ts3 3P/4P Fixing on sheet Y 117 4.61 (4 POLES) B = A (3 POLES) = 1 3 3 0.12 2 D 3 H I o O off X C E = 4 = G = E 4 105 4.13 161 6.34 = 153 6.02 156.5 6.16 184.5 7.26 E F 105 4.13 Y X 2 0.08 Letter A B C D E F G H mm 105 140 175 89.75 35 52.5 143 84 in 4.13 5.51 6.89 3.53 1.38 2.07 5.63 3.31 Caption 1 Cradle 2 Moving part complete with IP20 protection terminal covers 3 Flange for compartment door 4 Tightening torque 1.1 Nm Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/55 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS Front (F) 31 1.22 17.5 0.69 I M L L N Front for Cu cables (FC Cu) Q R P L S Rear threaded (R) A 31 1.22 U V 83 3.27 Z Letter I L M N O P Q R S U V Z mm in 10 0.39 33.5 1.32 O8.5 O0.33 20 0.79 5 0.20 37.5 1.48 79.5 3.13 36 1.42 18x18 0.71x0.71 48 1.89 M12 100 3.94 6/56 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet (minimum thickness of sheet metal 0.12" / 3mm) Y A B (3 POLES) A B Y (3 POLES) (4 POLES) (4 POLES) F G D X D C C H X F E N I E Y L (3 POLES) M (4 POLES) Y For front terminals For rear threaded terminals DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door (minimum thickness of sheet metal 0.08" / 2mm) Y 112 = 4.41 = 80 = 3.15 = 112 4.41 X = O7 O 0.28 142 5.59 = = X = Y Letter A B C D E mm in 70 2.76 105 4.13 100 3.94 52.25 2.06 25 0.98 F G 73.75 M4-O5 M4-O0.20 2.90 H I L M N 143 5.63 35 1.36 70 2.76 105 4.13 R14 R0.55 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/57 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions T4 PLUG-IN VERSION T4 3P/4P Fixing on sheet 1 3 2 4 Caption 1 Fixed part 2 Moving part with terminal covers with IP40 protection degree 3 Overall dimensions with cabled accessories mounted (SOR-C, UVR-C) 4 Overall dimensions with cabled auxiliary contacts mounted (only 3Q+1SY) 6/58 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS Front for Cu or CuAl cables (FC Cu or CuAl) Caption 1 1 For Cu cables 2 For CuAl cables 3 High terminal covers with IP40 protection degree 2 3 Front extended (EF) Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/59 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS (continued) Rear vertical (VR) Rear horizontal (HR) 6/60 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet 3 poles with front terminals (FC Cu/ CuAl) 4 poles with front terminals (FC Cu/ CuAl) 3 poles with rear terminals (HR/VR) 4 poles with rear terminals (HR/VR) DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door With flange Without flange Flange for the compartment door Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/61 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions T5 (400) PLUG-IN VERSION T5 3P/4P Fixing on sheet 1 3 2 4 Caption 1 Fixed part 2 Moving part with terminal covers with IP40 protection degree 3 Overall dimensions with cabled accessories mounted (SOR-C, UVR-C) 4 Overall dimensions with cabled auxiliary contacts mounted (only 3Q+1SY) 6/62 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS Front for Cu or CuAl cables (FC Cu or CuAl) 1 Caption 3 1 For Cu cables 2 For CuAl cables 3 High terminal covers with IP40 protection degree 2 Front extended (EF) Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/63 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS (continued) Rear vertical (VR) Rear horizontal (HR) 6/64 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet 3 poles with front terminals (FC Cu/ CuAl) 4 poles with front terminals (FC Cu/ CuAl) 3 poles with rear terminals (HR/VR) Dimensions A B C D E mm in 32.5 128.5 143 172.5 64.5 1.28 5.06 5.63 6.79 2.54 4 poles with rear terminals (HR/VR) DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door With flange Without flange Flange for the compartment door Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/65 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions Ts3 DRAW OUT VERSION Ts3 3P/4P 27.5 1.08 isolating travel 4 Y B 3 0.12 2 D T Note G O 5.5 1.75 O 0.22 0.07 161 6.34 105 4.13 3 = 5 = = (3 POLES) = 1 X (4 POLES) A C X 5 2 0.08 167 6.57 190 7.48 195.5 7.70 E E E F 105 4.13 H 74 2.91 Y 96 3.78 Dimensions A B C D E F G H mm in 105 4.13 140 5.51 175 6.89 89.75 3.53 35 1.38 52.5 2.07 143 5.63 84 3.31 Caption 1 Cradle 2 Moving part with terminal covers with IP20 protection degree 3 Flange for compartment door 4 Lock for compartment door (ordered seperately) 5 Tightening torque 1.1 Nm 6/66 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL The draw out circuit breaker must be completed with one of the following accessories: - Front flange for operating lever mechanism - Rotary handle operating mechanism - Motor operator Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS Front (F) 31 1.22 17.5 0.69 I M L L N Front for Cu cables (FC Cu) Q R P L S Rear threaded (R) A 31 1.22 U V 83 3.27 Z Letter I L mm in 10 0.39 33.5 1.32 M N O P Q R S U V Z O8.5 O0.33 20 0.79 5 0.20 37.5 1.48 79.5 3.13 36 1.42 18x18 0.71x0.71 48 1.89 M12 100 3.94 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/67 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet (minimum thickness of sheet metal 0.12" / 3mm) Y A B (3 POLES) A B Y (3 POLES) (4 POLES) (4 POLES) F G D X D C C H X F E N I E Y L (3 POLES) M (4 POLES) Y For front terminals For rear threaded terminals DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door and fitting flange (minimum thickness of sheet metal 0.08" / 2mm) O4 O 0.16 94 3.70 = X = 45 1.77 Nr. 3 O 8 O 0.31 27.5 1.08 16 0.63 O7 O 0.28 = 142 5.59 72.5 2.85 126 4.96 Y 135 5.31 63 2.48 X = 81 3.19 125 4.92 R min.200 7.87 Y Dimensions A B C D E mm in 70 2.76 105 4.13 100 3.94 52.25 2.06 25 0.98 6/68 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL F G M4-O5 73.75 M4-O0.20 2.90 H I L M N 143 5.63 35 1.38 70 2.76 105 4.13 R14 R0.55 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions T4 DRAW OUT VERSION T4 3P/4P Fixing on sheet isolating distance 3 2 1 3 4 Caption 1 Fixed part 2 Moving part 3 Lock for compartment door (available on request) 4 Overall dimensions with cabled accessories mounted (SOR-C, UVRC) Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/69 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS Front for Cu Cables (FC-Cu) Front for CuAl cables (FC CuAl) Front extended (EF) 6/70 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS (continued) Rear vertical (VR) Rear horizontal (HR) Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/71 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet 3 poles with front terminals 4 poles with front terminals DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door Flange for the compartment door 6/72 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 3 poles with rear terminals (HR/VR) 4 poles with rear terminals (HR/VR) Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions T5 DRAW OUT VERSION T5 3P/4P Fixing on sheet isolating distance 3 2 3 1 4 Caption 1 Fixed part 2 Moving part 3 Lock for compartment door (available on request) 4 Overall dimensions with cabled accessories mounted (SOR-C, UVRC) Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/73 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS Front for Cu or CuAl Cables (FC-Cu/CuAL) 1 Caption 3 2 Front extended (EF) 6/74 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 1 For Cu cables 2 For CuAl cables 3 High terminal covers with IP40 protection degree Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS (continued) Rear vertical (VR) Rear horizontal (HR) Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/75 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet 3 poles with front terminals (FC Cu/ CuAl) 4 poles with front terminals (FC Cu/ CuAl) 3 poles with rear terminals (HR/VR) Dimensions A B C D E mm in 32.5 128.5 143 172.5 64.5 1.28 5.06 5.63 6.79 2.54 DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door Flange for the compartment door 6/76 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 4 poles with rear terminals (HR/VR) Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions T6 DRAW OUT VERSION 70 2.76 70 2.76 4 3 0.12 70 2.76 5 0.20 145 5.71 208 8.19 295 11.61 1 77 3.03 2 140 5.51 84.5 3.33 3 3 273 10.75 27.5 isolating distance 1.08 280 (4P) 11.02 (4P) 210 (3P) 8.27 (3P) 144.75 5.7 T6 3P/4P Fixing on sheet 2 0.08 167 6.57 190.5 7.5 196 7.72 4 35.5 1.4 123.5 4.86 193.5 7.62 136.5 5.37 Caption 1 Fixed part 2 Moving part 3 Lock for compartment door (available on request) 4 Overall dimensions with cabled accessories mounted (SOR-C, UVRC) Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/77 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS Front extended (EF) 70 2.76 3 0.12 70 2.76 70 2.76 40 1.57 14 0.55 1 72.5 6.79 20 0.79 31 1.22 10 0.39 Rear vertical (VR) 20 0.79 80.5 3.17 10 0.39 3 0.12 70 2.76 70 2.76 40 1.57 70 2.76 14 0.55 Rear horizontal (HR) 3 0.12 80.5 3.17 20 0.79 40 1.57 70 2.76 14 0.55 6/78 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 70 2.76 70 2.76 10 0.39 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet 210 8.27 140 5.51 70 2.76 R2 R 0.08 120 4.72 144 5.67 8.5 - M8 0.33 - M8 77.5 3.05 214 8.43 120 4.72 144 5.67 77.5 3.05 77.5 3.05 77.5 3.05 R2 R 0.08 8.5 - M8 0.33 - M8 284 11.15 3 poles 107 4.21 4 poles DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door 96.5 3.8 32 1.26 14 0.55 18.5 0.73 150 5.91 89.5 3.52 43 1.69 18 0.71 = 148.5 = 5.85 122 4.8 R min. 200 R min. 7.87 Flange for the compartment door 173 6.81 100.25 3.95 210 8.27 75.25 2.96 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/79 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions T7 DRAW OUT VERSION T7 3P/4P Fixing on sheet with front extended (EF) 348 13.7 278 10.94 70 2.76 70 2.76 70 2.76 155.5 6.12 D 251 9.88 1 1 15 0.59 2 4 2 3 10 10 5 8 25 0.98 3 0.12 0.98 12.5 25 0.49 44 1.73 Caption 1 Insulating protection 2 Auxiliary contact terminal 3 Rear segragation for front terminals 4 Front terminals 5 Flange for compartment door 6 Flange fixing screws (tightening torque 1.5 Nm) 7 Tightening torque 21 Nm 8 Rear vertical terminals 9 Rear horizontal terminals 10 Segregation for rear terminals 6/80 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 99 3.9 99 3.9 44 1.73 198 7.8 20 0.79 O 5.5 M5 O 0.22 14 0.55 29 1.14 47 7 1.85 49 154 6.06 2 1.93 104.5 0.08 4.11 Dimensions Standard D mm D in 15 0.59 25 0.98 198 7.8 363.25 14.3 6 5 M 5.5 .22 O 0 O 35 1.38 159.5 6.28 239.5 9.43 343 13.5 554 21.81 9 Ronis Profalux Kirk 287 291 299 298 Castell 328 11.3 11.46 11.77 11.73 12.91 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS Rear spreaded (RS) 90 3.54 90 3.54 25 0.98 25 0.98 O 11 O 0.43 59 2.32 41.5 1.63 77.5 3.05 90 3.54 25 0.98 17 90 3.54 90 3.54 25 0.98 2.5 0.1 25 0.98 90 3.54 25 0.98 O 11 O 0.43 67 2.64 41.5 1.63 80.5 3.17 90 3.54 25 0.98 15 Rear vertical (VR) 15 0.59 36 1.42 206 8.11 Rear horizontal (HR) 44 1.73 11 3 0.4 29 1.14 25 0.98 16.5 0.65 9 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/81 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet 50 1.97 20 0.79 Dimensions 109.5 4.31 100 3.94 99.5 3.92 199 7.83 O7 8 O0.2 460 18.11 115 4.53 230 9.06 30 1.18 100 3.94 14 103 4.06 11 B C DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door 278.5 10.96 165.5 6.52 4 O 16 0. 160.75 6.33 256.5 10.1 144.5 5.69 16.25 0.64 160.75 6.33 O 153.75 6.05 26.25 1.03 153.75 6.05 R min 200 R min 7.87 Flange for the compartment door 152 5.98 336.5 13.25 320.5 134 12.62 5.28 6/82 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 80 3.15 O O0 10 .39 A mm A in B mm B in C mm C in 3 poles 4 poles 160 230 6.3 9.05 206 276 8.11 10.87 219 289 8.62 11.38 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions T7 DRAW OUT VERSION T7 3P/4P Fixing on sheet with front extended (EF) 348 13.7 278 10.94 70 2.76 70 2.76 70 2.76 305 12.01 E 155.5 6.12 10 1 1 4 2 10 8 9 2 O 25 0.98 Caption 1 Insulating protection 2 Auxiliary contact terminal 3 Rear segragation for front terminals 15 0.59 25 0.98 102 204 4.02 8.03 363.25 14.3 343 13.5 44 1.73 11 14 O 5.5 M5 O 0.22 29 0.55 159.5 6.28 3 0.12 0.49 25 M5 5.5 O 0.22 35 1.38 47 7 1.85 49 154 6.06 249 9.8 275.5 1.14 12 6 0.98 12.5 239.5 9.43 554 21.81 20 0.79 198 7.8 5 99 3.9 99 3.9 44 1.73 3 1.93 64.5 42 2 1.65 0.08 2.54 10.85 D Dimensions Standard D mm D in E mm E in Ronis Profalux Kirk Castell 290 298 306 - - 11.42 11.73 12.05 - - 287 291 299 298 328 11.3 11.46 11.77 11.73 12.91 4 Front terminals 5 Flange for compartment door 6 Flange fixing screws (tightening torque 1.5 Nm) 7 Tightening torque 21 Nm 8 Rear vertical terminals 9 Rear horizontal terminals 10 Segregation for rear terminals 11 Padlock (optional) 12 Key lock (optional) Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/83 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions TERMINALS Rear spreaded (RS) 90 3.54 90 3.54 25 0.98 25 0.98 O 11 O 0.43 59 2.32 41.5 1.63 77.5 3.05 90 3.54 25 0.98 19 90 3.54 90 3.54 25 0.98 2.5 0.1 25 0.98 90 3.54 25 0.98 O 11 O 0.43 67 2.64 41.5 1.63 80.5 3.17 90 3.54 25 0.98 17 Rear vertical (VR) 15 0.59 35 1.38 190 7.48 206 8.11 44 1.73 1 O1 3 .4 O0 29 1.14 25 0.98 16.5 0.65 Rear horizontal (HR) 6/84 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet 50 1.97 16 230 9.06 Dimensions 109.5 4.31 103 4.06 13 100 3.94 99.5 3.92 199 7.83 O7 8 O0.2 460 18.11 115 4.53 30 1.18 20 0.79 80 3.15 O O0 10 .39 A mm A in B mm B in C mm C in 3 poles 4 poles 160 230 6.3 9.05 206 276 8.11 10.87 219 289 8.62 11.38 B C DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door 160.75 6.33 256.5 10.1 144.5 5.69 16.25 0.64 160.75 6.33 278.5 10.96 165.5 6.52 153.75 6.05 26.25 1.03 153.75 6.05 R min 200 R min 7.87 Flange for the compartment door 320.5 12.62 152 5.98 336.5 13.25 134 5.28 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/85 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T1-T2-T3 Solenoid operator superimposed (fixed version) T1 T2 Caption 3 4 1 1 Depth of the switchboard with operating mechanism face extending 2 Depth of the switchboard with operating mechanism face flush with door 3 Low terminal covers with IP40 protection degree 4 Insulating plate 2 T3 3 Caption 4 1 6/86 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 2 1 Depth of the switchboard with operating mechanism face extending 2 Depth of the switchboard with operating mechanism face flush with door 3 Low terminal covers with IP40 protection degree 4 Insulating plate Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door (for operating mechanism) Dimensions T1 mm T1 in T2 mm T2 in T3 mm T3 in Without flange Operating mechanism face extending Without flange Operating mechanism face flush with door A B C 33.5 18 23.5 1.32 0.71 0.93 33.5 18 23.5 1.32 0.71 0.93 29 13.5 19 1.14 0.53 0.75 With flange Operating mechanism face flush with door Flange for the compartment door Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/87 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T1-T2-T3 Solenoid operator side by side (Fixed version) T1 101.2 3.98 76.2 3 25 25 25 0.98 0.98 0.98 Dimensions 83.1 3.27 76.2 3 105 4.13 134 5.28 17 0.67 45 1.77 67 2.64 70 2.76 3P (1) mm 3P (1) in 3P (2) mm 3P (2) in 4P (1) mm 4P (1) in 4P (2) mm 4P (2) in A 79 3.11 71 2.79 79 3.11 71 2.79 Caption 3 0.12 3 2 0.08 1 2 DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet 65 2.26 25 38.1 0.98 1.5 107 4.21 53.5 2.11 41.5 1.63 83 3.27 O 4.5 - M4 O 0.18 3 Poles 4 Poles DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door (for operating mechanism) 47 1.85 18 0.71 122.2 4.81 Dimensions 3P mm 3P in 4P mm 4P in 6/88 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 65 2.26 41.5 1.63 83 3.27 25 38.1 0.98 1.5 107 4.21 53.5 2.11 O 4.5 - M4 O 0.18 B 161.3 6.35 161.3 6.35 1 Circuit breaker with face extending 2 Circuit breaker with face flush with door 3 Low terminal covers with IP40 protection degree Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T1-T2-T3 Solenoid operator side by side (Fixed version) T2 30 1.18 17 0.67 67 2.68 30 1.18 70 2.76 105 4.13 134 5.28 76.2 3 45 1.77 90 3.54 30 1.18 Dimensions 76.2 3 120 4.72 3P (1) mm 3P (1) in 3P (2) mm 3P (2) in 4P (1) mm 4P (1) in 4P (2) mm 4P (2) in A 79 3.11 71 2.79 79 3.11 71 2.79 Caption 3 0.12 3 2 0.08 1 2 1 Circuit breaker with face extending 2 Circuit breaker with face flush with door 3 Low terminal covers with IP40 protection degree DRILLING TEMPLATES 83 3.27 30 30 35.6 1.18 1.18 1.4 65 2.26 3 Poles 41.5 1.63 O 4.5 - M4 O 0.18 83 3.27 65 2.26 107 4.21 53.5 2.11 30 35.6 1.18 1.4 107 4.21 53.5 2.11 O 4.5 - M4 O 0.18 41.5 1.63 Support sheet 4 Poles DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door (for operating mechanism) 47 1.85 18 0.71 122.2 4.81 Dimensions 3P mm 3P in 4P mm 4P in B 161.3 6.35 161.3 6.35 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/89 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T1-T2-T3 Rotary handle on compartment door (mechanism + handle + shaft) T1 - T2 - T3 2 1 Dimensions A T1-T2 mm T1-T2 in T3 mm T3 in 28 Heights for door with maximum distance 1.28 1 Mechanism 2 Rotary handle on door 3 Insulating plate 470.5 18.52 with 6.3 (7.01 with IP54) 3 60.5 (87 with IP54) 2.38 (3.43 with IP54) DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door (for operating mechanism) 6/90 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 32.5 Caption 3 Minimum rotation radius for door fulcrum 1.10 Dimensions B T1-T2 mm T1-T2 in T3 mm T3 in 14 0.55 9.5 0.37 Heights for door with minimum distance Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T1-T2-T3 Rotary handle on breaker T1 - T2 - T3 Dimensions B T1-T2 mm T1-T2 in T3 mm T3 in 28 1.10 32.5 1.28 2 Caption 1 1 Rotary handle mechanism 2 Insulating plate DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door Drilling: see detail "A" Flange for the compartment door Dimensions T1-T2 mm T1-T2 in T3 mm T3 in A 67.7 2.67 63.2 2.49 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/91 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T1-T2-T3 Mechanical front interlock plate between 2 circuit breakers (T1-T2-T3) 305 12.01 1 Caption 1 Insulating plate Mechanical front interlock plate between 3 circuit breakers (T1-T2-T3) 470 18.5 1 Caption 1 Insulating plate 6/92 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet For 2 circuit breakers Dimensions T1 mm T1 in T2 mm T2 in T3 mm T3 in For 3 circuit breakers A B C D E F 52.5 77.5 112.5 87.5 53.5 53.5 2.07 3.05 4.43 3.44 2.11 2.11 50 80 115 85 53.5 53.5 1.97 3.15 4.53 3.35 2.11 2.11 47.5 82.5 117.5 82.5 56.5 65.5 1.87 3.25 4.63 3.25 2.22 2.58 DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door 307 12.09 For 2 circuit breakers 472 18.52 For 3 circuit breakers Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/93 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T1-T2-T3 Mechanical rear horizontal interlock between 2 circuit breakers (T3) 99.25 3.91 440 17.32 400 15.75 Caption 400 15.75 68.5 2.7 134.25 5.28 7 O 0.28 O 1 Interlocking mech. 2 Adaptor plate 3 drilling template for all terminal versions 165 6.5 56 2.2 330 12.99 300 11.81 300 11.81 165 6.5 88 3.46 2 88 3.46 0 R 3 .18 R1 3 65 2.56 1 Mechanical rear vertical interlock between 2 circuit breakers (T3) 228 8.98 190 7.48 Z 190 165 7.48 6.5 O 65 2.56 O 88 3.46 7 8 2 0. R R 3 1. 0 18 88 3.46 540 21.26 88 3.46 56 2.20 1 K 28 1.1 K K 3 88 3.46 K 540 21.26 590 23.23 56 2.20 2 Caption 25 0.98 Z The mechanical rear vertical interlock for Tmax T3 is not compatible with the RC221 and RC222 residual current releases 6/94 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 1 Interlocking mech. 2 Adaptor plate 3 drilling template for all terminal versions Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T1-T2-T3 Protection kit IP42 T1 Fixed 101.2 3.98 68 2.68 68 2.68 25 0.98 32.5 1.28 76.2 2.99 25 0.98 25 0.98 65 2.56 (1) (0.04) 76 3 130 5.12 36.5 1.44 Caption >3 > 0.12 1 IP42 protection. 2 Compartment door drilling 70 2.76 2 0.08 88.5 3.48 103.2 4.06 T2 Fixed 68 2.68 120 4.72 30 1.18 68 2.68 30 1.18 32.5 1.28 90 3.54 30 1.18 65 2.56 (1) (0.04) 76 3 130 5.12 36.5 1.44 Caption >3 > 0.12 1 IP42 protection. 2 Compartment door drilling 70 2.76 88.5 3.48 103.2 4.06 2 0.08 T3 Fixed 68 2.68 140 5.51 68 2.68 35 1.38 (1) (0.04) Caption 76 3 150 5.9 32 1.26 75 2.95 35 1.38 28 1.1 105 4.13 35 1.38 >3 > 0.12 1 IP42 protection. 2 Compartment door drilling 70 2.76 88.5 3.48 103.2 4.06 2 0.08 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/95 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES Ts3 Motor operator for fixed circuit breaker Y 2 0.08 220 8.66 = Caption (4 POLES) A B Y 112 4.41 = = 80 3.15 (3 POLES) = C 1 = 2 3 = = 112 4.41 142 5.59 161 6.34 X = = = = O7 O 0.28 1 Flange for compartment door. 2 Dimensions with connectors 3 Drilling of compartment door X = Dimensions A B C mm in 140 5.51 105 4.13 58 2.28 Y 105 4.13 225.5 8.88 = 117 = 4.61 Y Motor operator for plug in circuit breakers Y 27.5 1.08 isolating stroke = (3 POLES) = C Y 1 2 A 105 4.13 = Caption 3 112 = 4.41 = 80 = 3.15 = = 161 6.34 = X B = 269.5 10.61 2 0.08 (4 POLES) A = O7 O 0.28 = 117 = Flange for compartment door. 2 Dimensions with connectors 3 Drilling of compartment door = 112 142 X 4.41 5.59 = 1 = Dimensions A B C mm in 140 5.51 105 4.13 58 2.28 Y 4.61 Y Motor operator for draw out circuit breakers 96 3.78 A = (4 POLES) B (3 POLES) = 1 C O7 O 0.28 = 1.75 0.07 = 126 4.96 o5.5 o0.22 = = 2 167 6.57 94 3.70 = 161 6.34 X 105 4.13 = Y 135 5.31 63 2.48 Y 6/96 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 16 0.63 Caption Nr. 3 O 8 O 0.31 27.25 1.07 142 5.59 269.5 10.61 2 0.08 Y 78.5 3.09 27.5 1.08 isolating stroke O7 81 O 0.28 3.19 125 4.92 R min. 200 7.87 Y 1 Flange for compartment door. 2 Drilling of compartment door = = X Dimensions A B C mm in 140 5.51 105 4.13 58 2.28 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES Ts3 Mechanical interlock between 2 horizontal circuit breakers Y = B Y = A B B C = = B B = Caption P B N E F 105 4.13 X = M D N L X G = 1 Interlock device R 2 Drilling template mounting holes in sheet metal 3 Drilling template all versions with rear terminals 4 Dimensions with 4 pole drawout version mounted on right 5 Tightening torque 3.7 Nm X Q I O R Y = 1 1 H 4 2 275 10.83 Y O7 O 0.28 3 Y 65 103.5 2.56 4.07 5 Y 27.5 1.08 Dimensions A mm in B C D E F G H I L M N O P Q R 350 35 66 265 134.5 87.2 170 12 227.5 116 324 155 R15 16 68 75 13.78 1.38 2.60 10.43 5.30 3.43 6.69 0.47 8.96 4.57 12.76 6.10 R0.59 0.63 2.68 2.95 Mechanical interlock between 2 vertical circuit breakers Y 103.5 65 4.07 2.56 Y = A = 2 = 5 H N = Caption 3 Q P M 1 Interlock device 2 Drilling template mounting holes in sheet metal 3 Drilling template all versions with rear terminals 4 Dimensions with 4 pole drawout version mounted on right 5 Tightening torque 3.7 Nm 105 4.13 F N G = M C 1 X O E D M F X I = 105 4.13 = G 27.5 isolating stroke 1.08 11.5 0.45 = N M Dimensions mm in B B B 275 10.83 A B D E F G P Nr. 8 O 7 O 0.28 Y Y C R 4 H I L M N O P Q R 180 35 152.5 157.5 578 87.5 170 157.5 350 155 75 68 92 14 77.5 R15 7.09 1.38 6.00 6.20 22.76 3.44 6.69 6.20 13.78 6.10 2.95 2.68 3.62 0.55 3.05 R0.59 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/97 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES Ts3 Rotary handle on breaker (fixed or plug in) Y = 105 4.13 38 22 2 0.08 1.50 0.87 4 = 2 O4 Caption O 0.16 Y 45 1.77 == = = = 1 Rotary handle mech. 2 Lock for compartment door (optional) 80 3.15 112 4.41 3 3 Drilling of compartment door 4 Flange for compartment door R min 200 7.87 37 1.46 42.5 1.67 X 1 = O7 O 0.28 = 117 = 35 4.61 1.38 Y 72.5 2.85 112 4.41 = X X 142 5.59 105 4.13 X 161 6.34 = Rotary handle on compartment door (fixed or plug in with mechanism+shaft+handle) 7 Y 105 4.13 17 0.67 9 1 19 0.75 2 22 0.87 49.5 1.95 22 0.87 49.5 1.95 19 0.75 17 0.67 52.5 2.07 X 90 X X 8 26 1.02 2 0.08 3 46 1.81 105 4.13 11.5 0.45 X 6 10 2 0.08 3 59 2.32 46.5 1.83 Y 26 1.02 4 R min 200 7.87 Y 5 0.20 11.5 0.45 = = X 33 1.30 5 27 1.06 54 2.13 R min 200 7.87 Y Caption 1 Mechanism 8 Distance 7 + 0.08" / 2mm (shaft length) 2 Rotary handle 9 11.85"...19.69" / 301...500mm (with IP54 protection min. 325) 3 Padlock device for open position 10 Distance 9 + 0.08" / 2mm (shaft length) 4 Minimum radius of rotation for fulcrum of door 5 Drilling of compartment door 6 Support for depths up to 19.69" / 500 mm 7 2.60"...11.81" / 66...300mm (with IP54 protection min. 90) 6/98 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES Ts3 Rotary handle on breaker (Draw out) Y 170 6.69 2 38.5 22 O4 0.08 1.52 0.87 O 0.16 2 63 2.48 Nr. 5 O 7 O 0.28 94 27.25 = 3.70 1.07 72.5 2.85 45 1.77 = 126 4.96 = 161 6.34 105 4.13 = X Caption Y 135 5.31 X X 16 0.63 = 3 = 37 1.46 Rotary handle mech. 2 Lock for compartment door (optional) 3 Padlock device for open position (max. 3 padlocks 0.24" / 6mm) X R min. 200 7.87 Y 35 35 1.38 1.38 1 81 3.19 125 4.92 1 142 5.59 105 4.13 = = 42.5 1.67 Y Front flange for operating lever mechanism = Y 105 4.13 37 2 1.46 0.08 = 4 O4 O 0.16 2 Caption == = = X X = = = = = 142 5.59 112 4.41 161 6.34 105 4.13 = X 72.5 2.85 Y 45 1.77 1 O7 O 0.28 1 Front flange for operating mech. 2 Lock for compartment door (optional) 3 Drilling of compartment door 4 Flange for compartment door X 3 = = 80 3.15 112 4.41 = = Y = 117 4.61 Y = 42.5 1.67 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/99 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T4-T5 Motor operator (fixed version) T4 Fixed Caption 1 1 Overall dimensions with cabled auxiliary contacts (3Q+1SY only) T5 Fixed Caption 1 1 6/100 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Overall dimensions with cabled auxiliary contacts (3Q+1SY only) Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet T4 - 3 pole T4 - 4 pole T5 - 3 pole T5 - 4 pole DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door With flange Without flange Flange for the compartment door Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/101 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T4-T5 Rotary handle on compartment door (mechanism + shaft + handle) 6 5 2 1 7 3 Minimum rotation radius for door fulcrum DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door 6/102 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Caption 1 Mechanism 2 Rotary handle 3 Padlock device open position (3 padlock max. ) 4 IP54 protection (supplied on request) 5 Min...Max distance from the front of the door without 4 6 Min...Max distance from the front of the door with 4 7 Dimension with AUE connector (early make contact) 4 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T4-T5 Rotary handle on breaker Caption Det. "A" Det. "A" 1 Rotary handle on breaker 2 Padlock device open position (3 padlock max) 3 Dimension with AUE connector (early make contact) 4 Compartment door lock 2 3 1 4 DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door Flange for the compartment door Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/103 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T4-T5 Front lever operating mechanism T4 2 Caption Det. "A" 1 Front lever operating mech. 2 Lock for compartment door (supplied on request) Det. "A" 1 2 T5 2 Caption Det. "A" Det. "A" 1 2 6/104 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 1 Front lever operating mech. 2 Lock for compartment door (supplied on request) Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet Dimensions T4 mm T4 in T5 mm T5 in 3 POLES A B C 35 70 17.5 1.38 2.76 0.69 46.5 93 23.25 1.83 3.66 0.92 4 POLES DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door For drilling see detail "A" Det. "A" With flange Without flange Flange for the compartment door Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/105 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T4-T5 Mechanical interlock between 2 horizontal circuit breakers (fixed version) Caption 1 Interlocking mechanism 2 Coupling plate 1 2 DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet Caption 1 1 6/106 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Drilling template for all versions with rear terminals Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T4-T5 Mechanical interlock possibilities between 2 horizontal circuit breakers (fixed version) Type A B C D E F A B C D E F Circuit breakers combination N 1 T4 (F-P-W) N 2 T4 (F-P-W) N 1 T4 (F-P-W) N 2 T5 400 (F-P-W) or T5 600* (F) N 1 T4 (F-P-W) N 2 T5 600* (P-W) N 1 T5 400 (F-P-W) or T5 600* (F) N 2 T5 400 (F-P-W) or T5 600* (F) N 1 T5 400 (F-P-W) or T5 600* (F) N 2 T5 600* (P-W) N 1 T5 600* (P-W) N 2 T5 600* (P-W) Note: (F) Fixed circuit breaker (P) Plug-in circuit breaker (W) Draw out circuit breaker * Please ask ABB for 600 A availability Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/107 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T4-T5 Motor operator (fixed version) T4 isolating distance T5 (400A) isolating distance DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door 6/108 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Flange for the compartment door Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T4-T5 Protection kit IP42 (fixed version) T4 107 4.21 140 5.51 35 1.38 107 4.21 35 1.38 60.5 2.38 105 4.13 35 1.38 205 8.07 115 4.53 64.5 2.54 102.5 4.03 Caption 2.7 0.11 3 0.12 115 4.53 1 IP42 protection 2 Compartment door sheet steel drilling 3 Spacing when equipped with SOR-C, UVR-C 103.5 4.07 117.5 4.63 2 0.08 142 5.59 T5 186 7.32 107 4.21 46.5 1.83 60.5 2.38 139.5 5.49 46.5 1.83 46.5 1.83 Caption 1 IP42 protection 2 Compartment door sheet steel drilling 3 Spacing when equipped with SOR-C, UVR-C 4 Spacing when equipped with AUX-C (3Q+1SY only) 205 8.07 115 4.53 64.5 2.54 102.5 4.03 107 4.21 2.7 0.11 2.7 0.11 115 4.53 3 0.12 103.5 4.07 117.5 4.63 2 0.08 142 5.59 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/109 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T6 Motor operator (fixed version) 1.1 Nm 5.5 0.22 140 = 5.51 = 5.5 0.22 140 5.51 70 2.76 191.5 7.54 5.5 0.22 1 3 0.12 222 8.74 233 9.17 Caption 1 Overall dimensions with cabled auxiliary contacts mounted (3Q+1SY only) 2 0.08 DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet 70 2.76 237 9.33 3 POLES 118.5 4.66 O 5.5 - M5 O 0.22 - M5 237 9.33 118.5 4.66 O 5.5 - M5 O 0.22 - M5 140 5.51 35 1.38 4 POLES DRILLING TEMPLATES Flange for the compartment door Compartment door 142 = 5.59 = 173 6.81 86.5 3.4 152 = 5.98 = 151 5.94 75.75 2.98 142 5.59 71.25 2.8 148.5 = 5.85 = R min. 200 R min. 7.87 With flange 6/110 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL R min. 200 R min. 7.87 Without flange Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T6 Motor operator (Draw out version) 27.5 isolating distance 1.08 140 5.51 241 9.49 5.51 0.22 70 2.76 37 1.46 1.1 Nm 3 0.12 272 10.71 281.5 11.08 2 0.08 DRILLING TEMPLATES 32 1.26 32.5 1.28 75.25 2.96 150 5.9 Compartment door 18 0.71 148.5 = 5.85 = 122 4.8 R min. 200 R min. 7.87 Flange for the compartment door 173 6.81 86.25 3.4 210 8.27 75.25 2.96 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/111 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T6 Rotary handle on compartment door (fixed version with mechanism + shaft + handle) 5.5 0.22 2 5.5 0.22 110..500 4.33..19.68 103.5 4.07 85..500 3.35..19.68 25 0.98 42.5 1.67 82 3.23 105.5 4.15 7 5 25 0.98 1 5.5 0.22 4 2.7 0.11 2 0.08 2.7 0.11 3 0.12 83 3.27 50 1.97 41.5 1.63 32 1.26 3 105 4.13 R 200 min. R 7.87 min. Minimum rotation radius for door fulcrum DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door R 31.5 R 1.24 42.5 1.67 45 O 50 7 O 1.9 O5 O 0.2 41.5 1.63 6/112 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Caption 6 1 Mechanism 2 Rotary handle with door lock 3 Padlock device open position (max. of 3 padlocks) 4 IP54 protection (supplied on request) 5 Min...Max distance from the front of the door without 4 6 Min...Max distance from the front of the door with 4 7 Dimension with AUE connector (early make contact) 2 0.08 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T6 Rotary handle on breaker (fixed version) 140 5.51 5.5 0.22 O4 O 0.16 Det. "A" 190 7.48 146.5 5.77 103.5 4.07 5.5 0.22 5.5 0.22 33 1.3 Caption 42.5 1.67 84.5 3.33 140 5.51 4 2 3 2.7 0.11 1 2.7 0.11 41.5 1.63 3 0.12 140.5 5.53 1 Rotary handle on breaker 2 Padlock device open position (3 padlock max) 3 Dimension with AUE connector (early make contact) 4 Compartment door lock 2 0.08 DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door 142 5.59 85.5 3.37 151 5.94 90 3.54 14 0.55 96.5 3.8 43 1.69 14 0.55 96.5 3.8 43 1.69 148.5 5.85 142 5.59 R min. 200 R min. 7.87 With flange R min. 200 R min. 7.87 Without flange Flange for the compartment door 100.25 3.95 173 6.81 152 5.98 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/113 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T6 Det. "A" 140 5.51 4 Rotary handle on breaker (draw out version) 27.5 isolating distance 1.08 1 84.5 3.33 140 5.51 2 3 3 0.12 190.5 7.5 240 9.45 DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door Drilling for detail "A" 96.5 3.8 32 1.26 14 0.55 18.5 0.73 89.5 3.52 150 5.9 43 1.69 18 148.5 0.71 = 5.85 = 122 4.8 R min. 200 R min. 7.87 Flange for the compartment door 210 8.27 100.25 3.95 173 6.81 75.25 2.96 6/114 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 2 0.08 33 1.3 Caption 1 Padlock device for open position (max. 3 padlocks) 2 Compartment door lock 3 Dimensions with AUE connector (early make contact) Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T6 Front for lever operating mechanism (Fixed) 140 = 5.51 = 2.7 0.11 2.7 0.11 158 6.22 146.5 146.5 103.5 4.07 Det. "A" 17 0.67 2 O4 O 0.16 84.5 3.33 140 5.51 Det. "A" 1 Front for lever operating mech. 2 Compartment door lock 2 1 3 0.12 Caption 2 0.08 140.5 5.53 DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet 70 2.76 140 5.51 237 9.33 118.5 4.66 O 5.5 - M5 O 0.22 - M5 237 9.33 118.5 4.66 O 5.5 - M5 O 0.22 - M5 35 1.38 4 POLES 3 POLES Flange for the compartment door DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door Drilling of details "A" R min. 200 R min. 7.87 142 5.59 85.5 3.37 151 5.94 90 3.54 148.5 5.85 14 0.55 152 = 5.98 = 96.5 3.8 43 1.69 173 6.81 100.25 3.95 14 0.55 96.5 3.8 43 1.69 142 5.59 R min. 200 R min. 7.87 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/115 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T6 Mechanical interlock between 2 horizontal circuit breakers 673 26.5 70 2.76 70 2.76 70 2.76 120 4.72 70 2.76 70 2.76 70 2.76 Caption 1 Interlocking mechanism 2 Coupling plate 390 15.35 2 130 5.12 200 7.87 295 11.61 +27.5 isolating distance +1.08 103.5 4.07 65 2.56 1 DRILLING TEMPLATES 104 4.09 335 13.19 360 14.17 104 4.09 Support sheet 1 538 21.18 O O 0. 9 35 6/116 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Caption 1 Drilling template for all versions with rear terminals Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T7 Rotary handle on compartment door (fixed version with mechanism + shaft + handle) 120..487 4.72..19.17 125 4.92 3 0.12 97 3.82 7 95..487 3.74..19.17 6 26.8 1.05 1 2 0.08 20.75 0.82 105.5 4.15 39.5 1.55 5 15 0.59 82..474 3.23..18.66 4 107..474 4.21..18.66 62.5 2.46 O 50 O 1.97 O5 O 0.2 3 20.75 0.82 R min = 200 R min = 7.87 O 63 O 2.5 32 1.26 33 1.3 50 1.97 62.5 2.46 2 105 4.13 Caption 1 Mechanism 2 Padlock device in open position (max of 3 padlocks 7mm) 3 Drilling template for compartment door 4 Tightening torque 2.5 Nm 5 Accessory for IP54 protection degree (available on request) 6 Min...Max distance from the front of the door without 5 7 Min...Max distance from the front of the door with 5 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/117 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T7 Rotary handle on breaker (fixed version) 280 11.02 210 8.27 70 70 6 0.24 125 4.92 7 3 97 3.82 134 5.28 147.5 5.81 70 70 43.5 1.71 33 1.30 18.75 0.74 5 105 4.13 268 10.55 204 8.03 8 102 4.01 103.6 4.08 70 70 2 6 4 2 0.08 1 2 0.08 154 6.06 152 5.98 189.5 7.46 184 7.24 2 0.08 190 7.48 206 8.11 Caption 1 Rotary handle on breaker 2 Compartment door interlock 3 Flange for the compartment door 4 Flange fixing screws 5 Key lock (optional) 6 Tightening torque 2.5 Nm 7 Terminal for auxiliary contacts 8 Reduced flange of the rotary handle for the compartment door 6/118 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Dimensions A mm A in With flange Without flange 125...141 147 4.92...5.55 5.79 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES 122.5 4.82 Support sheet Dimensions 35 1.38 3 Pole 245 9.64 C mm C in 4 Pole 70 140 2.76 5.51 O 5.5 - M5 O 0.22 DRILLING TEMPLATES Compartment door With standard flange Without standard flange 2MIN 2MIN Drilling for rotary handle 2MIN 2MIN 2MIN 2MIN N(/,%3 2MIN 2MIN Drilling for rotary handle without handle flange Flange for the compartment door 268 10.55 Standard flange 304 11.97 152 5.98 Reduced flange Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/119 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T7 Rotary handle on breaker (draw out version) 348 13.7 70 2.76 278 10.94 70 2.76 155.5 6.12 70 2.76 1 1 5 2 2 4 O O 25 0.98 154 6.06 249 9.8 44 1.73 25 0.98 15 0.59 190 7.48 206 8.11 47 1.85 49 1.93 8 12.5 0.49 1 0. 1 43 3 0.12 7 9 2 0.08 109.3 4.3 142.4 5.61 10 36 1.42 Caption 1 Insulating protection 9 Rotary handle on breaker 2 Auxiliary contact terminal 10 Rear vertical terminals 3 Key lock (optional) 4 Rear segregation for front terminals 5 Front terminals 6 Flange for compartment door 7 Flange fixing screws (tightening torque 1.5 Nm) 8 Tightening torque 9 Nm 6/120 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL 42 1.65 105 4.13 18.75 0.74 363.25 14.3 343 13.5 35 1.38 159.5 6.28 239.5 9.43 3 554 21.81 6 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions DRILLING TEMPLATES Support sheet 109.5 4.31 O O Dimensions 140 5.51 7 0.28 Rear segregation for rear terminals 6 100 3.94 280 11.02 199 7.83 99.5 3.92 103 4.05 80 3.15 O 9 .35 O0 A mm A in B mm B in C mm C in 3 Pole 4 Pole 160 230 6.3 9.05 206 276 8.11 10.87 219 289 8.62 11.38 Support sheet DRILLING TEMPLATES 278.5 10.96 165.5 6.51 160.75 6.33 160.75 6.33 256.5 10.1 144.5 5.69 1 O O 4 0. 16 Compartment door 153.75 6.05 26.25 1.03 153.75 6.05 R min 200 R min 7.87 Flange for the compartment door 152 5.98 134 5.28 336.5 13.25 320.5 12.62 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/121 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T7M Mechanical interlock (fixed version) Caption 1000 MAX 39.37 MAX 3 50 1.97 70 2.76 146.5 5.77 125 4.92 R 70 MIN R 2.76 MIN 30 1.18 1 3 R 70 MIN R 2.76 MIN 70 2.76 125 4.92 50 1.97 2 R 70 MIN R 2.76 MIN 1000 MAX 39.37 MAX 6/122 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL R 70 MIN R 2.76 MIN 146.5 5.77 30 1.18 1 Mechanical vertical interlock for fixed breakers 2 Mechanical horizontal interlock for fixed circuit breakers 3 Sheet drilling for wire passage of the mechanical interlock Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions ACCESSORIES T7M Mechanical interlock (draw out version) Caption 1000 MAX 39.37 MAX 3 80 3.15 175 6.89 153.5 6.04 152 5.98 1 Mechanical vertical interlock for draw out breakers 2 Mechanical horizontal interlock for draw out circuit breakers 3 Sheet drilling for wire passage of the mechanical interlock 30 1.18 R 70 MIN R 2.76 MIN 1 3 80 3.15 152 5.98 153.5 6.04 30 1.18 R 70 MIN R 2.76 MIN 2 R 70 MIN R 2.76 MIN 1000 MAX 39.37 MAX R 70 MIN R 2.76 MIN 175 6.89 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 6/123 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Overall dimensions Distances to be respected Insulation distances for installation in metallic cubicle A B C [mm - in] [mm - in] [mm - in] T1 25 - 0.98 20 - 0.79 25 - 0.98 T2 25 - 0.98 20 - 0.79 20 - 0.79 T3 50 - 1.97 25 - 0.98 25 - 0.98 Ts3 35 - 1.38 25 - 0.98 20 - 0.79 T4 30(**) - 1.18 25 - 0.98 25(**) - 0.98 T5 30(**) - 1.18 25 - 0.98 25(**) - 0.98 20 - 0.79 Breaker type (*) T6 35 - 1.38 25 - 0.98 T7 50(*) - 1.97 20 - 0.79 10 - 0.39 T8 200(***) - 7.87 30 - 1.18 120 - 4.72 (*) (**) For Ub 480 V and T6L all versions: distances A = 100 mm (3.94 in) For Un 480 V and 600 V: A = 60mm (2.36 in), C = 45 mm (1.77 in) and 600 V For Ub 440 V distance A = 100 mm (3.94 in) (***) Minimum centre distance between 2 circuit breakers side by side Breaker type Circuit breaker width Centre distance I [mm - in] [mm - in] 3 poles 4 poles 3 poles 4 poles 76 - 2.99 102 - 4.02 76 - 2.99 102 - 4.02 T2 90 - 3.54 120 - 4.72 90 - 3.54 120 - 4.72 T3 105 - 4.13 140 - 5.51 105 - 4.13 140 - 5.51 Ts3 105 - 4.13 140 - 5.51 105 - 4.13 140 - 5.51 T4 105 - 4.13 140 - 5.51 105(*) - 4.13 140(*) - 5.51 T5 140 - 5.51 184 - 7.24 140(*) - 5.51 184(*) - 7.24 T6 210 - 8.27 280 - 11.02 210 - 8.27 280 - 11.02 T1 T7 210 - 8.27 280 - 11.02 210 - 8.27 280 - 11.02 T8 427 - 16.81 553 - 21.77 456 - 17.95 582 - 22.91 (*) For Ub: 480 V and 600 V minimum centre I (mm) 3 poles 180, minimum centre I (mm) 4 poles 224 Minimum centre distance between 2 circuit breakers superimposed Breaker type T1 1 2 3 H [mm - in] 60 - 2.36 T2 90 - 3.54 T3 140 - 5.51 Ts3 140 - 5.51 T4 160 - 6.30 T5 160 - 6.30 T6 180 - 7.09 T7 180 - 7.09 T8 300 - 11.81 Caption 1 Connection - not insulated 2 Insulated cable 3 Cable terminal Note: For assembly side by side or superimposed, check that the connection busbars or cables do not reduce the air insulation distance. The dimensions shown apply for operating voltage Ub up to 690V. The dimensions to be respected must be added to the maximum dimensions of the various different versions of the circuit breakers, including terminals. 6/124 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Table of contents Part numbers Tmax molded case circuit breakers General information Part numbering for T7 Part numbering for T8 7/2 7/3 7/4 Power distribution circuit breakers part numbers Tmax T1 1p 7/5 Tmax T1 7/5-7/6 Tmax T2 7/7-7/8 Tmax T3 7/9 Tmax Ts3 7/10-7/12 Tmax T4 7/13-7/16 Tmax T5 7/17-7/20 Tmax T6 7/21-7/23 Tmax T7 7/24-7/27 Tmax T8 7/28-7/30 Motor control protection circuit breakers part numbers Tmax T2-T3-Ts3 7/31 Tmax T4-T5-T6 7/32 Molded case switch part numbers Tmax T1-T3 Tmax Ts3-T4 Tmax T5-T6 Tmax T7-T8 7/33 7/34 7/35 7/36 Current limiting circuit breakers part numbers Tmax T2 7/37 Tmax T4 7/38-7/39 Tmax T5 7/40-7/41 Conversion kits and accessories Plug-in bases for Tmax Draw out cradles for Tmax Breaker conversion kits for Tmax Accessories for cradles and bases Tmax accessories Electrical accessories Mechanical accessories Spare parts 7/42 7/43 7/44 7/45 7/46-7/55 7/56-7/65 7/66 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/1 Tmax molded case circuit breakers General information Abbreviations used to describe the apparatus F = Front terminals EF = Front extended terminals ES = Front extended spread terminals FC CuAl = Front terminals for Cu/Al cables FC CuAl = Front terminals for Cu/Al cables RC CuAl = Rear terminals for Cu/Al cables MC = Multi-cable terminals HR for RC221/222 = Rear flat horizontal terminals (housed externally) FC Cu = Front terminals for copper cables R = Rear terminals HR = Rear flat horizontal terminals VR = Rear flat vertical terminals HR/VR = Rear flat terminals I3 In Magnetic trip current [A] Rated current of the thermomagnetic trip unit [A] TMF TMD = Thermomagnetic trip unit with fixed thermal and magnetic threshold = Thermomagnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal and fixed magnetic threshold TMA TMG = Thermomagnetic trip unit with adjustable thermal and magnetic threshold = Thermomagnetic trip unit for generator protection MF = Fixed magnetic only trip units MA = Adjustable magnetic only trip units PR22_ = Electronic trip units PR23_ = Electronic trip units PR33_ = Electronic trip units Iu Rated uninterrupted current of the circuit breaker [A] Icu Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity [A] Icw Rated short-time withstand current for 1s N= 50% Protection of the N= 100% neutral at 50% or at 100% of that of the phases [A] 7/2 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Part numbering for T7 / T7M T7 Locking Provisions: X = None, A = Keylock, B = Button guard, C = Padlock Provision (open), D = Withdrawable Position Lock (Connected, test and disconnected positions), E = Withdrawable Position Lock (Test and disconnected positions) Accessories: X = None, A = Mechanical counter Undervoltage: 0 = C= E= G= J = None, A = 24VAC/DC, B = 30VAC/DC, 48VAC/DC, D = 60VAC/DC, 110..120VAC/DC, F = 120..127VAC/DC, 220..240VAC/DC, H = 240..250VAC/DC, 380..400VAC, K = 415..440VAC Shunt Trip: 0 = None, A = 24VAC/DC, B = 30VAC/DC, C = 48VAC/DC, D = 60VAC/DC, E = 110..120VAC/DC, F = 120..127VAC/DC, G = 220..240VAC/DC, H = 240..250VAC/DC, J = 380..400VAC, K = 415..440VAC Spring Charging Motor: 0 = None, A = 24..30VAC/DC, B = 48..60VAC/DC, C = 100..130VAC/DC, D = 220..250VAC/DC, E = 380..415VAC/DC Aux Contacts: 0 = C= F = K= None, A = 1 Form C + 1BA 400VAC (T7), B = 1 Form C + 1BA 24VDC (T7), 2 Form C 400VAC (T7-T7M), D = 2 Form C 24VDC (T7-T7M), E = S51 250VAC (T7), S51 250VAC (T7M), G = A+C (T7), H = B+D (T7), I = C+E (T7), J = C+F (T7M), D+E (T7), L = D+F (T7M), M = C+C (T7M), N = D+D (T7M) Closing Coil: 0 = D= G= J = None, A = 24VAC/DC, B = 30VAC/DC, C = 48VAC/DC, 60VAC/DC, E = 110..120VAC/DC, F = 120..127VAC/DC, 220..240VAC/DC, H = 240..250VAC/DC, 380..400VAC, K = 415..440VAC Trip Unit Accessories: 0 = None, A = PR330V, B = PR330/D-M, C = A + B Trip Unit: X = Non-Automatic (MCS), B = PR231/P-LS/I, C = PR232/P-LSI, E = PR331/P-LSIG, P = PR332/P-LI, R = PR332/P-LSI, S = PR332/P-LSIG Rating Plug: 0 = Switch (MCS), A = 400, B = 600, C = 800, D = 1000A, E = 1200 Frame Amp Rating: 1 = 1000A (toggle) 2 = 1200A (toggle) P =1000A (motorized) B =1200A (motorized) C = 1000A (toggle) 4p D = 1200A (toggle) 4p E = 1000A (motorized) 4p F = 1000A (motorized) 4p Version: B = Fixed , Q = Fixed 100% Rated, 0 = Fixed Switch W = Draw-Out (1), X = Draw-out 100% Rated (1), Y = Draw-out Switch (1) Breaking capacity 600V: S = 25kA, H = 50kA, L = 65kA (1) Fixed part and accessories to be ordered seperately, please consult you local ABB office Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/3 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Part numbering for T8 T8V Locking provisions: X= None, A = Keylock, B = Button guard, C =Padlock, D = A+B, E = A+C Accessories: X = None, A = Mech. counter, B = Bell alarm, C = BA with remote reset 24-30VAC/DC D = BA with remote reset 110-130VAC/DC E = BA with remote reset 220-240VAC/DC, F = A+B, G = A+C, H = A+D, J = A+E Undervoltage (second shunt trip): 0 = None, A (L)= 24VDC, B (M)= 30VAC/DC, C (N) = 48VAC/DC, D (P) = 60VAC/DC, E (Q) = 110-120VAC/DC, F (R) = 120-127VAC/DC, G (S) = 220-240AC/DC, H (T) = 240-250VAC/DC, J (U) = 380-400VAC, K (V) = 440VAC Shunt trip: 0 = None, A = 24VDC, B = 30VAC/DC, C = 48VAC/DC, D = 60VAC/DC, E = 110-120VAC/DC, F = 120-127VAC/DC, G = 220-240AC/DC, H = 240-250VAC/DC, J = 380-400VAC, K = 440VAC Auxiliary contacts: 0 = None (1), A = 4 aux. contacts, B = 4 aux. contacts 24V, C = UVR de-energized NO, D = UVR de-energized NC, E = A+C, F = A+D, G = B+C, H = B+D H = 240-250VAC/DC, J = 380-400VAC, K = 440VAC Spring charging motor: 0 = None, A = 24-30VAC/DC, B = 48-60VAC/DC, C = 100-130VAC/DC D = 220-250VAC/DC Closing coil: 0 = None, A = 24VDC, B = 30VAC/DC, C = 48VAC/DC D = 60VAC/DC, E = 110-120VAC/DC, F = 120-127VAC/DC, G = 220-240AC/DC H = 240-250VAC/DC, J = 380-400VAC, K = 440VAC Trip unit accessories (PR332/P only): 0 = None, B = Voltage measuring module, C = Communication module Trip unit: C = PR331/P-LSI (T8), D = Switch, E = PR331/P-LSIG, P = PR332/P-LI R = PR332/P-LSI, S = PR332/P-LSIG Rating plug: 0 = Switch, D = 1000A, E = 1200A, F = 1600A G = 2000A, H = 2500A, J = 3000A Frame Amp Rating: C = 1600A (3p), D = 2000A (3p), E = 2500A (3p), F = 3000A (3p) G = 1600A (4p), H = 2000A (4p), I = 2500A (4p), J = 3000A (4p) Version: B = Fixed, Q = Fixed 100% Rated, 0 = Fixed Switch Breaking Capacity 600V: V = 100kA 7/4 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax T1 100 A - FIXED (F) 1pole - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals for copper/aluminum cables (FC CuAl) Thermal-Magnetic trip unit with fixed tresholds - TMF - 347V AC Part number In I3 B (14kA) TMF 15 A (1) 1000 A T1B015TL-1 TMF 20 A 1000 A T1B020TL-1 TMF 25 A 1000 A T1B025TL-1 TMF 30 A 1000 A T1B030TL-1 TMF 40 A 1000 A T1B040TL-1 TMF 50 A 1500 A T1B050TL-1 TMF 60 A 1500 A T1B060TL-1 TMF 70 A 1500 A T1B070TL-1 TMF 80 A 1500 A T1B080TL-1 TMF 90 A 1500 A T1B090TL-1 TMF 100 A 1500 A T1B100TL-1 Type (1) In 15A = 10 kA at 347V AC Tmax T1 100 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals for copper/aluminum cables (FC CuAl) Thermal-Magnetic trip unit with fixed tresholds - TMF - 480V AC / 500V DC Part number In I3 N (22kA) TMF 15 A (1) 1000 A T1N015TL TMF 20 A 1000 A T1N020TL TMF 25 A 1000 A T1N025TL TMF 30 A 1000 A T1N030TL TMF 40 A 1000 A T1N040TL TMF 50 A 1500 A T1N050TL TMF 60 A 1500 A T1N060TL TMF 70 A 1500 A T1N070TL TMF 80 A 1500 A T1N080TL TMF 90 A 1500 A T1N090TL TMF 100 A 1500 A T1N100TL Type (1) In 15A = 14 kA at 480Y/277V AC Tmax T1 100 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals for copper/aluminum cables (FC CuAl) Thermal-Magnetic trip unit with fixed tresholds - TMF - 480V AC / 500V DC Part number In I3 N (22kA) TMF 15 A (1) 1000 A T1N015TL-4 TMF 20 A 1000 A T1N020TL-4 TMF 25 A 1000 A T1N025TL-4 TMF 30 A 1000 A T1N030TL-4 TMF 40 A 1000 A T1N040TL-4 TMF 50 A 1500 A T1N050TL-4 TMF 60 A 1500 A T1N060TL-4 TMF 70 A 1500 A T1N070TL-4 TMF 80 A 1500 A T1N080TL-4 TMF 90 A 1500 A T1N090TL-4 TMF 100 A 1500 A T1N100TL-4 Type (1) In 15A = 14 kA at 480Y/277V AC Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/5 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax T1 100 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals for copper/aluminum cables (FC CuAl) Thermal-Magnetic trip unit with fixed tresholds - TMF - 480V AC / 500V DC Part number In I3 NQ (22kA) TMF 15 A (1) 1000 A T1NQ015TL TMF 20 A 1000 A T1NQ020TL TMF 25 A 1000 A T1NQ025TL TMF 30 A 1000 A T1NQ030TL TMF 40 A 1000 A T1NQ040TL TMF 50 A 1500 A T1NQ050TL TMF 60 A 1500 A T1NQ060TL TMF 70 A 1500 A T1NQ070TL TMF 80 A 1500 A T1NQ080TL TMF 90 A 1500 A T1NQ090TL TMF 100 A 1500 A T1NQ100TL Type (1) In 15A = 14 kA at 480Y/277V AC 7/6 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax T2 100 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit with fixed tresholds - TMF - 480V AC In I3 S (35kA) H (65kA) TMF 15 A 500 A T2S015TL T2H015TL TMF 20 A 500 A T2S020TL T2H020TL TMF 25 A 500 A T2S025TL T2H025TL TMF 30 A 500 A T2S030TL T2H030TL TMF 40 A 500 A T2S040TL T2H040TL TMF 50 A 500 A T2S050TL T2H050TL TMF 60 A 600 A T2S060TL T2H060TL TMF 70 A 700 A T2S070TL T2H070TL TMF 80 A 800 A T2S080TL T2H080TL TMF 90 A 900 A T2S090TL T2H090TL TMF 100 A 1000 A T2S100TL T2H100TL Type Tmax T2 100 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 480V AC In Type S (35kA) H (65kA) PR221DS-LS/I 25 A (10...25 A) T2S025BW T2H025BW PR221DS-LS/I 60 A (24...60 A) T2S060BW T2H060BW PR221DS-LS/I 100 A (40...100 A) T2S100BW T2H100BW Tmax T2 100 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit with fixed tresholds - TMF - 480V AC In I3 S (35kA) H (65kA) TMF 15 A 500 A T2S015TL-4 T2H015TL-4 TMF 20 A 500 A T2S020TL-4 T2H020TL-4 TMF 25 A 500 A T2S025TL-4 T2H025TL-4 TMF 30 A 500 A T2S030TL-4 T2H030TL-4 TMF 40 A 500 A T2S040TL-4 T2H040TL-4 TMF 50 A 500 A T2S050TL-4 T2H050TL-4 TMF 60 A 600 A T2S060TL-4 T2H060TL-4 TMF 70 A 700 A T2S070TL-4 T2H070TL-4 TMF 80 A 800 A T2S080TL-4 T2H080TL-4 TMF 90 A 900 A T2S090TL-4 T2H090TL-4 TMF 100 A 1000 A T2S100TL-4 T2H100TL-4 Type Tmax T2 100 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 480V AC Type In S (35kA) H (65kA) PR221DS-LS/I 25 A (10...25 A) T2S025BW-4 T2H025BW-4 PR221DS-LS/I 60 A (24...60 A) T2S060BW-4 T2H060BW-4 PR221DS-LS/I 100 A (40...100 A) T2S100BW-4 T2H100BW-4 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/7 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax T2 100 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit with fixed tresholds - TMF - 480V AC In I3 SQ (35kA) HQ (65kA) TMF 15 A 500 A T2SQ015TL T2HQ015TL TMF 20 A 500 A T2SQ020TL T2HQ020TL TMF 25 A 500 A T2SQ025TL T2HQ025TL TMF 30 A 500 A T2SQ030TL T2HQ030TL TMF 40 A 500 A T2SQ040TL T2HQ040TL TMF 50 A 500 A T2SQ050TL T2HQ050TL TMF 60 A 600 A T2SQ060TL T2HQ060TL TMF 70 A 700 A T2SQ070TL T2HQ070TL TMF 80 A 800 A T2SQ080TL T2HQ080TL TMF 90 A 900 A T2SQ090TL T2HQ090TL TMF 100 A 1000 A T2SQ100TL T2HQ100TL Type Tmax T2 100 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) PR221DS-LS/I- 480V AC Type In SQ (35kA) HQ (65kA) LS/I 25 A (10...25 A) T2SQ025BW T2HQ025BW LS/I 60 A (24...60 A) T2SQ060BW T2HQ060BW LS/I 100 A (40...100 A) T2SQ100BW T2HQ100BW 7/8 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax T3 225 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 225 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit with fixed tresholds - TMF - 480V AC / 500V DC In I3 N (25kA) S (35kA) TMF 60 A 600 A T3N060TW T3S060TW TMF 70 A 700 A T3N070TW T3S070TW TMF 80 A 800 A T3N080TW T3S080TW TMF 90 A 900 A T3N090TW T3S090TW TMF 100 A 1000 A T3N100TW T3S100TW TMF 125 A 1250 A T3N125TW T3S125TW TMF 150 A 1500 A T3N150TW T3S150TW TMF 175 A 1750 A T3N175TW T3S175TW TMF 200 A 2000 A T3N200TW T3S200TW TMF 225 A 2250 A T3N225TW T3S225TW Type Tmax T3 225 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 225 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit with fixed tresholds - TMF - 480V AC / 500V DC In I3 N (25kA) S (35kA) TMF 60 A 600 A T3N060TW-4 T3S060TW-4 TMF 70 A 700 A T3N070TW-4 T3S070TW-4 TMF 80 A 800 A T3N080TW-4 T3S080TW-4 TMF 90 A 900 A T3N090TW-4 T3S090TW-4 TMF 100 A 1000 A T3N100TW-4 T3S100TW-4 TMF 125 A 1250 A T3N125TW-4 T3S125TW-4 TMF 150 A 1500 A T3N150TW-4 T3S150TW-4 TMF 175 A 1750 A T3N175TW-4 T3S175TW-4 TMF 200 A 2000 A T3N200TW-4 T3S200TW-4 TMF 225 A 2250 A T3N225TW-4 T3S225TW-4 Type Tmax T3 225 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 225 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit with fixed tresholds - TMF - 480V AC / 500V DC In I3 NQ (25kA) SQ (35kA) TMF 60 A 600 A T3NQ060TW T3SQ060TW TMF 70 A 700 A T3NQ070TW T3SQ070TW TMF 80 A 800 A T3NQ080TW T3SQ080TW TMF 90 A 900 A T3NQ090TW T3SQ090TW TMF 100 A 1000 A T3NQ100TW T3SQ100TW TMF 125 A 1250 A T3NQ125TW T3SQ125TW TMF 150 A 1500 A T3NQ150TW T3SQ150TW TMF 175 A 1750 A T3NQ175TW T3SQ175TW TMF 200 A 2000 A T3NQ200TW T3SQ200TW TMF 225 A 2250 A T3NQ225TW T3SQ225TW Type Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/9 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax Ts3 150 A - FIXED (F) 2 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 150 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit with fixed tresholds - TMF - 600V AC / 500V DC In I3 N (14kA) H (14kA) L (25kA) TMF 15 A 500 A Ts3N015TW-2 Ts3H015TW-2 Ts3L015TW-2 TMF 20 A 500 A Ts3N020TW-2 Ts3H020TW-2 Ts3L020TW-2 TMF 25 A 500 A Ts3N025TW-2 Ts3H025TW-2 Ts3L025TW-2 TMF 30 A 500 A Ts3N030TW-2 Ts3H030TW-2 Ts3L030TW-2 TMF 35 A 500 A Ts3N035TW-2 Ts3H035TW-2 Ts3L035TW-2 TMF 40 A 500 A Ts3N040TW-2 Ts3H040TW-2 Ts3L040TW-2 TMF 50 A 500 A Ts3N050TW-2 Ts3H050TW-2 Ts3L050TW-2 TMF 60 A 600 A Ts3N060TW-2 Ts3H060TW-2 Ts3L060TW-2 TMF 70 A 700 A Ts3N070TW-2 Ts3H070TW-2 Ts3L070TW-2 TMF 80 A 800 A Ts3N080TW-2 Ts3H080TW-2 Ts3L080TW-2 TMF 90 A 900 A Ts3N090TW-2 Ts3H090TW-2 Ts3L090TW-2 TMF 100 A 1000 A Ts3N100TW-2 Ts3H100TW-2 Ts3L100TW-2 TMF 125 A 1250 A Ts3N125TW-2 Ts3H125TW-2 Ts3L125TW-2 TMF 150 A 1500 A Ts3N150TW-2 Ts3H150TW-2 Ts3L150TW-2 Type Tmax Ts3 225 A - FIXED (F) 2 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 225 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit with fixed tresholds - TMF - 480V AC / 500V DC In I3 N (25kA) H (50kA) L (65kA) TMF 175 A 1750 A Ts3N175TW-2 Ts3H175TW-2 Ts3L175TW-2 TMF 200 A 2000 A Ts3N200TW-2 Ts3H200TW-2 Ts3L200TW-2 TMF 225 A 2250 A Ts3N225TW-2 Ts3H225TW-2 Ts3L225TW-2 Type Tmax Ts3 150 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 150 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit with fixed tresholds - TMF - 600V AC / 600V DC Type N (14kA) H (14kA) L (25kA) TMF 15 A 500 A Ts3N015TW Ts3H015TW Ts3L015TW TMF 20 A 500 A Ts3N020TW Ts3H020TW Ts3L020TW TMF 25 A 500 A Ts3N025TW Ts3H025TW Ts3L025TW TMF 30 A 500 A Ts3N030TW Ts3H030TW Ts3L030TW TMF 35 A 500 A Ts3N035TW Ts3H035TW Ts3L035TW TMF 40 A 500 A Ts3N040TW Ts3H040TW Ts3L040TW TMF 50 A 500 A Ts3N050TW Ts3H050TW Ts3L050TW TMF 60 A 600 A Ts3N060TW Ts3H060TW Ts3L060TW TMF 70 A 700 A Ts3N070TW Ts3H070TW Ts3L070TW TMF 80 A 800 A Ts3N080TW Ts3H080TW Ts3L080TW TMF 90 A 900 A Ts3N090TW Ts3H090TW Ts3L090TW TMF 100 A 1000 A Ts3N100TW Ts3H100TW Ts3L100TW TMF 125 A 1250 A Ts3N125TW Ts3H125TW Ts3L125TW TMF 150 A 1500 A Ts3N150TW Ts3H150TW Ts3L150TW 7/10 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax Ts3 225 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 225 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit with fixed tresholds - TMF - 480V AC / 500V DC In I3 N (25kA) H (50kA) L (65kA) TMF 175 A 1750 A Ts3N175TW Ts3H175TW Ts3L175TW TMF 200 A 2000 A Ts3N200TW Ts3H200TW Ts3L200TW TMF 225 A 2250 A Ts3N225TW Ts3H225TW Ts3L225TW Type Tmax Ts3 150 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 150 A - Front terminals (F) Thermal-Magnetic trip unit with fixed tresholds - TMF - 600V AC / 600V DC Part number In I3 N (14kA) TMF 15 A 500 A Ts3N015TW-4 TMF 20 A 500 A Ts3N020TW-4 TMF 25 A 500 A Ts3N025TW-4 TMF 30 A 500 A Ts3N030TW-4 TMF 35 A 500 A Ts3N035TW-4 TMF 40 A 500 A Ts3N040TW-4 TMF 50 A 500 A Ts3N050TW-4 TMF 60 A 600 A Ts3N060TW-4 TMF 70 A 700 A Ts3N070TW-4 TMF 80 A 800 A Ts3N080TW-4 TMF 90 A 900 A Ts3N090TW-4 TMF 100 A 1000 A Ts3N100TW-4 TMF 125 A 1250 A Ts3N125TW-4 TMF 150 A 1500 A Ts3N150TW-4 Type Tmax Ts3 225 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 225 A - Front terminals (F) Thermal-Magnetic trip unit with fixed tresholds - TMF - 480V AC / 500V DC Part number In I3 N (25kA) TMF 175 A 1750 A Ts3N175TW-4 TMF 200 A 2000 A Ts3N200TW-4 TMF 225 A 2250 A Ts3N225TW-4 Type Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/11 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax Ts3 150 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (DiscountDS-ST) Iu (40C) = 150 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit with fixed tresholds - TMF - 600V AC / 600V DC In I3 NQ (14kA) HQ (14kA) LQ (25kA) TMF 15 A 500 A Ts3NQ015TW Ts3HQ015TW Ts3LQ015TW TMF 20 A 500 A Ts3NQ020TW Ts3HQ020TW Ts3LQ020TW TMF 25 A 500 A Ts3NQ025TW Ts3HQ025TW Ts3LQ025TW TMF 30 A 500 A Ts3NQ030TW Ts3HQ030TW Ts3LQ030TW TMF 35 A 500 A Ts3NQ035TW Ts3HQ035TW Ts3LQ035TW TMF 40 A 500 A Ts3NQ040TW Ts3HQ040TW Ts3LQ040TW TMF 50 A 500 A Ts3NQ050TW Ts3HQ050TW Ts3LQ050TW TMF 60 A 600 A Ts3NQ060TW Ts3HQ060TW Ts3LQ060TW TMF 70 A 700 A Ts3NQ070TW Ts3HQ070TW Ts3LQ070TW TMF 80 A 800 A Ts3NQ080TW Ts3HQ080TW Ts3LQ080TW TMF 90 A 900 A Ts3NQ090TW Ts3HQ090TW Ts3LQ090TW TMF 100 A 1000 A Ts3NQ100TW Ts3HQ100TW Ts3LQ100TW TMF 125 A 1250 A Ts3NQ125TW Ts3HQ125TW Ts3LQ125TW TMF 150 A 1500 A Ts3NQ150TW Ts3HQ150TW Ts3LQ150TW Type Tmax Ts3 225 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 225 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit with fixed tresholds - TMF - 480V AC / 500V DC In I3 NQ (25kA) HQ (50kA) LQ (65kA) TMF 175 A 1750 A Ts3NQ175TW Ts3HQ175TW Ts3LQ175TW TMF 200 A 2000 A Ts3NQ200TW Ts3HQ200TW Ts3LQ200TW TMF 225 A 2250 A Ts3NQ225TW Ts3HQ225TW Ts3LQ225TW Type 7/12 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax T4 250 A - FIXED (F) 2 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 250 A - Front terminals (F) Thermal-Magnetic trip unit - TMD/TMA - 600V AC / 500V DC Part number In I3 N (18kA) TMD 30 A (21...30 A) 500 A T4N030TW-2 TMD 40 A (28...40 A) 500 A T4N040TW-2 TMD 50 A (36...50 A) 500 A T4N050TW-2 TMA 80 A (56...80 A) 800 A (400...800A) T4N080TW-2 TMA 100 A (70...100 A) 1000 A (500...1000A) T4N100TW-2 TMA 125 A (88...125 A) 1250 A (625...1250 A) T4N125TW-2 TMA 150 A (100...150 A) 1500 A (750...1500 A) T4N150TW-2 Type TMA 200 A (140...200 A) 2000 A (1000...2000 A) T4N200TW-2 TMA 250 A (175...250 A) 2500 A (1250...2500 A) T4N250TW-2 Tmax T4 100 A - FIXED (F) 2 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type N (18kA) PR221DS-LS/I 100 A (40...100 A) T4N100BW-2 PR222DS-LSI 100 A (40...100 A) T4N100CW-2 PR222DS-LSIG 100 A (40...100 A) T4N100EW-2 Tmax T4 150 A - FIXED (F) 2 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 150 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type N (18kA) PR221DS-LS/I 150 A (60...150 A) T4N150BW-2 PR222DS-LSI 150 A (60...150 A) T4N150CW-2 PR222DS-LSIG 150 A (60...150 A) T4N150EW-2 Tmax T4 250 A - FIXED (F) 2 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 250 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC Type In N (18kA) PR221DS-LS/I 250 A (60...150 A) T4N250BW-2 PR222DS-LSI 250 A (60...150 A) T4N250CW-2 PR222DS-LSIG 250 A (60...150 A) T4N250EW-2 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/13 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax T4 250 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 250 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit - TMF/TMD/TMA - 600V AC / 600V DC Type In I3 N (18kA) S (25kA) H (35kA) L (65kA) V (100kA) TMF 20 A 500 A T4N020TW T4S020TW T4H020TW T4L020TW T4V020TW TMD 30 A (21...30 A) 500 A T4N030TW T4S030TW T4H030TW T4L030TW T4V030TW TMD 40 A (28...40 A) 500 A T4N040TW T4S040TW T4H040TW T4L040TW T4V040TW TMD 50 A (36...50 A) 500 A T4N050TW T4S050TW T4H050TW T4L050TW T4V050TW TMA 80 A (56...80 A) 800 A (400...800A) T4N080TW T4S080TW T4H080TW T4L080TW T4V080TW TMA 100 A (70...100 A) 1000 A (500...1000A) T4N100TW T4S100TW T4H100TW T4L100TW T4V100TW TMA 125 A (88...125 A) 1250 A (625...1250 A) T4N125TW T4S125TW T4H125TW T4L125TW T4V125TW TMA 150 A (100...150 A) 1500 A (750...1500 A) T4N150TW T4S150TW T4H150TW T4L150TW T4V150TW TMA 200 A (140...200 A) 2000 A (1000...2000 A) T4N200TW T4S200TW T4H200TW T4L200TW T4V200TW TMA 250 A (175...250 A) 2500 A (1250...2500 A) T4N250TW T4S250TW T4H250TW T4L250TW T4V250TW L (65kA) V (100kA) Tmax T4 100 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type N (18kA) S (25kA) H (35kA) PR221DS-LS/I 100 A (40...100 A) T4N100BW T4S100BW T4H100BW T4L100BW T4V100BW PR222DS-LSI 100 A (40...100 A) T4N100CW T4S100CW T4H100CW T4L100CW T4V100CW PR222DS-LSIG 100 A (40...100 A) T4N100EW T4S100EW T4H100EW T4L100EW T4V100EW L (65kA) V (100kA) Tmax T4 150 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 150 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type N (18kA) S (25kA) H (35kA) PR221DS-LS/I 150 A (60...150 A) T4N150BW T4S150BW T4H150BW T4L150BW T4V150BW PR222DS-LSI 150 A (60...150 A) T4N150CW T4S150CW T4H150CW T4L150CW T4V150CW PR222DS-LSIG 150 A (60...150 A) T4N150EW T4S150EW T4H150EW T4L150EW T4V150EW L (65kA) V (100kA) Tmax T4 250 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 250 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC Type In N (18kA) S (25kA) H (35kA) PR221DS-LS/I 250 A (100...250 A) T4N250BW T4S250BW T4H250BW T4L250BW T4V250BW PR222DS-LSI 250 A (100...250 A) T4N250CW T4S250CW T4H250CW T4L250CW T4V250CW PR222DS-LSIG 250 A (100...250 A) T4N250EW T4S250EW T4H250EW T4L250EW T4V250EW 7/14 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax T4 250 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 250 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit - TMF/TMD/TMA - 600V AC / 600V DC Type NQ (18kA) SQ (25kA) HQ (35kA) LQ (65kA) VQ (100kA) TMF 20 A 500 A T4NQ020TW T4SQ020TW T4HQ020TW T4LQ020TW T4VQ020TW TMD 30 A (21...30 A) 500 A T4NQ030TW T4SQ030TW T4HQ030TW T4LQ030TW T4VQ030TW TMD 40 A (28...40 A) 500 A T4NQ040TW T4SQ040TW T4HQ040TW T4LQ040TW T4VQ040TW TMD 50 A (36...50 A) 500 A T4NQ050TW T4SQ050TW T4HQ050TW T4LQ050TW T4VQ050TW TMA 80 A (56...80 A) 800 A (400...800A) T4NQ080TW T4SQ080TW T4HQ080TW T4LQ080TW T4VQ080TW TMA 100 A (70...100 A) 1000 A (500...1000A) T4NQ100TW T4SQ100TW T4HQ100TW T4LQ100TW T4VQ100TW TMA 125 A (88...125 A) 1250 A (625...1250 A) T4NQ125TW T4SQ125TW T4HQ125TW T4LQ125TW T4VQ125TW TMA 150 A (100...150 A) 1500 A (750...1500 A) T4NQ150TW T4SQ150TW T4HQ150TW T4LQ150TW T4VQ150TW TMA 200 A (140...200 A) 2000 A (1000...2000 A) T4NQ200TW T4SQ200TW T4HQ200TW T4LQ200TW T4VQ200TW TMA 250 A (175...250 A) 2500 A (1250...2500 A) T4NQ250TW T4SQ250TW T4HQ250TW T4LQ250TW T4VQ250TW LQ (65kA) VQ (100kA) Tmax T4 100 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type NQ (18kA) SQ (25kA) HQ (35kA) PR221DS-LS/I 100 A (40...100 A) T4NQ100BW T4SQ100BW T4HQ100BW T4LQ100BW T4VQ100BW PR222DS-LSI 100 A (40...100 A) T4NQ100CW T4SQ100CW T4HQ100CW T4LQ100CW T4VQ100CW PR222DS-LSIG 100 A (40...100 A) T4NQ100EW T4SQ100EW T4HQ100EW T4LQ100EW T4VQ100EW LQ (65kA) VQ (100kA) Tmax T4 150 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 150 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type NQ (18kA) SQ (25kA) HQ (35kA) PR221DS-LS/I 150 A (60...150 A) T4NQ150BW T4SQ150BW T4HQ150BW T4LQ150BW T4VQ150BW PR222DS-LSI 150 A (60...150 A) T4NQ150CW T4SQ150CW T4HQ150CW T4LQ150CW T4VQ150CW PR222DS-LSIG 150 A (60...150 A) T4NQ150EW T4SQ150EW T4HQ150EW T4LQ150EW T4VQ150EW LQ (65kA) VQ (100kA) Tmax T4 250 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 250 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC Type In NQ (18kA) SQ (25kA) HQ (35kA) PR221DS-LS/I 250 A (100...250 A) T4NQ250BW T4SQ250BW T4HQ250BW T4LQ250BW T4VQ250BW PR222DS-LSI 250 A (100...250 A) T4NQ250CW T4SQ250CW T4HQ250CW T4LQ250CW T4VQ250CW PR222DS-LSIG 250 A (100...250 A) T4NQ250EW T4SQ250EW T4HQ250EW T4LQ250EW T4VQ250EW Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/15 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax T4 250 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 250 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit - TMF/TMD/TMA - 600V AC / 600V DC Type In I3 N (18kA) H (35kA) TMF 20 A 500 A T4N020TW-4 T4H020TW-4 TMD 30 A (21...30 A) 500 A T4N030TW-4 T4H030TW-4 TMD 40 A (28...40 A) 500 A T4N040TW-4 T4H040TW-4 TMD 50 A (36...50 A) 500 A T4N050TW-4 T4H050TW-4 TMA 80 A (56...80 A) 800 A (400...800A) T4N080TW-4 T4H080TW-4 TMA 100 A (70...100 A) 1000 A (500...1000A) T4N100TW-4 T4H100TW-4 TMA 125 A (88...125 A) 1250 A (625...1250 A) T4N125TW-4 T4H125TW-4 TMA 150 A (100...150 A) 1500 A (750...1500 A) T4N150TW-4 T4H150TW-4 TMA 200 A (140...200 A) 2000 A (1000...2000 A) T4N200TW-4 T4H200TW-4 TMA 250 A (175...250 A) 2500 A (1250...2500 A) T4N250TW-4 T4H250TW-4 Tmax T4 100 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type N (18kA) H (35kA) PR221DS-LS/I 100 A (40...100 A) T4N100BW-4 T4H100BW-4 PR222DS-LSI 100 A (40...100 A) T4N100CW-4 T4H100CW-4 PR222DS-LSIG 100 A (40...100 A) T4N100EW-4 T4H100EW-4 Tmax T4 150 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 150 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type N (18kA) H (35kA) PR221DS-LS/I 150 A (60...150 A) T4N150BW-4 T4H150BW-4 PR222DS-LSI 150 A (60...150 A) T4N150CW-4 T4H150CW-4 PR222DS-LSIG 150 A (60...150 A) T4N150EW-4 T4H150EW-4 Tmax T4 250 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 250 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC Type In N (18kA) H (35kA) PR221DS-LS/I 250 A (100...250 A) T4N250BW-4 T4H250BW-4 PR222DS-LSI 250 A (100...250 A) T4N250CW-4 T4H250CW-4 PR222DS-LSIG 250 A (100...250 A) T4N250EW-4 T4H250EW-4 7/16 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax T5 300 A - FIXED (F) 2 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 300 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit - TMA - 600V AC / 500V DC Type TMA In I3 N (18kA) 300 A (210...300 A) 3000 A (1500...3000 A) T5N300TW-2 Tmax T5 300 A - FIXED (F) 2 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 300 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only)- 600V AC In Type N (18kA) PR221DS-LS/I 300 A (120...300 A) T5N300BW-2 PR222DS-LSI 300 A (120...300 A) T5N300CW-2 PR222DS-LSIG 300 A (120...300 A) T5N300EW-2 Tmax T5 400 A - FIXED (F) 2 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 400 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit - TMA - 600V AC / 500V DC Type TMA In I3 N (18kA) 400 A (280...400 A) 4000 A (2000...4000 A) T5N400TW-2 Tmax T5 400 A - FIXED (F) 2 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 400 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC Type In N (18kA) PR221DS-LS/I 400 A (160...400 A) T5N400BW-2 PR222DS-LSI 400 A (160...400 A) T5N400CW-2 PR222DS-LSIG 400 A (160...400 A) T5N400EW-2 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/17 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax T5 300 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 300 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit - TMA - 600V AC / 600V DC Type TMA In I3 N (18kA) S (25kA) H (35kA) L (65kA) V (100kA) 300 A (210...300 A) 3000 A (1500...3000 A) T5N300TW T5S300TW T5H300TW T5L300TW T5V300TW L (65kA) V (100kA) Tmax T5 300 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 300 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type N (18kA) S (25kA) H (35kA) PR221DS-LS/I 300 A (120...300 A) T5N300BW T5S300BW T5H300BW T5L300BW T5V300BW PR222DS-LSI 300 A (120...300 A) T5N300CW T5S300CW T5H300CW T5L300CW T5V300CW PR222DS-LSIG 300 A (120...300 A) T5N300EW T5S300EW T5H300EW T5L300EW T5V300EW Tmax T5 400 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 400 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit - TMA - 600V AC / 600V DC Type TMA In I3 N (18kA) S (25kA) H (35kA) L (65kA) V (100kA) 400 A (280...400 A) 4000 A (2000...4000 A) T5N400TW T5S400TW T5H400TW T5L400TW T5V400TW L (65kA) V (100kA) Tmax T5 400 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 400 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type N (18kA) S (25kA) H (35kA) PR221DS-LS/I 400 A (160...400 A) T5N400BW T5S400BW T5H400BW T5L400BW T5V400BW PR222DS-LSI 400 A (160...400 A) T5N400CW T5S400CW T5H400CW T5L400CW T5V400CW PR222DS-LSIG 400 A (160...400 A) T5N400EW T5S400EW T5H400EW T5L400EW T5V400EW L (65kA) V (100kA) Tmax T5 600 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 600 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC Type In N (18kA) S (25kA) H (35kA) PR221DS-LS/I 600 A (240...600 A) T5N600BW T5S600BW T5H600BW T5L600BW T5V600BW PR222DS-LSI 600 A (240...600 A) T5N600CW T5S600CW T5H600CW T5L600CW T5V600CW PR222DS-LSIG 600 A (240...600 A) T5N600EW T5S600EW T5H600EW T5L600EW T5V600EW 7/18 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax T5 300 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 300 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit - TMA - 600V AC / 600V DC Type TMA In I3 NQ (18kA) SQ (25kA) HQ (35kA) LQ (65kA) VQ (100kA) 300 A (210...300 A) 3000 A (1500...3000 A) T5NQ300TW T5SQ300TW T5HQ300TW T5LQ300TW T5VQ300TW LQ (65kA) VQ (100kA) Tmax T5 300 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 300 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type NQ (18kA) SQ (25kA) HQ (35kA) PR221DS-LS/I 300 A (120...300 A) T5NQ300BW T5SQ300BW T5HQ300BW T5LQ300BW T5VQ300BW PR222DS-LSI 300 A (120...300 A) T5NQ300CW T5SQ300CW T5HQ300CW T5LQ300CW T5VQ300CW PR222DS-LSIG 300 A (120...300 A) T5NQ300EW T5SQ300EW T5HQ300EW T5LQ300EW T5VQ300EW Tmax T5 400 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 400 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit - TMA - 600V AC / 600V DC Type TMA In I3 NQ (18kA) SQ (25kA) HQ (35kA) LQ (65kA) VQ (100kA) 400 A (280...400 A) 4000 A (2000...4000 A) T5NQ400TW T5SQ400TW T5HQ400TW T5LQ400TW T5VQ400TW LQ (65kA) VQ (100kA) Tmax T5 400 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 400 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC Type In NQ (18kA) SQ (25kA) HQ (35kA) PR221DS-LS/I 400 A (160...400 A) T5NQ400BW T5SQ400BW T5HQ400BW T5LQ400BW T5VQ400BW PR222DS-LSI 400 A (160...400 A) T5NQ400CW T5SQ400CW T5HQ400CW T5LQ400CW T5VQ400CW PR222DS-LSIG 400 A (160...400 A) T5NQ400EW T5SQ400EW T5HQ400EW T5LQ400EW T5VQ400EW Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/19 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax T5 300 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 300 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit - TMA - 600V AC / 600V DC Type TMA In I3 N (18kA) S (25kA) H (35kA) L (65kA) V (100kA) 300 A (210...300 A) 3000 A (1500...3000 A) T5N300TW-4 T5S300TW-4 T5H300TW-4 T5L300TW-4 T5V300TW-4 L (65kA) V (100kA) Tmax T5 300 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 300 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type N (18kA) S (25kA) H (35kA) PR221DS-LS/I 300 A (120...300 A) T5N300BW-4 T5S300BW-4 T5H300BW-4 T5L300BW-4 T5V300BW-4 PR222DS-LSI 300 A (120...300 A) T5N300CW-4 T5S300CW-4 T5H300CW-4 T5L300CW-4 T5V300CW-4 PR222DS-LSIG 300 A (120...300 A) T5N300EW-4 T5S300EW-4 T5H300EW-4 T5L300EW-4 T5V300EW-4 Tmax T5 400 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 400 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit - TMA - 600V AC / 600V DC Type TMA In I3 N (18kA) S (25kA) H (35kA) L (65kA) V (100kA) 400 A (280...400 A) 4000 A (2000...4000 A) T5N400TW-4 T5S400TW-4 T5H400TW-4 T5L400TW-4 T5V400TW-4 L (65kA) V (100kA) Tmax T5 400 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 400 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC Type In N (18kA) S (25kA) H (35kA) PR221DS-LS/I 400 A (160...400 A) T5N400BW-4 T5S400BW-4 T5H400BW-4 T5L400BW-4 T5V400BW-4 PR222DS-LSI 400 A (160...400 A) T5N400CW-4 T5S400CW-4 T5H400CW-4 T5L400CW-4 T5V400CW-4 PR222DS-LSIG 400 A (160...400 A) T5N400EW-4 T5S400EW-4 T5H400EW-4 T5L400EW-4 T5V400EW-4 7/20 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax T6 600 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 600 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit - TMA - 600V AC / 600V DC Type TMA In I3 N (20kA) S (25kA) H (35kA) L (42kA) 600 A (420...600 A) 6000 A (3000...6000 A) T6N600TW T6S600TW T6H600TW T6L600TW Tmax T6 600 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 600 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type N (20kA) S (25kA) H (35kA) L (42kA) PR221DS-LS/I 600 A (240...600 A) T6N600BW T6S600BW T6H600BW T6L600BW PR222DS-LSI 600 A (240...600 A) T6N600CW T6S600CW T6H600CW T6L600CW PR222DS-LSIG 600 A (240...600 A) T6N600EW T6S600EW T6H600EW T6L600EW Tmax T6 800 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 800 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit - TMA - 600V AC / 600V DC Type TMA In I3 N (20kA) S (25kA) H (35kA) L (42kA) 800 A (560...800 A) 8000 A (4000...8000 A) T6N800TW T6S800TW T6H800TW T6L800TW Tmax T6 800 A - FIXED (F) 3Inpoles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 800 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC Type In N (20kA) S (25kA) H (35kA) L (42kA) PR221DS-LS/I 800 A (320...800 A) T6N800BW T6S800BW T6H800BW T6L800BW PR222DS-LSI 800 A (320...800 A) T6N800CW T6S800CW T6H800CW T6L800CW PR222DS-LSIG 800 A (320...800 A) T6N800EW T6S800EW T6H800EW T6L800EW Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/21 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax T6 600 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 600 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit - TMA - 600V AC / 600V DC Type TMA In I3 NQ (20kA) SQ (25kA) HQ (35kA) LQ (42kA) 600 A (420...600 A) 6000 A (3000...6000 A) T6NQ600TW T6SQ600TW T6HQ600TW T6LQ600TW Tmax T6 600 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 600 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type NQ (20kA) SQ (25kA) HQ (35kA) LQ (42kA) PR221DS-LS/I 600 A (240...600 A) T6NQ600BW T6SQ600BW T6HQ600BW T6LQ600BW PR222DS-LSI 600 A (240...600 A) T6NQ600CW T6SQ600CW T6HQ600CW T6LQ600CW PR222DS-LSIG 600 A (240...600 A) T6NQ600EW T6SQ600EW T6HQ600EW T6LQ600EW Tmax T6 800 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 800 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit - TMA - 600V AC / 600V DC Type TMA In I3 NQ (20kA) SQ (25kA) HQ (35kA) LQ (42kA) 800 A (560...800 A) 8000 A (4000...8000 A) T6NQ800TW T6SQ800TW T6HQ800TW T6LQ800TW Tmax T6 800 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 800 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC Type In NQ (20kA) SQ (25kA) HQ (35kA) LQ (42kA) PR221DS-LS/I 800 A (320...800 A) T6NQ800BW T6SQ800BW T6HQ800BW T6LQ800BW PR222DS-LSI 800 A (320...800 A) T6NQ800CW T6SQ800CW T6HQ800CW T6LQ800CW PR222DS-LSIG 800 A (320...800 A) T6NQ800EW T6SQ800EW T6HQ800EW T6LQ800EW 7/22 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax T6 600 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 600 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit - TMA - 600V AC / 600V DC Type TMA In I3 N (20kA) H (35kA) 600 A (420...600 A) 6000 A (3000...6000 A) T6N600TW-4 T6H600TW-4 Tmax T6 600 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 600 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type N (20kA) H (35kA) PR221DS-LS/I 600 A (240...600 A) T6N600BW-4 T6H600BW-4 PR222DS-LSI 600 A (240...600 A) T6N600CW-4 T6H600CW-4 PR222DS-LSIG 600 A (240...600 A) T6N600EW-4 T6H600EW-4 Tmax T6 800 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 800 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit - TMA - 600V AC / 600V DC Type TMA In I3 N (20kA) H (35kA) 800 A (560...800 A) 8000 A (4000...8000 A) T6N800TW-4 T6H800TW-4 Tmax T6 800 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 800 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC Type In N (20kA) H (35kA) PR221DS-LS/I 800 A (320...800 A) T6N800BW-4 T6H800BW-4 PR222DS-LSI 800 A (320...800 A) T6N800CW-4 T6H800CW-4 PR222DS-LSIG 800 A (320...800 A) T6N800EW-4 T6H800EW-4 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/23 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax T7 1000 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 1000 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type S (25kA) H (50kA) L (65kA) PR231/P-LS/I 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7S1000BW T7H1000BW T7L1000BW PR232/P-LSI 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7S1000CW T7H1000CW T7L1000CW PR331/P-LSIG 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7S1000EW T7H1000EW T7L1000EW PR332/P-LI 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7S1000PW T7H1000PW T7L1000PW PR332/P/LSI 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7S1000RW T7H1000RW T7L1000RW PR332/P-LSIG 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7S1000SW T7H1000SW T7L1000SW Tmax T7 1000 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 1000 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type SQ (25kA) HQ (50kA) LQ (65kA) PR231/P-LS/I 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7SQ1000BW T7HQ1000BW T7LQ1000BW PR232/P-LSI 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7SQ1000CW T7HQ1000CW T7LQ1000CW PR331/P-LSIG 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7SQ1000EW T7HQ1000EW T7LQ1000EW PR332/P-LI 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7SQ1000PW T7HQ1000PW T7LQ1000PW PR332/P/LSI 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7SQ1000RW T7HQ1000RW T7LQ1000RW PR332/P-LSIG 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7SQ1000SW T7HQ1000SW T7LQ1000SW Tmax T7 1000 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 1000 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC Type In S (25kA) H (50kA) L (65kA) PR231/P-LS/I 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7S1000BW-4 T7H1000BW-4 T7L1000BW-4 PR232/P-LSI 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7S1000CW-4 T7H1000CW-4 T7L1000CW-4 PR331/P-LSIG 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7S1000EW-4 T7H1000EW-4 T7L1000EW-4 PR332/P-LI 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7S1000PW-4 T7H1000PW-4 T7L1000PW-4 PR332/P/LSI 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7S1000RW-4 T7H1000RW-4 T7L1000RW-4 PR332/P-LSIG 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7S1000SW-4 T7H1000SW-4 T7L1000SW-4 7/24 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax T7 1200 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 1200 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type S (25kA) H (50kA) L (65kA) PR231/P-LS/I 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7S1200BW T7H1200BW T7L1200BW PR232/P-LSI 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7S1200CW T7H1200CW T7L1200CW PR331/P-LSIG 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7S1200EW T7H1200EW T7L1200EW PR332/P-LI 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7S1200PW T7H1200PW T7L1200PW PR332/P/LSI 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7S1200RW T7H1200RW T7L1200RW PR332/P-LSIG 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7S1200SW T7H1200SW T7L1200SW Tmax T7 1200 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 1200 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type SQ (25kA) HQ (50kA) LQ (65kA) PR231/P-LS/I 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7SQ1200BW T7HQ1200BW T7LQ1200BW PR232/P-LSI 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7SQ1200CW T7HQ1200CW T7LQ1200CW PR331/P-LSIG 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7SQ1200EW T7HQ1200EW T7LQ1200EW PR332/P-LI 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7SQ1200PW T7HQ1200PW T7LQ1200PW PR332/P/LSI 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7SQ1200RW T7HQ1200RW T7LQ1200RW PR332/P-LSIG 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7SQ1200SW T7HQ1200SW T7LQ1200SW Tmax T7 1200 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 1200 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC Type In S (25kA) H (50kA) L (65kA) PR231/P-LS/I 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7S1200BW-4 T7H1200BW-4 T7L1200BW-4 PR232/P-LSI 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7S1200CW-4 T7H1200CW-4 T7L1200CW-4 PR331/P-LSIG 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7S1200EW-4 T7H1200EW-4 T7L1200EW-4 PR332/P-LI 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7S1200PW-4 T7H1200PW-4 T7L1200PW-4 PR332/P/LSI 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7S1200RW-4 T7H1200RW-4 T7L1200RW-4 PR332/P-LSIG 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7S1200SW-4 T7H1200SW-4 T7L1200SW-4 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/25 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax T7M 1000 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 1000 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type S (25kA) H (50kA) L (65kA) PR231/P-LS/I 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7MS1000BW T7MH1000BW T7ML1000BW PR232/P-LSI 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7MS1000CW T7MH1000CW T7ML1000CW PR331/P-LSIG 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7MS1000EW T7MH1000EW T7ML1000EW PR332/P-LI 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7MS1000PW T7MH1000PW T7ML1000PW PR332/P/LSI 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7MS1000RW T7MH1000RW T7ML1000RW PR332/P-LSIG 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7MS1000SW T7MH1000SW T7ML1000SW Tmax T7M 1000 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 1000 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type SQ (25kA) HQ (50kA) LQ (65kA) PR231/P-LS/I 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7MSQ1000BW T7MHQ1000BW T7MLQ1000BW PR232/P-LSI 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7MSQ1000CW T7MHQ1000CW T7MLQ1000CW PR331/P-LSIG 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7MSQ1000EW T7MHQ1000EW T7MLQ1000EW PR332/P-LI 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7MSQ1000PW T7MHQ1000PW T7MLQ1000PW PR332/P/LSI 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7MSQ1000RW T7MHQ1000RW T7MLQ1000RW PR332/P-LSIG 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7MSQ1000SW T7MHQ1000SW T7MLQ1000SW Tmax T7M 1000 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 1000 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC Type In S (25kA) H (50kA) L (65kA) PR231/P-LS/I 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7MS1000BW-4 T7MH1000BW-4 T7ML1000BW-4 PR232/P-LSI 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7MS1000CW-4 T7MH1000CW-4 T7ML1000CW-4 PR331/P-LSIG 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7MS1000EW-4 T7MH1000EW-4 T7ML1000EW-4 PR332/P-LI 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7MS1000PW-4 T7MH1000PW-4 T7ML1000PW-4 PR332/P/LSI 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7MS1000RW-4 T7MH1000RW-4 T7ML1000RW-4 PR332/P-LSIG 1000 A (400...1000 A) T7MS1000SW-4 T7MH1000SW-4 T7ML1000SW-4 7/26 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax T7M 1200 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 1200 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type S (25kA) H (50kA) L (65kA) PR231/P-LS/I 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7MS1200BW T7MH1200BW T7ML1200BW PR232/P-LSI 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7MS1200CW T7MH1200CW T7ML1200CW PR331/P-LSIG 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7MS1200EW T7MH1200EW T7ML1200EW PR332/P-LI 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7MS1200PW T7MH1200PW T7ML1200PW PR332/P/LSI 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7MS1200RW T7MH1200RW T7ML1200RW PR332/P-LSIG 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7MS1200SW T7MH1200SW T7ML1200SW Tmax T7M 1200 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 1200 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type SQ (25kA) HQ (50kA) LQ (65kA) PR231/P-LS/I 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7MSQ1200BW T7MHQ1200BW T7MLQ1200BW PR232/P-LSI 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7MSQ1200CW T7MHQ1200CW T7MLQ1200CW PR331/P-LSIG 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7MSQ1200EW T7MHQ1200EW T7MLQ1200EW PR332/P-LI 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7MSQ1200PW T7MHQ1200PW T7MLQ1200PW PR332/P/LSI 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7MSQ1200RW T7MHQ1200RW T7MLQ1200RW PR332/P-LSIG 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7MSQ1200SW T7MHQ1200SW T7MLQ1200SW Tmax T7M 1200 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 1200 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC Type In S (25kA) H (50kA) L (65kA) PR231/P-LS/I 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7MS1200BW-4 T7MH1200BW-4 T7ML1200BW-4 PR232/P-LSI 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7MS1200CW-4 T7MH1200CW-4 T7ML1200CW-4 PR331/P-LSIG 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7MS1200EW-4 T7MH1200EW-4 T7ML1200EW-4 PR332/P-LI 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7MS1200PW-4 T7MH1200PW-4 T7ML1200PW-4 PR332/P/LSI 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7MS1200RW-4 T7MH1200RW-4 T7ML1200RW-4 PR332/P-LSIG 1200 A (480...1200 A) T7MS1200SW-4 T7MH1200SW-4 T7ML1200SW-4 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/27 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax T8 1600 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST8) Iu (40C) = 1600 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type V (100kA) PR331/P-LSI 1600 A (640...1600 A) PR331/P-LSIG 1600 A (640...1600 A) T8V16CW T8V16EW PR332/P-LI 1600 A (640...1600 A) T8V16PW PR332/P/LSI 1600 A (640...1600 A) T8V16RW PR332/P-LSIG 1600 A (640...1600 A) T8V16SW Tmax T8 2000 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST8) Iu (40C) = 2000 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type V (100kA) PR331/P-LSI 2000 A (800...2000 A) PR331/P-LSIG 2000 A (800...2000 A) T8V20CW T8V20EW PR332/P-LI 2000 A (800...2000 A) T8V20PW PR332/P/LSI 2000 A (800...2000 A) T8V20RW PR332/P-LSIG 2000 A (800...2000 A) T8V20SW Tmax T8 2500 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST8) Iu (40C) = 2500 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type V (100kA) PR331/P-LSI 2500 A (1000...2500 A) PR331/P-LSIG 2500 A (1000...2500 A) T8V25CW T8V25EW PR332/P-LI 2500 A (1000...2500 A) T8V25PW PR332/P/LSI 2500 A (1000...2500 A) T8V25RW PR332/P-LSIG 2500 A (1000...2500 A) T8V25SW Tmax T8 3000 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST8) Iu (40C) = 3000 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC Type In V (100kA) PR331/P-LSI 3000 A (1200...3000 A) PR331/P-LSIG 3000 A (1200...3000 A) T8V30EW PR332/P-LI 3000 A (1200...3000 A) T8V30PW PR332/P/LSI 3000 A (1200...3000 A) T8V30RW PR332/P-LSIG 3000 A (1200...3000 A) T8V30SW 7/28 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL T8V30CW Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax T8 1600 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST8) Iu (40C) = 1600 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type VQ (100kA) PR331/P-LSI 1600 A (640...1600 A) PR331/P-LSIG 1600 A (640...1600 A) T8VQ16CW T8VQ16EW PR332/P-LI 1600 A (640...1600 A) T8VQ16PW PR332/P/LSI 1600 A (640...1600 A) T8VQ16RW PR332/P-LSIG 1600 A (640...1600 A) T8VQ16SW Tmax T8 2000 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST8) Iu (40C) = 2000 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type VQ (100kA) PR331/P-LSI 2000 A (800...2000 A) PR331/P-LSIG 2000 A (800...2000 A) T8VQ20CW T8VQ20EW PR332/P-LI 2000 A (800...2000 A) T8VQ20PW PR332/P/LSI 2000 A (800...2000 A) T8VQ20RW PR332/P-LSIG 2000 A (800...2000 A) T8VQ20SW Tmax T8 2500 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST8) Iu (40C) = 2500 A - Rear vertical terminals (VR) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type VQ (100kA) PR331/P-LSI 2500 A (1000...2500 A) PR331/P-LSIG 2500 A (1000...2500 A) T8VQ25CW T8VQ25EW PR332/P-LI 2500 A (1000...2500 A) T8VQ25PW PR332/P/LSI 2500 A (1000...2500 A) T8VQ25RW PR332/P-LSIG 2500 A (1000...2500 A) T8VQ25SW Tmax T8 3000 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST8) Iu (40C) = 3000 A - Rear vertical terminals (VR) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC Type In VQ (100kA) PR331/P-LSI 3000 A (1200...3000 A) PR331/P-LSIG 3000 A (1200...3000 A) T8VQ30CW T8VQ30EW PR332/P-LI 3000 A (1200...3000 A) T8VQ30PW PR332/P/LSI 3000 A (1200...3000 A) T8VQ30RW PR332/P-LSIG 3000 A (1200...3000 A) T8VQ30SW Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/29 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Power distribution circuit breakers Tmax T8 1600 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST8) Iu (40C) = 1600 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type V (100kA) PR331/P-LSI 1600 A (640...1600 A) PR331/P-LSIG 1600 A (640...1600 A) T8V16CW-4 T8V16EW-4 PR332/P-LI 1600 A (640...1600 A) T8V16PW-4 PR332/P/LSI 1600 A (640...1600 A) T8V16RW-4 PR332/P-LSIG 1600 A (640...1600 A) T8V16SW-4 Tmax T8 2000 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST8) Iu (40C) = 2000 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type V (100kA) PR331/P-LSI 2000 A (800...2000 A) PR331/P-LSIG 2000 A (800...2000 A) T8V20CW-4 T8V20EW-4 PR332/P-LI 2000 A (800...2000 A) T8V20PW-4 PR332/P/LSI 2000 A (800...2000 A) T8V20RW-4 PR332/P-LSIG 2000 A (800...2000 A) T8V20SW-4 Tmax T8 2500 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST8) Iu (40C) = 2500 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type V (100kA) PR331/P-LSI 2500 A (1000...2500 A) PR331/P-LSIG 2500 A (1000...2500 A) T8V25CW-4 T8V25EW-4 PR332/P-LI 2500 A (1000...2500 A) T8V25PW-4 PR332/P/LSI 2500 A (1000...2500 A) T8V25RW-4 PR332/P-LSIG 2500 A (1000...2500 A) T8V25SW-4 Tmax T8 3000 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST8) Iu (40C) = 3000 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC Type In V (100kA) PR331/P-LSI 3000 A (1200...3000 A) PR331/P-LSIG 3000 A (1200...3000 A) T8V30EW-4 PR332/P-LI 3000 A (1200...3000 A) T8V30PW-4 PR332/P/LSI 3000 A (1200...3000 A) T8V30RW-4 PR332/P-LSIG 3000 A (1200...3000 A) T8V30SW-4 7/30 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL T8V30CW-4 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Motor control protection circuit breakers Tmax T2 100 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Magnetic only trip unit - MA - 480V AC In I3 S (35kA) H (65kA) MA 20 A 240 A (120...240 A) T2S020MW T2H020MW MA 50 A 600 A (300...600 A) T2S050MW T2H050MW MA 100 A 1200 A (600...1200 A) T2S100MW T2H100MW Type Tmax T2 100 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Instantaneous only electronic trip unit - 480V AC In I3 S (35kA) H (65kA) PR221DS-I 25 A 250 A (25...250 A) T2S020E5W T2H020E5W PR221DS-I 60 A 600 A (60...600 A) T2S050E5W T2H050E5W PR221DS-I 100 A 1000 A (100...1000 A) T2S100E5W T2H100E5W Type Tmax T3 225 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 225 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Magnetic only trip unit - MA - 480V AC / 500V DC Type In I3 S (35kA) MA 100 A 1200 A (600...1200 A) T3S100MW MA 125 A 1500 A (750...1500 A) T3S125MW MA 150 A 1800 A (900...1800 A) T3S150MW MA 200 A 2400 A (1200...2400 A) T3S200MW Tmax Ts3 150 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 150 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Magnetic only trip unit - MA - 600V AC / 600V DC In I3 L (10kA) L (25kA) MA 3A 36 A (12...36 A) Ts3L003MW - MA 5A 60 A (20...60 A) Ts3L005MW - MA 10 A 120 A (40...120 A) Ts3L010MW - MA 25 A 300 A (100...300 A) Ts3L025MW - MA 50 A 600 A (200...600 A) - Ts3L050MW MA 100 A 1200 A (400...1200 A) - Ts3L100MW MA 125 A 1500 A (500...1500 A) - Ts3L125MW MA 150 A 1800 A (600...1800 A) - Ts3L150MW Type Tmax Ts3 225 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 225 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Magnetic only trip unit - MA - 480V AC / 500V DC In I3 L (65kA) MA 175 A 2100 A (700...2100 A) Ts3L175MW MA 225 A 2400 A (800...2400 A) Ts3L225MW Type Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/31 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Motor control protection circuit breakers Tmax T4 250 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 250 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Instantaneous only electronic trip unit - 600V AC In I3 N (18kA) S (25kA) H (35kA) L (65kA) PR221DS-I 100 A 1000 A (100...1000 A) T4N100E5W T4S100E5W T4H100E5W T4L100E5W PR221DS-I 150 A 1500 A (150...1500 A) T4N150E5W T4S150E5W T4H150E5W T4L150E5W PR221DS-I 250 A 2500 A (250...2500 A) T4N250E5W T4S250E5W T4H250E5W T4L250E5W Type Tmax T5 400 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 400 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Instantaneous only electronic trip unit - 600V AC In I3 N (18kA) S (25kA) H (35kA) L (65kA) PR221DS-I 300 A 3000 A (300...3000 A) T5N300E5W T5S300E5W T5H300E5W T5L300E5W PR221DS-I 400 A 4000 A (400...4000 A) T5N400E5W T5S400E5W T5H400E5W T5L400E5W Type Tmax T5 600 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 600 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Instantaneous only electronic trip unit - 600V AC Type PR221DS-I In I3 N (18kA) S (25kA) H (35kA) L (65kA) 600 A 6000 A (600...6000 A) T5N600E5W T5S600E5W T5H600E5W T5L600E5W Tmax T6 800 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 800 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Instantaneous only electronic trip unit - 600V AC In I3 N (20kA) S (25kA) H (35kA) L (42kA) PR221DS-I 600 A 6000 A (600...6000 A) T6N600E5W T6S600E5W T6H600E5W T6L600E5W PR221DS-I 800 A 8000 A (800...8000 A) T6N800E5W T6S800E5W T6H800E5W T6L800E5W Type 7/32 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Molded case switch Tmax T1 100 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals for copper/aluminium cables (FC CuAl) Part number Molded case switch - 347V AC / 500V DC Type MS In I3 N (2kA) 100 A 1000 A (1) T1N100DL (1) Magnetic override Tmax T1 100 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals for copper/aluminium cables (FC CuAl) Part number Molded case switch - 347V AC / 500V DC Type MS In I3 N (2kA) 100 A 1000 A (1) T1N100DL-4 (1) Magnetic override Tmax T3 225 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 225 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Molded case switch - 347V AC / 500V DC Type In I3 S (3.6kA) MS 150 A 1500 A (1) T3S150DW MS 225 A 2250 A (1) T3S225DW (1) Magnetic override Tmax T3 225 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 225 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Molded case switch - 347V AC / 500V DC Type In I3 S (3.6kA) (1) T3S150DW-4 T3S225DW-4 MS 150 A 1500 A MS 225 A 2250 A (1) (1) Magnetic override Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/33 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Molded case switch Tmax Ts3 150 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 150 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Molded case switch - 600V AC / 600V DC Type MS In I3 H (6.5kA) 150 A 1500 A (1) Ts3H150DW (1) Magnetic override Tmax Ts3 150 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 150 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Molded case switch - 600V AC / 600V DC Type MS In I3 H (6.5kA) 150 A 1500 A (1) Ts3H150DW-4 (1) Magnetic override Tmax Ts3 225 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 225 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Molded case switch - 480V AC / 500V DC Type MS In I3 H (6.5kA) 225 A 2250 A (1) Ts3H225DW (1) Magnetic override Tmax Ts3 225 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 225 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Molded case switch - 480V AC / 500V DC Type MS In 225 A I3 2250 A H (6.5kA) (1) Ts3H225DW-4 (1) Magnetic override Tmax T4 250 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 250 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Molded case switch - 600V AC / 600V DC Type MS In I3 N (3.6kA) S (3.6kA) H (3.6kA) L (3.6kA) V (3.6kA) 250 A 3000 A (1) T4N250DW T4S250DW T4H250DW T4L250DW T4V250DW (1) Magnetic override Tmax T4 250 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 250 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Molded case switch - 600V AC / 600V DC Type MS In I3 H (3.6kA) 250 A 3000 A (1) T4H250DW-4 (1) Magnetic override 7/34 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Molded case switch Tmax T5 400 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 400 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Molded case switch - 600V AC / 600V DC Type MS In I3 N (6kA) S (6kA) H (6kA) L (6kA) V (6kA) 400 A 5000 A (1) T5N400DW T5S400DW T5H400DW T5L400DW T5V400DW (1) Magnetic override Tmax T5 400 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 400 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Molded case switch - 600V AC / 600V DC Type MS In I3 H (6kA) 400 A 5000 A (1) T5H400DW-4 (1) Magnetic override Tmax T5 600 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 600 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Molded case switch - 600V AC / 600V DC Type MS In I3 N (6kA) S (6kA) H (6kA) L (6kA) V (6kA) 600 A 6000 A (1) T5N600DW T5S600DW T5H600DW T5L600DW T5V600DW (1) Magnetic override Tmax T6 800 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 800 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Molded case switch - 600V AC / 600V DC Type MS In 800 A I3 10000 A H (15kA) (1) T6H800DW (1) Magnetic override Tmax T6 800 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 800 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Molded case switch - 600V AC / 600V DC Type MS In I3 H (15kA) 800 A 10000 A (1) T6H800DW-4 (1) Magnetic override Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/35 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Molded case switch Tmax T7 1200 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 1200 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Molded case switch - 600V AC / 600V DC In I3 MS (T7) 1200 A 12000 A (1) T7H1200DW MS (T7M) 1200 A 12000 A (1) T7MH1200DW Type H (20kA) (1) Magnetic override Tmax T7 1200 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 1200 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Molded case switch - 600V AC / 600V DC In I3 MS (T7) 1200 A 12000 A (1) T7H1200DW-4 MS (T7M) 1200 A 12000 A (1) T7MH1200DW-4 Type H (20kA) (1) Magnetic override Tmax T8 2000/2500/3000 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST8) Iu (40C) = 2000/2500/3000 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Molded case switch - 600V AC / 600V DC In I3 V (40kA) MS 2000 A 40000 A (1) T8V20DW MS 2500 A 40000 A (1) T8V25DW MS 3000 A 40000 A (1) T8V30DW Type (1) Magnetic override Tmax T8 2000/2500/3000 A - FIXED (F) 4 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST8) Iu (40C) = 2000/2500/3000 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Molded case switch - 600V AC / 600V DC In I3 V (40kA) MS 2000 A 40000 A (1) T8V20DW-4 MS 2500 A 40000 A (1) T8V25DW-4 MS 3000 A 40000 A (1) T8V30DW-4 Type (1) Magnetic override 7/36 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Current limiting circuit breakers Tmax T2 100 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit with fixed tresholds - 480V AC Type In I3 H (65kA) TMF 15 A 500 A T2H015TW TMF 20 A 500 A T2H020TW TMF 25 A 500 A T2H025TW TMF 30 A 500 A T2H030TW TMF 40 A 500 A T2H040TW TMF 50 A 500 A T2H050TW TMF 60 A 600 A T2H060TW TMF 70 A 700 A T2H070TW TMF 80 A 800 A T2H080TW TMF 90 A 900 A T2H090TW TMF 100 A 1000 A T2H100TW Tmax T2 100 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 480V AC In Type H (65kA) PR221DS-LS/I 25 A (10...25 A) T2H025BW PR221DS-LS/I 60 A (24...60 A) T2H060BW PR221DS-LS/I 100 A (40...100 A) T2H100BW Tmax T2 100 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit with fixed tresholds - 480V AC In I3 HQ (65kA) TMF 15 A 500 A T2HQ015TW TMF 20 A 500 A T2HQ020TW TMF 25 A 500 A T2HQ025TW TMF 30 A 500 A T2HQ030TW TMF 40 A 500 A T2HQ040TW TMF 50 A 500 A T2HQ050TW TMF 60 A 600 A T2HQ060TW TMF 70 A 700 A T2HQ070TW TMF 80 A 800 A T2HQ080TW TMF 90 A 900 A T2HQ090TW TMF 100 A 1000 A T2HQ100TW Type Tmax T2 100 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 480V AC Type In HQ (65kA) PR221DS-LS/I 25 A (10...25 A) T2HQ025BW PR221DS-LS/I 60 A (24...60 A) T2HQ060BW PR221DS-LS/I 100 A (40...100 A) T2HQ100BW Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/37 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Current limiting circuit breakers Tmax T4 250 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit TMF/TMD/TMA - 600V AC / 600V DC Type In I3 H (35kA) V (100kA) TMF 20 A 500 A T4H020TW T4V020TW TMD 30 A (21...30 A) 500 A T4H030TW T4V030TW TMD 40 A (28...40 A) 500 A T4H040TW T4V040TW TMD 50 A (35...50 A) 500 A T4H050TW T4V050TW TMA 80 A (56...80 A) 800 A (400...800 A) T4H080TW T4V080TW TMA 100 A (70...100 A) 1000 A (500...1000 A) T4H100TW T4V100TW TMA 125 A (88...125 A) 1250 A (625...1250 A) T4H125TW T4V125TW TMA 150 A (105...150 A) 1500 A (750...1500 A) T4H150TW T4V150TW TMA 200 A (140...200 A) 2000 A (1000...2000 A) T4H200TW T4V200TW TMA 250 A (175...250 A) 2500 A (1250...2500 A) T4H250TW T4V250TW Tmax T4 100 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type H (35kA) V (100kA) PR221DS-LS/I 100 A (40...100 A) T4H100BW T4V100BW PR222DS-LSI 100 A (40...100 A) T4H100CW T4V100CW PR222DS-LSIG 100 A (40...100 A) T4H100EW T4V100EW Tmax T4 150 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (60C) = 150 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type H (35kA) V (100kA) PR221DS-LS/I 150 A (60...150 A) T4H150BW T4V150BW PR222DS-LSI 150 A (60...150 A) T4H150CW T4V150CW PR222DS-LSIG 150 A (60...150 A) T4H150EW T4V150EW Tmax T4 250 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (60C) = 250 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC Type In H (35kA) V (100kA) PR221DS-LS/I 250 A (100...250 A) T4H250BW T4V250BW PR222DS-LSI 250 A (100...250 A) T4H250CW T4V250CW PR222DS-LSIG 250 A (100...250 A) T4H250EW T4V250EW 7/38 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Current limiting circuit breakers Tmax T4 250 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit TMF/TMD/TMA - 600V AC / 600V DC Type In I3 HQ (35kA) VQ (100kA) TMF 20 A 500 A T4HQ020TW T4VQ020TW TMD 30 A (21...30 A) 500 A T4HQ030TW T4VQ030TW TMD 40 A (28...40 A) 500 A T4HQ040TW T4VQ040TW TMD 50 A (35...50 A) 500 A T4HQ050TW T4VQ050TW TMA 80 A (56...80 A) 800 A (400...800 A) T4HQ080TW T4VQ080TW TMA 100 A (70...100 A) 1000 A (500...1000 A) T4HQ100TW T4VQ100TW TMA 125 A (88...125 A) 1250 A (625...1250 A) T4HQ125TW T4VQ125TW TMA 150 A (105...150 A) 1500 A (750...1500 A) T4HQ150TW T4VQ150TW TMA 200 A (140...200 A) 2000 A (1000...2000 A) T4HQ200TW T4VQ200TW TMA 250 A (175...250 A) 2500 A (1250...2500 A) T4HQ250TW T4VQ250TW Tmax T4 100 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 100 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type HQ (35kA) VQ (100kA) PR221DS-LS/I 100 A (40...100 A) T4HQ100BW T4VQ100BW PR222DS-LSI 100 A (40...100 A) T4HQ100CW T4VQ100CW PR222DS-LSIG 100 A (40...100 A) T4HQ100EW T4VQ100EW Tmax T4 150 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (60C) = 150 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type HQ (35kA) VQ (100kA) PR221DS-LS/I 150 A (60...150 A) T4HQ150BW T4VQ150BW PR222DS-LSI 150 A (60...150 A) T4HQ150CW T4VQ150CW PR222DS-LSIG 150 A (60...150 A) T4HQ150EW T4VQ150EW Tmax T4 250 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (60C) = 250 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC Type In HQ (35kA) VQ (100kA) PR221DS-LS/I 250 A (100...250 A) T4HQ250BW T4VQ250BW PR222DS-LSI 250 A (100...250 A) T4HQ250CW T4VQ250CW PR222DS-LSIG 250 A (100...250 A) T4HQ250EW T4VQ250EW Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/39 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Current limiting circuit breakers Tmax T5 300 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 300 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit TMA - 600V AC / 600V DC Type TMA In I3 H (35kA) V (100kA) 300 A (210...300 A) 3000 A (1500...3000 A) T5H300TW T5V300TW Tmax T5 300 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 300 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type H (35kA) V (100kA) PR221DS-LS/I 300 A (120...300 A) T5H300BW T5V300BW PR222DS-LSI 300 A (120...300 A) T5H300CW T5V300CW PR222DS-LSIG 300 A (120...300 A) T5H300EW T5V300EW Tmax T5 400 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 400 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit TMA - 600V AC / 600V DC Type TMA In I3 H (35kA) V (100kA) 400 A (280...400 A) 4000 A (2000...4000 A) T5H400TW T5V400TW Tmax T5 400 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 400 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC Type In H (35kA) V (100kA) PR221DS-LS/I 400 A (160...400 A) T5H400BW T5V400BW PR222DS-LSI 400 A (160...400 A) T5H400CW T5V400CW PR222DS-LSIG 400 A (160...400 A) T5H400EW T5V400EW 7/40 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Current limiting circuit breakers Tmax T5 300 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 300 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit TMA - 600V AC / 600V DC Type TMA In I3 HQ (35kA) VQ (100kA) 300 A (210...300 A) 3000 A (1500...3000 A) T5HQ300TW T5VQ300TW Tmax T5 300 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 300 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC In Type HQ (35kA) VQ (100kA) PR221DS-LS/I 300 A (120...300 A) T5HQ300BW T5VQ300BW PR222DS-LSI 300 A (120...300 A) T5HQ300CW T5VQ300CW PR222DS-LSIG 300 A (120...300 A) T5HQ300EW T5VQ300EW Tmax T5 400 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 400 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Thermal-Magnetic trip unit TMA - 600V AC / 600V DC Type TMA In I3 HQ (35kA) VQ (100kA) 400 A (280...400 A) 4000 A (2000...4000 A) T5HQ400TW T5VQ400TW Tmax T5 400 A - FIXED (F) 3 poles - 100% rated - CSA C22.2 / UL listed (Discount DS-ST) Iu (40C) = 400 A - Front terminals (F) Part number Electronic trip unit (AC only) - 600V AC Type In HQ (35kA) VQ (100kA) PR221DS-LS/I 400 A (160...400 A) T5HQ400BW T5VQ400BW PR222DS-LSI 400 A (160...400 A) T5HQ400CW T5VQ400CW PR222DS-LSIG 400 A (160...400 A) T5HQ400EW T5VQ400EW Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/41 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Cradle conversion kits and accessories Tmax Plug-in base with front terminals (F) - T2...T3 CSA / UL listed Part number Breaker type 3 poles 4 poles T2 KT2PFF KT2PFF-4 T3 KT3PFF KT3PFF-4 Tmax Plug-in base with front extended terminals (EF) - Ts3...T5 CSA / UL listed Part number Breaker type 3 poles 4 poles Ts3 KTs3PFF KTs3PFF-4 T4 KT4PFEF KT4PFEF-4 T5 400 A KT5PFEF KT5PFEF-4 T5 600 A KT5PFEF6 KT5PFEF6-4 Tmax Plug-in base with rear vertical terminals (VR) - T4...T5 CSA / UL listed Part number Breaker type T4 3 poles 4 poles KT4PFVR KT4PFVR-4 T5 400 A KT5PFVR KT5PFVR-4 T5 600 A KT5PFVR6 KT5PFVR6-4 Tmax Plug-in base with rear horizontal terminals (HR) - T4...T5 CSA / UL listed Part number Breaker type T4 3 poles 4 poles KT4PFHR KT4PFHR-4 T5 400 A KT5PFHR KT5PFHR-4 T5 600 A KT5PFHR6 KT5PFHR6-4 Tmax Plug-in base with rear threaded terminals (R) - Ts3 CSA / UL listed Part number Breaker type Ts3 3 poles 4 poles KTs3PFR KTs3PFR-4 Tmax accessory connectors and adaptors - T2...T6 Required when adding accessories to plug-in type breakers Part number Accessory type Shunt trip / Undervoltage T2...T3 T4...T6 KT3PC-3 KT6ADP-5 1 form C + 1 BA KT3PC-6 KT6ADP-6 3 form C + 1BA KT3PC-12 KT6ADP-12 Stored energy motor - KT6ADP-10 Stored energy motor + Shunt trip / Undervoltage - KT6ADP-10 7/42 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Cradle conversion kits and accessories Tmax Draw-out cradle with front terminals (F) - Ts3 CSA / UL listed Part number Breaker type Ts3 3 poles 4 poles KTs3WFC KTs3WFC-4 Tmax Draw-out cradle with rear terminals (R) - Ts3 CSA / UL listed Part number Breaker type Ts3 3 poles 4 poles KTs3WFR KTs3WFR-4 Tmax Draw-out cradle with front extended terminals (EF) - Ts3...T6 CSA / UL listed Part number Breaker type 3 poles 4 poles Ts3 KTs3WFF KTs3WFF-4 T4 KT4WFEF KT4WFEF-4 T5 400 A KT5WFEF KT5WFEF-4 T5 600 A KT5WFEF6 KT5WFEF6-4 T6 KT6WFEF KT6WFEF Tmax Draw-out cradle with rear vertical terminals (VR) - T4...T6 CSA / UL listed Part number Breaker type 3 poles 4 poles KT4WFVR KT4WFVR-4 T5 400 A KT5WFVR KT5WFVR-4 T5 600 A KT5WFVR6 KT5WFVR6-4 T6 KT6WFVR T4 KT6WFVR-4 Tmax Draw-out cradle with rear horizontal terminals (HR) - T4...T6 CSA / UL listed Part number Breaker type 3 poles 4 poles KT4WFHR KT4WFHR-4 T5 400 A KT5WFHR KT5WFHR-4 T5 600 A KT5WFHR6 KT5WFHR6-4 T6 KT6WFHR T4 KT6WFHR-4 Tmax Draw-out cradle with rear adkustable terminals (RC) - T7 / T7M CSA / UL listed Part number Breaker type T7...T7M 3 poles 4 poles KT7WFRC KT7WFRC-4 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/43 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Cradle conversion kits and accessories Tmax conversion kits from FIXED into moving part of PLUG-IN - Ts3...T5 CSA / UL listed Part number Breaker type 3 poles 4 poles Ts3 KTs3PMK KTs3PMK-4 T2 KT2PMK KT2PMK-4 T3 KT3PMK KT3PMK-4 T4 KT4PMK KT4PMK-4 T5 400 A KT5PMK KT5PMK-4 T5 600 A KT5PMK6 KT5PMK6-4 The plug-in version must be composed as follow: a) Fixed circuit-breaker b) Conversion kit for fixed into moving part of plug-in c) Plug-in base Tmax conversion kits from FIXED into moving part of DRAW-OUT - Ts3...T7 CSA / UL listed Part number Breaker type 3 poles 4 poles Ts3 KTs3WMK KTs3WMK-4 T4 KT4WMK KT4WMK-4 T5 400 A KT5WMK KT5WMK-4 T5 600 A KT5WMK6 KT5WMK6-4 T6 KT6WMK KT6WMK-4 T7...T7M KT7WMK KT7WMK-4 The plug-in version must be composed as follow: a) Fixed circuit-breaker b) Conversion kit for fixed into moving part of draw out c) Cradle d) Front lever, rotary handle or motor operator (only for T4, T5 and T6) e) Sliding contact blocks if circuit breaker is automatic or fitted with electrical accessories (only for T7) Sliding contact blocks for DRAW-OUT type - T7 / T7M CSA / UL listed Part number type T7 T7M Left block for breaker MP KT7XSCMP-L KT7XSCMP-L Center block for breaker MP KT7XSCMP-C KT7XSCMP-C Right block for breaker MP KT7XSCMP-R KT7XSCMP-R Left block for cradle KT7SCFP-L KT7MXSCFP-L Center block for cradle KT7XSCFP-C KT7XSCFP-C Right block for cradle KT7XSCFP-R Note: 7/44 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Moving part of a circuit breaker fitted with electronic accessories or PR331/P and PR332/P electronic trip units is supplied as standard with blocks for the connection, while blocks for cradle must always be ordered KT7XSCFP-R Tmax molded case circuit breakers Cradle conversion kits and accessories HR/VR terminals for cradle - T7 / T7M CSA / UL listed Part number Breaker type T7...T7M 3 poles 4 poles KT7XHRVR-3 KT7XHRVR-4 Terminal covers for cradle TCFP - Ts3...T5 CSA / UL listed Part number Breaker type 3 poles 4 poles Ts3 KTs3TCFP-3 KTs3TCFP-4 T4 KT4TCFP-3 KT4TCFP-4 T5 KT5TCFP-3 KT5TCFP-4 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/45 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical accessories Shunt trip SOR - T1...T6 CSA / UL listed Part number Control voltage T1...T3 T4...T6 12V DC KT3S9 KT6S9 24...30V AC/DC KT3S8 KT6S8 48...60V AC/DC KT3S7 KT6S7 110...125V AC/DC KT3S4 KT6S4 380...440V AC KT3S3 KT6S3 220...250V AC/DC KT3S2 KT6S2 480...500V AC KT3S1 KT6S1 Shunt trip SOR - Ts3 (Requires a connector) CSA / UL listed Part number Control voltage Ts3 12V DC KTs3S9 24V AC/DC KTs3S8 48V AC/DC KTs3S7 110...125V AC/DC KTs3S4 220...250V AC/DC KTs3S2 480V AC KTs3S1 Shunt trip connector - Ts3 (Required) CSA / UL listed Part number Breaker type Ts3 Shunt trip with permanent supply: For remote opening of circuit breaker. Guaranteed operation between 75-110% of the rated power supply voltage. These shunt trips have much lower power consumption. Fixed Draw-out KTs3C-SU KTs3C-SUP Shunt trip with permanent operation PS-SOR - T4...T6 CSA / UL listed Part number Control voltage T4...T6 24...30V DC KT6SP4 110...120V AC/DC KT6SP8 Shunt trip with permanent operation PS-SOR - Ts3 (Requires a connector) CSA / UL listed Part number Control voltage Ts3 24V DC KTs3SP4 120V AC KTs3SP8 7/46 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical accessories Shunt trip YO - T7 / T7M CSA / UL listed Part number Control voltage T7...T7M 24V AC/DC KT7XS0 30V AC/DC KT7XS9 48V AC/DC KT7XS8 60V AC/DC KT7XS7 110...120V AC/DC KT7XS6 120...127V AC/DC KT7XS5 220...240V AC/DC KT7XS4 250V AC/DC KT7XS3 380...440V AC KT7XS2 440...480V AC KT7XS1 Shunt trip YO/YO2 - T8 CSA / UL listed Part number Control voltage YO-T8 YO2-T8 24V AC/DC KT8ES0 KT8ES0-2 30V AC/DC KT8ES9 KT8ES9-2 48V AC/DC KT8ES8 KT8ES8-2 60V AC/DC KT8ES7 KT8ES7-2 110...120V AC/DC KT8ES6 KT8ES6-2 120...127V AC/DC KT8ES5 KT8ES5-2 220...240V AC/DC KT8ES4 KT8ES4-2 250V AC/DC KT8ES3 KT8ES3-2 380...440V AC KT8ES2 KT8ES2-2 440...480V AC KT8ES1 KT8ES1-2 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/47 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical accessories Undervoltage release UVR - T1...T6 CSA / UL listed Part number Control voltage T1...T3 T4...T6 24...30V AC/DC KT3U8 KT6U8 48V AC/DC KT3U7 KT6U7 60V AC/DC KT3U5 KT6U5 110...125V AC/DC KT3U4 KT6U4 380...440V AC KT3U3 KT6U3 220...250V AC/DC KT3U2 KT6U2 480...500V AC KT3U1 KT6U1 Undervoltage release UVR - Ts3 (Requires a connector) CSA / UL listed Part number Control voltage T7...T7M 24V AC/DC KTs3U8 48V AC/DC KTs3U7 110...125V DC KTs3U6 220...250V DC KTs3U5 110...127V AC KTs3U4 24V AC KTs3U3 220...250V AC KTs3U2 480V AC KTs3U1 Undervoltage connector - Ts3 (Required) CSA / UL listed Part number Breaker type Ts3 7/48 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Fixed Draw-out KTs3C-SU KTs3C-SUP Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical accessories Undervoltage release UVR - T7 / T7M CSA / UL listed Part number Control voltage T7...T7M 24V AC/DC KT7XU0 30V AC/DC KT7XU9 48V AC/DC KT7XU8 60V AC/DC KT7XU7 110...120V AC/DC KT7XU6 120...127V AC/DC KT7XU5 220...240V AC/DC KT7XU4 250V AC/DC KT7XU3 380...440V AC KT7XU2 440...480V AC KT7XU1 Undervoltage release UVR - T8 CSA / UL listed Part number Control voltage T8 24V AC/DC KT8EU0 30V AC/DC KT8EU9 48V AC/DC KT8EU8 60V AC/DC KT8EU7 110...120V AC/DC KT8EU6 120...127V AC/DC KT8EU5 220...240V AC/DC KT8EU4 250V AC/DC KT8EU3 380...440V AC KT8EU2 440...480V AC KT8EU1 Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/49 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical accessories Shunt closing release YC - T7M CSA / UL listed Part number Control voltage T7M 24V AC/DC KT7MXC0 30V AC/DC KT7MXC9 48V AC/DC KT7MXC8 60V AC/DC KT7MXC7 110...120V AC/DC KT7MXC6 120...127V AC/DC KT7MXC5 220...240V AC/DC KT7MXC4 250V AC/DC KT7MXC3 380...440V AC KT7MXC2 440...480V AC KT7MXC1 Shunt closing release YC - T8 CSA / UL listed Part number Control voltage T8 24V AC/DC KT8EC0 30V AC/DC KT8EC9 48V AC/DC KT8EC8 60V AC/DC KT8EC7 110...120V AC/DC KT8EC6 120...127V AC/DC KT8EC5 220...240V AC/DC KT8EC4 250V AC/DC KT8EC3 380...440V AC KT8EC2 440...480V AC KT8EC1 7/50 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical accessories Auxiliary contacts AUX - T1...T6 CSA / UL listed Part number Control voltage T1...T3 T4...T6 1 form C + 1 BA 250V AC/DC KT3AS (1) KT6AS 3 form C + 1 BA 250V AC/DC KT3AS3 (1) KT6AS3 2 form C 400V AC - KT6AS2 3 form C + 1 BA 24V DC - KT6AS3L Manual / Remote signalling contact for stored energy motor operator - KT6MA (1) Can't be fitted with T2 equipped with PR221DS electronic trip unit Auxiliary contacts AUX - T2 with PR221DS Part number Control voltage T2 2 form C + 1 BA for PR221DS KT2AS-E 1 form C + 1 BA + 1S51 for PR221DS KT2AS-E2 Auxiliary contacts AUX - T4...T6 with PR222DS/PD-A only Part number Control voltage 1 form C + 1 BA for PR222DS/PD-A T4...T5 T6 KT5AS-E KT6AS-E Auxiliary contacts AUX - Ts3 (Requires a connector) CSA / UL listed Part number Control voltage Ts3 2 form C 250V AC/DC KTs3AS 1 form C + 1 BA 250V AC/DC KTs3BA Auxiliary contacts connector - Ts3 (Required) CSA / UL listed Part number Breaker type Ts3 Fixed Draw-out KTs3C-AB KTs3C-ABP Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/51 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical accessories Auxiliary contacts AUX - T7 / T7M CSA / UL listed Part number Type T7 T7M 1 form C + 1 BA 400V AC KT7AS - 2 form C 400V AC KT7AS2 KT7XAS2 1 form C + 1 BA 24V DC 2 form C 24V DC KT7ASL - KT7XAS2L KT7XAS2L 1 S51 250V AC KT7S51 KT7XS51 Ready to close contact 24V DC - KT7XRTC24 Ready to close contact 250V AC/DC - KT7XRTC250 Spring charged 24 V DC - KT7XSC24 Spring charged 250V AC/DC - KT7XSC250 1 BA + remote reset 24...30V AC/DC - KT7XETBAR9 1 BA + remote reset 110...130V AC/DC - KT7XETBAR5 1 BA + remote reset 200...240V AC/DC - KT7XETBAR4 Note: For T7/T7M in draw-out version, sliding contact blocks for cradle and breaker are necessary Possible standard combinations are (excluding S51, RTC and SC): T7: a) 2 form C + 1 BA T7M: a) 2 form C b) 3 form C + 1 BA b) 4 form C c) 2 form C Auxiliary contacts AUX - T8 CSA / UL listed Part number Type 4 form C for PR232-PR331 4 form C for PR332 (1) 4 form C for PR232-PR331 low voltage 24V 4 form C for PR332 low voltage 24V 1 BA T8 KT8AS4 KT8AS4-332 KT8AS4L KT8AS4L-332 KT8ETBA 1 BA + remote reset 24...30V AC/DC KT8ETBAR9 1 BA + remote reset 110...130V AC/DC KT8ETBAR5 1 BA + remote reset 220...240V AC/DC KT8ETBAR4 1 NC contact for UVR de-energized KT8EUE10 1 NO contact for UVR de-energized KT8EUE01 (1) 4 auxiliary contacts supplied standard on T8 equipped with PR332. To be ordered as spare part. 7/52 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical accessories Early auxiliary contacts AUE - T1...T7 Part number Type Early make contact on rotary handle T1...T3 T4...T5 T6 T7 KT3EM KT5EM KT6EM KT7EM Note: For T7 in draw-out version, sliding contact blocks for cradle and breaker are necessary Auxiliary position contacts AUP - T4...T6 Part number Type T4...T6 1 form C RACKED-IN contact 400V AC/DC 1 form C RACKED-IN contact 24V DC 1 form C RACKED-OUT contact 400V AC/DC 1 form C RACKED-OUT contact 24V DC KT6AUPI KT6AUPI24V KT6AUPP KT6AUPP24V Auxiliary position contacts AUP - T7 / T7M CSA / UL listed Part number Type T7...T7M Position contacts 24V DC KT7XAUP24 Position conacts 250V AC KT7XAUP250 Mechanical counter - T7M...T8 Part number Type Operation counter T7M T8 KT7XEMC KT8EMC Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/53 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical accessories Solenoid motor operator MOS - T1...T3 CSA / UL listed Part number Control voltage T1...T3 TOP mounted 48...60V DC KT3M1 TOP mounted 110...250V AC/DC KT3M2 Direct action motor operator - Ts3 (Requires a connector) CSA / UL listed Part number Control voltage Ts3 24V DC KTs3M8 48V DC KTs3M7 100...125V AC/DC KTs3M4 220...250V AC/DC KTs3M2 Direct action motor operator connector - Ts3 (Required) CSA / UL listed Part number Breaker type Ts3 Fixed Draw-out KTs3C-M KTs3C-MP Stored energy motor operator MOE - T4...T6 CSA / UL listed Part number Control voltage T4...T5 T6 24V DC KT5M8 KT6M8 48...60V DC KT5M7 KT6M7 110...125V AC/DC KT5M4 KT6M4 380V AC KT5M3 KT6M3 220...250V AC/DC KT5M2 KT6M2 Stored energy motor operator with electronics MOE-E - T4...T6 IEC listed Part number Control voltage T4...T5 T6 24V DC KT5M8-E KT6M8-E 48...60V DC KT5M7-E KT6M7-E 110...125V AC/DC KT5M4-E KT6M4-E 380V AC KT5M3-E KT6M3-E 220...250V AC/DC KT5M2-E KT6M2-E 7/54 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Electrical accessories Spring charging motor - T7M CSA / UL listed Part number Control voltage T7M 24...30V AC/DC KT7MXM9 48...60V AC/DC KT7MXM7 100...130V AC/DC KT7MXM5 220...250V AC/DC KT7MXM3 380...415V AC KT7MXM2 Note: For T7M in draw-out version, sliding contact blocks for cradle and breaker are necessary Spring charging motor - T8 CSA / UL listed Part number Control voltage T8 24...30V AC/DC KT8EM9 48...60V AC/DC KT8EM7 100...130V AC/DC KT8EM5 220...250V AC/DC KT8EM3 CT for external neutral - T4...T6 UL / CSA listed Part number Type T4 T5 T6 CT for external neutral 100 A (1) KT4NCT-100 - - CT for external neutral 150 A (1) KT4NCT-150 - - CT for external neutral 250 A (1) KT4NCT-250 - - CT for external neutral 300 A (1) - KT5NCT-300 - CT for external neutral 400 A (1) - KT5NCT-400 - CT for external neutral 600 A (1) - KT5NCT-600 KT6NCT-600 CT for external neutral 800 A (1) - - KT6NCT-800 (1) X4 connector required to connect to trip unit Current sensors for external neutral - T7...T8 UL / CSA listed Part number Type T7...T7M T8 Current sensors for external neutral 400...1200 A KT7XNCT-1200 - Current sensors for external neutral 1000...3000 A - KT8NCT-3000 X3-X4 connectors for external neutral - T4...T6 UL / CSA listed Part number Type Fixed Plug-in / Draw-out X3 connector for T4...T6 equipped with PR222DS trip unit KT6CX3 KT6CX3-P X4 connector for T4...T6 equipped with PR222DS trip unit KT6CX4 KT6CX4-P Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/55 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Mechanical accessories Rotary handle operators (Direct mounted) RHD - T1...T7 CSA / UL listed Part number Type Rotary handle FIXED / PLUG-IN Rotary handle DRAW-OUT T1...T3 T4...T5 T6 T7 KT3RH KT5RH KT6RH KT7RH - KT5RHW KT6RHW KT7RH Rotary handle operators (Variable depth) RHD - T1...T7 CSA / UL listed Part number Type KT3VD-M + KT3VD-S + KT3VD-H T1...T3 T4...T5 T6 T7 Mechanism KT3VD-M KT5VD-M KT6VD-M KT7VD-M NEMA 1 square type handle KT3VD-H KT5VD-H KT6VD-H KT7VD-H NEMA 4, 4x pistol type black handle - - - - NEMA 4, 4x pistol type yellow handle - - - - NEMA 1,3R,12 pistol type black handle NEMA 1,3R,12 pistol type yellow handle Shaft for pistol type handle Shaft for square type handle OHB pistol type handle OHB65J6B OHB125J10B OHB125J10B OHB125J10B - - - - OXP6X430 OXP10X500 OXP10X500 OXP10X500 KT3VD-S KT5VD-S KT5VD-S KT7VD-S Note: A complete kit consists in 1 mechanism + 1 shaft + 1 handle. KT*VD-S shall only be used with KT*VD-H handle type Rotary handle operators (Direct mounted) RHD - Ts3 Part number Type Rotary handle FIXED / PLUG-IN Rotary handle DRAW-OUT Ts3 KTs3RH KTs3RHW Rotary handle operators (Variable depth) RHD - Ts3 Part number Type Mechanism NEMA 1 square type handle KTs3VD-M + KTs3VD-S + KTs3VD-H Ts3 KTs3VD-M KTs3VD-H NEMA 4, 4x pistol type black handle OHB125L10 NEMA 1,3R,12 pistol type black handle OHB125J10X Shaft for pistol type handle Shaft for square type handle OXP10X500 KTs3VD-S Note: A complete kit consists in 1 mechanism + 1 shaft + 1 handle. KTs3VD-S shall only be used with KTs3VD-H handle type OHB pistol type handle 7/56 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Mechanical accessories Cable operated flange handles - T1...T5 CSA / UL listed (Discount DS-HT) Part number Type Mechanism NEMA 1,3R,12 grey painted handle NEMA 4, 4x nickel plated handle T1...T2 T3 Ts3...T4 T5 MKCT2 MKCT3 MKCT4 MKCT5 OHF1C12T OHF1C12T OHF1C12 (1) OHF1C4T OHF1C4T OHF1C4 OHF1C12 (1) (1) OHF1C4 (1) (1) Discount DS-H Cables for flange handles - T1...T5 CSA / UL listed (Discount DS-H) Part number Type T1...T5 Cable 91 cm (36") OXC1L36 Cable 122 cm (48") OXC1L48 Cable 152 cm (60") OXC1L60 Cable 183 cm (72") OXC1L72 Cable 213 cm (84") OXC1L84 Cable 244 cm (96") OXC1L96 Cable 305 cm (108") OXC1L108 The flange handle must be composed as follow: a) 1x Fixed circuit-breaker b) 1x Mechanism c) 1x Handle d) 1x Cable Padlock lever lock PLL - T1...T3 CSA / UL listed Part number Type T1...T3 Padlock in OPEN-CLOSED for fixed version only KT3LD Padlock in OPEN for fixed version only KT3LDO Front lever operating mechanism FLD - Ts3 Part number Type Ts3 Padlock in OPEN for fixed / plug-in version KTs3FLD Padlock in OPEN for draw-out version KTs3LDW Front lever operating mechanism FLD - T4...T6 CSA / UL listed Part number Type Padlock in OPEN for fixed / plug-in version Padlock in OPEN for draw-out version T4...T5 T6 KT5FLD KT6FLD KT5FLDW KT6FLDW Padlock lever lock PLL - T7 / T7M CSA / UL listed Part number Type Padlock in OPEN for fixed / Draw-out version T7 T7M KT7LDO KT7MLDO Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/57 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Mechanical accessories Padlock - T8 CSA / UL listed Part number Type T8 Padlock in OPEN position KT8EPD1 Padlock in OPEN position HD KT8EPDHD1 Pushbutton protection - T7M...T8 Part number Type T7M T8 Pushbutton protection KT7XTPC KT8EPG Pushbutton protection independent cover KT7XTPCI - Key lock for rotary handle mechanism RHL - T1...T3 Part number Type T1...T3 Different keys in OPEN position KT3RHL3 Key lock for rotary handle mechanism KLF - Ts3 Part number Type T1...T3 Different keys in OPEN position KTs3KLFD Same keys in OPEN position KTs3KLFD-2 Key lock for rotary handle mechanism KLF - T4...T6 Part number Type T4...T5 T6 KT5KL-D KT6KLFD Same keys in OPEN position # 20005 KT5KL-20005 KT6KLFS-20005 Same keys in OPEN position # 20006 KT5KL-20006 KT6KLFS-20006 Same keys in OPEN position # 20007 KT5KL-20007 KT6KLFS-20007 Same keys in OPEN position # 20008 KT5KL-20008 KT6KLFS-20008 Different keys in OPEN position 7/58 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Mechanical accessories Key lock for rotary handle mechanism KLF - T7 Part number Type Ts3 Different keys in OPEN position KT7KLFD Same keys in OPEN position # 20005 KT7KLFS-20005 Same keys in OPEN position # 20006 KT7KLFS-20006 Same keys in OPEN position # 20007 KT7KLFS-20007 Same keys in OPEN position # 20008 KT7KLFS-20008 Key lock on circuit breaker KLC - T7 / T7M Part number Type T7 T7M KT7KLCD KT7MKLCD Same keys in OPEN position # 20005 KT7KLCS-20005 KT7MKLCS-20005 Same keys in OPEN position # 20006 KT7KLCS-20006 KT7MKLCS-20006 Same keys in OPEN position # 20007 KT7KLCS-20007 KT7MKLCS-20007 Same keys in OPEN position # 20008 KT7KLCS-20008 KT7MKLCS-20008 Different keys in OPEN position Key lock on circuit breaker - T8 Part number Type Ts3 Different keys in OPEN position KT8KL-D Same keys in OPEN position # 20005 KT8KL-20005 Same keys in OPEN position # 20006 KT8KL-20006 Same keys in OPEN position # 20007 KT8KL-20007 Same keys in OPEN position # 20008 KT8KL-20008 Key lock for motor operator MOL - Ts3 Part number Type Ts3 Different keys in OPEN position KTs3KL-EO Same keys in OPEN position KTs3KL-EO-2 Key lock for motor operator MOL - T4...T6 Part number Type T7M T8 KT5KL-MO-D KT6KL-MO-D Same keys in OPEN position # 20005 KT5KL-MO-20005 KT6KL-MO-20005 Same keys in OPEN position # 20006 KT5KL-MO-20006 KT6KL-MO-20006 Same keys in OPEN position # 20007 KT5KL-MO-20007 KT6KL-MO-20007 Same keys in OPEN position # 20008 KT5KL-MO-20008 KT6KL-MO-20008 Different keys in OPEN position Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/59 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Mechanical accessories Key lock in RACKED-IN/TEST/RACKED-OUT position - T7 / T7M Part number Type T7...T7M For 1 circuit breaer, different key KT7XPL-D For group of circuit breakers, same key # 20005 KT7XPL-20005 For group of circuit breakers, same key # 20006 KT7XPL-20006 For group of circuit breakers, same key # 20007 KT7XPL-20007 For group of circuit breakers, same key # 20008 KT7XPL-20008 Provision for Ronis key lock KT7XPL-R Provision for Profalux key lock KT7XPL-P Provision for Castell key lock KT7XPL-C Provision for Kirk key lock KT7XPL-K Note: the cradle can be euipped with 2 different keylocks Accessory for lock in RACKED-OUT position - T7 / T7M Part number Type T7...T7M Lock in racked-out position KT7XPLA Mechanical compartment door lock - T7 / T7M Part number Type T7...T7M Door lock with cables (1) Door lock (wall fixing) KT7XMLCD KT7XMLWMCB Door lock (floor fixing) KT7XMLFMCB Door lock for DRAW-OUT type KT7XMLDOCB Note: a circuit breaker equipped with mechanical compartment door lock, can't be interlocked with another circuit breaker (1) To be ordered with cable kit for interlock and plate for interlock consistent with the circuit breaker Mechanical interlock MIF - T1...T3 CSA / UL listed Part number Type T1...T3 Front interlock piece for 2 circuit breakers KT3MIF2 Front interlock piece for 3 circuit breakers KT3MIF3 Mechanical interlock MIR - T3...Ts3 CSA / UL listed Part number Type T3 Ts3 Cable kit KT3MI-H KTs3MI-H Plate for fixed unit (on rear plate) KT3MI-V KTs3MI-V 7/60 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Mechanical accessories Mechanical interlock MIR - T4...T5 CSA / UL listed Part number Type T4...T5 Horizontal interlock KT5MI-H Vertical interlock KT5MI-V Interlock plate Type A T4 (FPW) + T4 (FPW KT5MIP-A Interlock plate Type B T4 (FPW) + T5 400 (FPW) or T5 600 (F) KT5MIP-B Interlock plate Type C T4 (FPW) + T5 600 (PW) KT5MIP-C Interlock plate Type D T5 400 (FPW) or T5 600 (F) + T5 400 (FPW) or T5 600 (F) KT5MIP-D Interlock plate Type E T5 400 (FPW) or T5 600 (F) + T5 600 (PW) KT5MIP-E Interlock plate Type F T5 600 (PW) + T5 600 (PW) KT5MIP-F Note: to interlock 2 circuit breakers you have to order a frame unit interlock (H or V) and the interlock plate Mechanical interlock MIR - T6 CSA / UL listed Part number Type T6 Horizontal interlock KT6MI-H Vertical interlock KT6MI-V Mechanical interlock with cables between 2 circuit breakers - T7 / T7M CSA / UL listed Part number Type T7...T7M Cable kit KT7XMLC Plate for fixed unit (on rear plate) KT7XIPB Wiring kit for interlock with Emax KT7XCI Plate for FIXED type KT7XMLPW Plate for DRAW-OUT type KT7XMLPF Note: to interlock 2 circuit breakers you have to order a cable kit and 2 plates in function of the version of the circuit breaker IP54 door protection - T7M...T8 Part number Type IP54 protection door T7M T8 KT7XDC KT8EDC Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/61 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Mechanical accessories Din rail adapters - T1...T3 Part number Type 35mm din rail adapter T1...T2 T3 KT2DIN KT3DIN Din rail adapters - Ts3 Part number Type 75mm din rail adapter Ts3 KTs3DMB High insulating terminal covers (kit of 2) HTC - T1...T7 Part number Breaker type 3 poles 4 poles T1 KT1HTC-3 KT1HTC-4 T2 KT2HTC-3 KT2HTC-4 T3 KT3HTC-3 KT3HTC-4 Ts3 KTs3HTC-3 KTs3HTC-4 T4 KT4HTC-3 KT4HTC-4 T5 KT5HTC-3 KT5HTC-4 T6 KT6HTC-3 KT6HTC-4 T7...T7M KT7XHTC-3 KT7XHTC-4 Low insulating terminal covers (kit of 2) LTC - T1...T7 Part number Breaker type 3 poles 4 poles T1 KT1LTC-3 KT1LTC-4 T2 KT2LTC-3 KT2LTC-4 T3 KT3LTC-3 KT3LTC-4 Ts3 KTs3LTC-3 KTs3LTC-4 T4 KT4LTC-3 KT4LTC-4 T5 KT5LTC-3 KT5LTC-4 T6 KT6LTC-3 KT6LTC-4 T7...T7M KT7XLTC-3 KT7XLTC-4 Sealable screws for terminal covers - T1...T7M Part number Type Sealable screws T1...T5 T6...T7M KT5LC-S K6LC-S Sealable screws for terminal covers - Ts3 Part number Type Sealable screws 7/62 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Ts3 KT6LC-S Tmax molded case circuit breakers Mechanical accessories Phase barriers PB - T1...T7M Part number Type T1...T3 T4...T5 T6 T7...T7M Low - 4 pieces (for 3 pole circuit breakers) KT3PBL-3 KT5PBL-3 KT6PBL-3 KT7PBL-3 High - 4 pieces (for 3 pole circuit breakers) KT3PBH-3 KT5PBH-3 - KT7PBH-3 Low - 6 pieces (for 4 pole circuit breakers) KT3PBL-4 KT5PBL-4 KT6PBL-4 KT7PBL-4 High - 6 pieces (for 4 pole circuit breakers) KT3PBH-4 KT5PBH-4 - KT7PBH-4 Phase barriers PB - T8 (Required for lugs) Part number Type T8 Low - 2 pieces (for 3 pole circuit breakers) KT8PBL-3 High - 2 pieces (for 3 pole circuit breakers) KT8PBH-3 Low - 3 pieces (for 4 pole circuit breakers) KT8PBL-4 High - 3 pieces (for 4 pole circuit breakers) KT8PBH-4 Front terminals for copper / aluminium cables FC CuAl - T1...T8 CSA / UL listed Part number Breaker type T2 100 A (14 AWG - 1/0) 3 poles 4 poles KT2100-3 KT2100-4 T3 100 A (14 AWG - 1/0) KT3100-3 KT3100-4 T3 225 A (4 AWG - 350 kcmil) KT3225-3 KT3225-4 Ts3 100 A (14 AWG - 1/0) KTs3100-3 KTs3100-4 Ts3 150 A (2 AWG - 4/0) KTs3150-3 KTs3150-4 Ts3 225 A (4 AWG - 300 kcmil) KTs3225-3 KTs3225-4 T4 100 A (14 AWG - 1/0) KT4100-3 KT4100-4 T4 250 A (6 AWG - 350 kcmil) KT4250-3 KT4250-4 T5 300 A (250 kcmil - 500 kcmil) KT5300-3 KT5300-4 T5 400 A (2x 3/0 - 2x 250 kcmil) (1) KT5400-3 KT5400-4 T5 600 A (2x 3/0 - 2x 500 kcmil) KT5600-3 KT5600-4 T6 600 A (2x 250 kcmil - 2x 500 kcmil) KT6600-3 KT6600-4 T6 800 A (3x 2/0 - 3x 400 kcmil) (1) KT6800-3 KT6800-4 KT7X1200-3 KT7X1200-4 T8 1600 A (4x 1/0 - 4x 750 kcmil) K8TL - T8 2500 A (6x 1/0 - 6x 750 kcmil) K8TM - T7...T7M 1200 A (4x 4/0 - 4x 500 kcmil) Note: 1 kit consists of 3 lugs for 3 pole and 4 lugs for 4 pole. 2 kits required per breaker for line and load connection (1) Comes with high profile terminal covers Front extended terminals EF - T1...T7M Part number Breaker type T2 3 poles 4 poles KT2EF-3 KT2EF-4 T3 KT3EF-3 KT3EF-4 Ts3 KTs3EF-3 KTs3EF-4 T4 KT4EF KT4EF-4 T5 KT5EF KT5EF-4 T6 800 A KT6EF-3 KT6EF-4 T7...T7M KT7EF-3 KT7EF-4 Note: 1 kit consists of 3 lugs for 3 pole and 4 lugs for 4 pole. 2 kits required per breaker for line and load connection Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/63 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Mechanical accessories Rear terminals R - T2...T7M Part number Breaker type 3 poles 4 poles T2 KT2R-3 KT2R-4 T3 KT3R-3 KT3R-4 KTs3R-4 Ts3 KTs3R-3 T4 KT4R-3 KT4R-4 T5 KT5R-3 KT5R-4 T6 800 A KT6R-3 KT6R-4 T7...T7M KT7XR-3 KT7XR-4 Note: 1 kit consists of 3 lugs for 3 pole and 4 lugs for 4 pole. 2 kits required per breaker for line and load connection Rear "T" terminals - T8 Part number Breaker type T8 (2500 A max) Kit of 6 Kit of 8 KT8VR2500 KT8VR2500-4 Rear flat horizontal terminals HR - T7 / T7M Part number Breaker type T7...T7M 3 poles 4 poles KT7XHR-3 KT7XHR-4 Note: 1 kit consists of 3 lugs for 3 pole and 4 lugs for 4 pole. 2 kits required per breaker for line and load connection Rear flat vertical terminals HR - T7 / T7M Part number Breaker type T7...T7M 3 poles 4 poles KT7XVR-3 KT7XVR-4 Note: 1 kit consists of 3 lugs for 3 pole and 4 lugs for 4 pole. 2 kits required per breaker for line and load connection Front terminal adapters (6 plugs and 6 screws) F - T2...T7M Part number Breaker type T2 T2...T7M KT2FC-6 T3 KT3FC-6 Ts3 KTs3FC-6 T4 KT4FC-6 T5 KT5FC-6 T6 KT6FC-6 T7...T7M KT7XF-6 Note: to be requested as loose kit only. 7/64 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL Tmax molded case circuit breakers Mechanical accessories Front display unit FDU - T4...T6 Part number Type Front display unit for PR222 T4...T5 T6 KT5FDU KT6FDU Modules for PR33x electronic trip units - T7...T8 UL / CSA listed Part number Type PR330/V voltage measuring module (1) PR330/V voltage measuring module for 4P (1) PR330/D-M Modbus RTU communication module (1) T7 T7M T8 KT7PR330V KT7XPR330V KT8PR330V-3 - - KT8PR330V-4 KT8330DMOD KT8330DMOD KT8330DMOD PR330/R actuator module (1) 1SDA063146R1 1SDA063146R1 BT030 external bluetooth device 1SDA058259R1 1SDA058259R1 1SDA058259R1 PR030B battery unit 1SDA058258R1 1SDA058258R1 1SDA058258R1 - (1) Can't be ordered loose. To be assembled at factory Tmax T Generation UL | Molded case circuit-breakers 7/65 Tmax molded case circuit breakers Spare parts Rating plug - T7...T8 Part number Plug type T7...T7M T8 In = 400 A KT70400RP - In = 600 A KT70600RP - In = 800 A KT70800RP - In = 1000 A KT71000RP KT81000RP In = 1200 A KT71200RP KT81200RP In = 1600 A - KT81600RP In = 2000 A - KT82000RP In = 2500 A - KT82500RP In = 3000 A - KT83000RP Flange for compartment door - T1...T6 Part number Type Flange for compartment door for fixed version T1...T3 T4...T5 T6 KT3FCD KT5FCD KT6FCD Flange for compartment door - T7...T8 Part number Type Flange for compartment door for fixed version 7/66 Molded case circuit-breakers | Tmax T Generation UL T7...T7M T8 KT7XFCD KT8FCD ABB Canada 2117, 32e Avenue Lachine, QC H8T 3J1 Tel: 514-420-3100 Toll free: 1-800-567-0283 Fax: 514-420-3137 Website: www.abb.ca While all care has been taken to ensure that the information contained in this publication is correct, no responsibility can be accepted for any inaccuracy. The Company reserves the right to alter or modify the information contained herein at any time in the light of technical or other developments. Technical specifications are valid under normal operating conditions only. The Company does not accept any responsibility for any misuse of the product and cannot be held liable for indirect or consequential damages. (c) Copyright 2012 ABB Inc. All rights reserved. 1SXP210001C0201_AC1615S / March 2012 Contact us